PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 6 The Adi Granth

Punjab State Board PSEB 12th Class Religion Book Solutions Chapter 6 The Adi Granth Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 12 Religion Chapter 6 The Adi Granth

Long Answer Type Questions:

Question 1.
Describe the Editorial Scheme of Sri Guru Granth Sahib adopted by Sri Guru Arjan Dev Ji.
Or
Discuss the Editing Art of Sri Guru Granth Sahib Ji.
Or
Who compiled, how compiled, when compiled and where was compiled Guru Granth Sahib? Discuss.
Or
Who and how did the editing work of Sri Guru Granth Sahib? Discuss.
Or
Give number of the Sikh Gurus whose composition are included in the Guru Granth Sahib. Write a note on the Editorial Scheme of Guru Granth Sahib.
Or
Examine critically the Editorial Scheme of Guru Granth Sahib.
Or
Discuss the history of Compilation and Editing Scheme of Guru Granth Sahib.
Or
Describe the Editing Art of Guru Arjan Dev Ji in the context of editing Guru Granth Sahib.
Or
Write a note on the Editorial Scheme of Guru Arjan Dev on the basis of Guru Granth Sahib.
Or
Describe about the editing of Gurubani.

Or
Write a brief history of the compilation of the Guru Granth Sahib. Give the number of musical measures under which hymns are included in the Guru Granth Sahib.
Or
Write a brief history of the compilation of the Guru Granth Sahib. Give names of any five Bhaktas, whose hymns are included in the Guru Granth Sahib.
Or
Throw light on the history of the compilation of the Guru Granth Sahib.
Or
Sahib? What do you know about its editorial scheme?
Or
Guru Arjan Dev Ji made a significant contribution to the development of the Sikh faith by providing it with a scripture. Discuss.
Or
Write about the editorial scheme of Guru Granth Sahib.
Or
Write a brief history of the compilation of the Guru Granth Sahib.
Or
Why was Adi Granth compiled? Also, explain its importance.
Or
Write a note on Guru Arjan Dev’s editing of the Guru Granth Sahib.
Or
Throw light on the editorial scheme of Guru Granth Sahib.
Or
Discuss the contents of Sri Guru Granth Sahib Ji.
Or
Describe the compilation and editing Art of Sri Guru Granth Sahib Ji.
Answer:
The compilation of the Adi Granth Sahib in 1604 A.D. was undoubtedly the greatest achievement of Guru Arjan Dev Ji. Its main objective was to give a new direction not only to the Sikhs but to the entire humanity. Its compilation work was done by Bhai Gurdas Ji under the supervision of Guru Arjan Sahib. It includes the Bani of the first 5 Gurus, 15 Bhagats and Sufi Saints, 11 Bhatts and 4 devotees of the Guru’s house without any caste or religious discrimination.

Guru Arjan Dev Ji made the greatest contribution in the Bani of Adi Granth Sahib Ji. The Bani of Adi Granth Sahib has been divided according to 31 Ragas. The Bani is full of Shabads of admiration for God. It holds no place for vain customs and superstitions. The first illumination of

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 6 The Adi Granth Img 1

the Adi Granth Sahib was done in Amritsar on 16th August, 1604 A.D. and Baba Buddha Ji was appointed as its first Granthi. In 1706 A.D. Guru Gobind Singh Ji prepared the second edition of Adi Granth Sahib at Damdama Sahib. He included in it 116 Shabads and Salokas of Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji. It was compiled by Bhai Mani Singh Ji under the supervision of Guru Gobind Singh Ji. Adi Granth Sahib, thus have the Banis of 37 great personalities. On 6th October, 1708 A.D. Guru Gobind Singh Ji honoured Adi Granth Sahib Ji with the name of Guru Granth Sahib Ji.

The Guru Granth Sahib Ji holds the same respect for the Sikhs, as does the Bible for the Christians, the Quran for the Muslims and Vedas and Gita for the Hindus. In reality, it is not just a sacred religious scripture of the Sikhs but is an invaluable heritage for the entire humanity.

I. Editiorial Scheme

1. Need for its Compilation : There were many reasons responsible for the compilation of the Adi Granth Sahib. During the time of Guru Arjan Dev Ji, Sikhism was spreading very fast. It was essential to compile a religious scripture to guide them. Secondly, Prithia, Guru Arjan Dev Ji’s elder brother wanted to acquire the Gurgaddi. With this objective, he started propagating his own teachings in the name of the Bani of Guru Ji. Guru Arjan Sahib wanted to put the Bani in record in its pure form, so that the Sikhs had no doubt.

Thirdly, if the Sikhs wanted to establish their own independent state, it was essential for them to have their own religious scriptures. Fourthly, Guru Amar Das Ji also encouraged the Sikhs to read the divine Bani of Guru Sahib. Guru Sahib says in the Anand Sahib, Come, ye beloved disciples of the Guru, sing ye the true word. Sing ye the word of the Guru, which is the most sublime of all. They, on whom is the Lord’s Grace, cherish it in the mind.

So drink in ye the Lord’s Nectar and be ever imbued with His love and dwell on the lord the support of the earth. Says Nanak, “Sing ye ever the word of the True Guru.” Due to these reasons, Guru Arjan Dev Ji felt the need for the compilation of the Adi Granth Sahib.

2, Collection of Hymns: Guru Arjan Dev Ji used various sources for writing the Bani. The Bani of the first three Gurus—Guru Nanak Dev Ji, Guru Angad Dev Ji and Guru Amar Das Ji was with the eldest son of Guru Amar Das Ji i.e. Baba Mohan Ji. To compile the Bani, Guru Arjan Dev Ji first sent Bhai Gurdas Ji and then Baba Buddha Ji to Baba Mohan Ji but they were not successful in their objective. After this, Guru Sahib himself went from Amritsar to Goindwal Sahib barefooted. Impressed by the humility of Guru Ji, Baba Mohan Ji gave away the entire Bani to Guru Ji.

Guru Arjan Dev Ji already had the Bani of Guru Ram Das Ji with him. Guru Sahib included his own Bani in it. After this Guru Sahib called upon the devotees of Hindu Bhagats and Muslim Saints and asked them to recite the hymns of their saints correctly. The hymns of only those Bhagats and Saints were included in the Guru Granth Sahib which were similar to the Bani of the Gurus. The works of Kahna, Chhajju, Shah Hussain and Pilu were rejected.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 6 The Adi Granth Img 2

3. Compilation of Adi Granth Sahib : For the compilation of the Adi Granth Sahib, Guru Arjan Sahib was on a look out for a silent and beautiful place towards the south of Amritsar. At this place Guru Sahib got the Ramsar tank built. Along the banks of this sarovar, under a pipal tree, the Guru Ji got a tent erected. Guru Arjan Dev Ji sat here to compile the work of Adi Granth Sahib.

Guru Arjan Dev Ji kept dictating the hymns and Bhai Gurdas Ji kept writing. This great work came to an end in August, 1604 A.D. The first illumination of Adi Granth Sahib Ji was done in Harmandir Sahib Ji in Amritsar and Baba Buddha Ji was appointed as its First Head Granthi.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 6 The Adi Granth

4. Contributors in the Granth Sahib : The Adi Granth Sahib is a vast Granth. The contributors in the Granth Sahib can be divided into four classes :

(a) Sikh Gurus : The greatest contribution towards the Adi Granth Sahib Ji is made by the Sikh Gurus. It consists of 976 Sabads of Guru Nanak Dev Ji, 62 Sabads of Guru Angad Dev Ji, 907 Sabads of Guru Amar Das Ji, 679 Sabads of Guru Ram Das Ji and 2216 Sabads of Guru Arjan Dev Ji. Thereafter, during the time of Guru Gobind Singh Ji, 116 Sabads and Salokas of Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji were included in it.

(b) Bhagats and Saints : Adi Granth Sahib Ji includes the Bani of 15 Hindu Bhagats and Saints. Important among these Bhagats and Saints are Bhagat Kabir Ji, Sheikh Farid Ji, Guru NamdevJi, Ravidas Ji, Bhagat Dhanna Ji, Bhagat Ramanand Ji and Bhagat Jaidev Ji. Of them all, the maximum number of Sabads, are those of Kabir Ji i.e. 541 Sabads. ‘

(c) Bhatts : The Adi Granth Sahib Ji has the hymns of 11 Bhatts. The total number of these hymns is 125. Some popular Bhatts are Nal, Bal, Jalap, Bhikha and Harbans.

(d) Others : Besides the above great personalities, the Ballads of Satta, Balwand, Mardana and Sunder are also included in the Adi Granth Sahib Ji.

5. Arrangement of the Matter : The Adi Granth Sahib Ji has a total of. 1430 pages. The hymns registered in it can be divided into three parts. The first part includes Japji Sahib, Rehras Sahib and Sohila. They are described in pages 1-13 of the Guru Granth Sahib. The second part which is called the main part of the Guru Granth Sahib Ji is divided into 31 parts on the basis of 31 Ragas.

One thing to take notice of is that the Ragas that represent extreme joy or extreme sorrow are not included in the Guru Granth Sahib Ji. Each Raga after the praise of God consists of the Shabads of first Guru, Guru Nanak Dev Ji and then the rest of the Gurus in chronological order.

Since the hymns of all the Gurus had the name of ‘Nanak’ in them hence to distinguish between the hymns of different Gurus, the Mahalas are used. The Bani of Guru Nanak Sahib comes under the first Mahala and we use the second Mahala with Guru Angad Sahib Ji.

In every Rag Mala, after the hymns of Guru Sahibs, the creations of Bhagats and Sufi Saints is given in chronological order. It is covered in pages from 14 to 1353. The third part includes the Sawaiyas and the Shalokas of the Sikh Gurus and Bhagats that cannot be further divided into Ragas. The Adi Granth Sahib ends with two Shalokas of the ‘Mundavani’. These Shalokas are recited by Guru Arjan Sahib. Here he gives the summary of Adi Granth Sahib Ji and thanks God. In the end, is the Antika under the title of‘Rag Mala’. The third part includes the pages 1354 to 1430 of the Adi Granth Sahib Ji.

Japji Sahib 1 – 8
Rehras Sahib 8 – 12
Sohila 12 – 13
Sri-Rag 14 – 93
Majh 94 – 150
Guari 151 – 346
Asa 347 – 488
Gujri 489  – 526
Devgandhari 527  – 536
Bihagra 537  – 556
Wadahans 557  – 594
Sorath 595  – 659
Dhanasri 660  – 695
Jait Sri 696  – 710
Todi 711  – 718
Bairari 719  – 720
Tilang 721  – 727
Suhi 728  – 794
Bilaval 795  – 858
Gaund 859  – 875
Ramkali 876  – 974
Natnarain 975  – 983
Mah Gaura 984  – 988
Maru 989  – 1106
Tukhari 1107  – 1117
Kedara 1118  – 1124
Bhairav 1125  – 1167
Basant 1168  – 1196
Sarang 1197  – 1253
Malar 1254  – 1293
Kanra 1294  – 1318
Kalyan 1319  – 1326
Prabhati 1327  – 1351
Jaijawanti 1352  – 1353
S&ialoka Sahskriti 1353 – 1360
Gatha 1360  – 1361
Funhe 1361  – 1363
Chaubole 1363  – 1364
Shaloka Kabir 1364  – 1377
Shaloka Farid 1377  – 1384
Swaiyas Guru Aijan 1385  – 1389
Swaiyas Bhats 1389  – 1409
Shalokas Gurus 1409  – 1426
Shalokas Guru Tegh Bahadur 1426  – 1429
Mundavani 1429
Rag Mala 1429  – 1430

6. Synthesis of Bani and Music: The Sikh Gurus had profound knowledge and taste for music. Rababi Mardana always accompanied Guru Nanak Sahib. Guru Aijan Sahib performed the kirtan using Saranda. He was well versed with music. He gave order to a major part of the Bani according to the Ragas during the compilation of Adi Granth Sahib. The Bani consists of 31 Ragas. 30 Ragas from Sri Raga to Prabhati Raga have been composed by Guru Aijan Dev Ji himself. The Bani of Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji is composed in Jaijawanti Rag. It is quite significant to note that Ragas expressing deep sorrow or joy are not included in the Adi Granth Sahib.

7. Subject: The Adi Granth Sahib was written in the praise of God. It renders light on Jap, attainment of Sachch Khand and importance of Guru. It gives the message of welfare of mankind, unity of God and world peace. It does not mention the lives and miracles or any of the worldly associations of the Gurus. The subject matter of Guru Granth Sahib Ji is purely religious.

8. Language: The Adi Granth has been written in the Gurmukhi script. It makes use of the words from Punjabi, Hindi, Marathi, Gujarati, Sanskrit and Persian languages spoken in 15th, 16th and 17th centuries. The hymns of the Gurus are in Punjabi while those of the other Bhagats and Sikh Saints are in other languages.

Significance of Adi Granth Sahib:

The Adi Granth Sahib is a unique religious scripture not only of the Sikhs but of j the entire world. The compilation of this scripture gave the golden principles of life to the Sikh community and also further consolidated it. The hymns of Guru Granth Sahib Ji gives the message of unity of God and brotherhood of mankind.

1. Importance for the Sikhs: The compilation of the Adi Granth Sahib Ji is a great landmark in the history of the Sikhs. It provided the Sikhs with a unique religious scripture. The Hindu scriptures now held no importance for them. It initiated a feeling of a separate communal entity and they totally disintegrated from Hinduism. After Guru Gobind Singh Ji left for his heavenly abode, the Guru Granth Sahib Ji was considered as their Guru by the Sikhs.

These days each Gurdwara in the world has Guru Granth Sahib Ji installed at a higher platform wrapped in silk cloth under a canopy. All the Sikhs revere it and bow before it with great respect. All Sikh ceremonies right from birth till death are done in the presence of the Guru Granth Sahib Ji. For the Sikhs, Guru Granth Sahib is not only a lighthouse but also the main source of inspiration for them. According to Dr. Wazir Singh, “The Adi Granth was indeed his most precious gift to the Sikh world.”

2. Message of Brotherhood: Adi Granth Sahib is the only sacred book of the world which contains hymns without any distinction on the basis of caste, colour or creed. By doing so Guru Arjan Dev Ji has given the message of brotherhood to all human beings. In the present age, when the feeling of communal harmony is disappearing and the whole world is overclouded with the fear of war, the importance of this Granth has increased to a great extent.

In the words of Dr. G.S. Mansukhani, “As long as mankind lives, it will derive peace, wisdom and inspiration from this scripture. It is a unique treasure, a noble heritage for the whole human race.”

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 6 The Adi Granth

3. Literary Importance: From the literary point of view Guru Granth Sahib is a unique work. It occupies the highest place in Punjabi literature. It contains beautiful similies and embellishments. It has a form and finish not equalled by subsequent writers. Therefore, from the literary point of view Guru Granth Sahib carries immense importance.

4. Historical Importance: No doubt Guru Granth Sahib is a religious scripture, yet it furnishes valuable information regarding the social, religious, political and economic life of 16th and 17th centuries. In the political sphere Guru Nanak Sahib has severely criticised the administrative system of the Lodi rulers. Ruling class had become barbarian. Qazi gave justice after taking bribe. The moral standard of Mughal rulers and other courtiers had touched its lowest ebb.

At the time of Babar’s invasion the people of Punjab were leading a miserable life which is described in Guru Nanak Sahib’s ‘Babar Bani.’ In social field women’s position was miserable. They occupied a very low place in the society. The evils of Sati and Purdah system had further worsened their lot. A widow was cursed by one and all. Hindu society was divided into a number of castes and sub-castes. People of higher castes were provided with special privileges. So they had become very haughty.

They treated very the people of low castes harshly. The spirit of both Hinduism and Islam was hidden beneath a mass of formalities and extraneous observances. Brahmans of the Hindu society and Mullas of the Muslim society were fleecing people in the name of religion. Being related to the ruling class the Muslims enjoyed all types of privileges while the Hindus were exploited in all possible ways.

Guru Granth Sahib also throws a good deal of light on the agriculture and trade and commerce in that period. According to Dr. AC. Bannerjee, “The Adi Granth is a rich mine of information on political, religious, social and economic conditions in the Punjab from the last years of the fifteenth to the beginning of the seventeenth century.”

5. Other Importances : Besides the above, there are several other importances of the Adi Granth Sahib Ji. It gives us direction to better our lives now and hereafter. Women who were treated like a shoe were given a new respect. Guru Nanak Sahib says, “Why belittle her who gives birth to Rajas?”

The Adi Granth vehemently opposed the prevalent superstitions in the society thus lending the human race a new direction. It also tells us that we should keep ourselves detached from the materialism of the world just as a dove keeps its wings dry while swiflalniifg in water. It instructs us to do kirtan, recite Nam and get baptised.

The music that accompanies the Bani has the capacity to take the human beings to mysterious heights. Nowhere else nor in any religion can we find such an example as of giving the’Guru Granth Sahib, the due respect of the Guru. To conclude it can be said that the Guru Granth Sahib instructs us righteously in all the spheres of life thereby showering his rich jewels in our lap. In the end, we agree with the words of Dr. H.R. Gupta, “The compilation of the Adi Granth formed an important landmark in the history of the Sikhs.”

Question 2.
Write a brief note on the contributors of Guru Granth Sahib prepared by Guru Arjan Dev.
Or
How many are the contributors of Sri Guru Granth Sahib Ji? Give description of them.
Answer:
No doubt Guru Granth Sahib is a religious scripture, yet it furnishes valuable information regarding the social, religious, political and economic life of 16th and 17th centuries. In the political sphere Guru Nanak Sahib has severely criticised the administrative system of the Lodi rulers. Ruling class had become barbarian. Qazi gave justice after taking bribe. The moral standard of Mughal rulers and other courtiers had touched its lowest ebb.

At the time of Babar’s invasion the people of Punjab were leading a miserable life which is described in Guru Nanak Sahib’s ‘Babar Bani.’ In social field women’s position was miserable. They occupied a very low place in the society. The evils of Sati and Purdah system had further worsened their lot. A widow was cursed by one and all. Hindu society was divided into a number of castes and sub-castes. People of higher castes were provided with special privileges. So they had become very haughty.

Question 3.
Sri Guru Granth Sahib is a sacred Granth of all common people. Discuss.
Answer:
The Adi Granth Sahib is a unique religious scripture not only of the Sikhs but of j the entire world. The compilation of this scripture gave the golden principles of life to the Sikh community and also further consolidated it. The hymns of Guru Granth Sahib Ji gives the message of unity of God and brotherhood of mankind.

1. Importance for the Sikhs : The compilation of the Adi Granth Sahib Ji is a great landmark in the history of the Sikhs. It provided the Sikhs with a unique religious scripture. The Hindu scriptures now held no importance for them. It initiated a feeling of a separate communal entity and they totally disintegrated from Hinduism. After Guru Gobind Singh Ji left for his heavenly abode, the Guru Granth Sahib Ji was considered as their Guru by the Sikhs.

These days each Gurdwara in the world has Guru Granth Sahib Ji installed at a higher platform wrapped in silk cloth under a canopy. All the Sikhs revere it and bow before it with great respect. All Sikh ceremonies right from birth till death are done in the presence of the Guru Granth Sahib Ji. For the Sikhs, Guru Granth Sahib is not only a lighthouse but also the main source of inspiration for them. According to Dr. Wazir Singh, “The Adi Granth was indeed his most precious gift to the Sikh world.”

2. Message of Brotherhood : Adi Granth Sahib is the only sacred book of the world which contains hymns without any distinction on the basis of caste, colour or creed. By doing so Guru Arjan Dev Ji has given the message of brotherhood to all human beings. In the present age, when the feeling of communal harmony is disappearing and the whole world is overclouded with the fear of war, the importance of this Granth has increased to a great extent. In the words of Dr. G.S. Mansukhani, “As long as mankind lives, it will derive peace, wisdom and inspiration from this scripture. It is a unique treasure, a noble heritage for the whole human race.”

3. Literary Importance : From the literary point of view Guru Granth Sahib is a unique work. It occupies the highest place in Punjabi literature. It contains beautiful similies and embellishments. It has a form and finish not equalled by subsequent writers. Therefore, from the literary point of view Guru Granth Sahib carries immense importance.

4. Historical Importance : No doubt Guru Granth Sahib is a religious scripture, yet it furnishes valuable information regarding the social, religious, political and economic life of 16th and 17th centuries. In the political sphere Guru Nanak Sahib has severely criticised the administrative system of the Lodi rulers. Ruling class had become barbarian. Qazi gave justice after taking bribe. The moral standard of Mughal rulers and other courtiers had touched its lowest ebb. At the time of Babar’s invasion the people of Punjab were leading a miserable life which is described in Guru Nanak Sahib’s ‘Babar Bani.’ In social field women’s position was miserable.

They occupied a very low place in the society. The evils of Sati and Purdah system had further worsened their lot. A widow was cursed by one and all. Hindu society was divided into a number of castes and sub-castes. People of higher castes were provided with special privileges. So they had become very haughty.

They treated very the people of low castes harshly. The spirit of both Hinduism and Islam was hidden beneath a mass of formalities and extraneous observances. Brahmans of the Hindu society and Mullas of the Muslim society were fleecing people in the name of religion. Being related to the ruling class the Muslims enjoyed all types of privileges while the Hindus were exploited in all possible ways.

Guru Granth Sahib also throws a good deal of light on the agriculture and trade and commerce in that period. According to Dr. AC. Bannerjee, “The Adi Granth is a rich mine of information on political, religious, social and economic conditions in the Punjab from the last years of the fifteenth to the beginning of the seventeenth century.”

5. Other Importances: Besides the above, there are several other importances of the Adi Granth Sahib Ji. It gives us direction to better our lives now and hereafter. Women who were treated like a shoe were given a new respect. Guru Nanak Sahib says, “Why belittle her who gives birth to Rajas?” The Adi Granth vehemently opposed the prevalent superstitions in the society thus lending the human race a new direction. It also tells us that we should keep ourselves detached from the materialism of the world just as a dove keeps its wings dry while swiflalniifg in water. It instructs us to do kirtan, recite Nam and get baptised.

The music that accompanies the Bani has the capacity to take the human beings to mysterious heights. Nowhere else nor in any religion can we find such an example as of giving the’Guru Granth Sahib, the due respect of the Guru. To conclude it can be said that the Guru Granth Sahib instructs us righteously in all the spheres of life thereby showering his rich jewels in our lap. In the end, we agree with the words of Dr. H.R. Gupta, “The compilation of the Adi Granth formed an important landmark in the history of the Sikhs.”

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 6 The Adi Granth

Short Answer Type Questions (Type-1):

Question 1.
Write a note on the compilation and importance of Adi Granth Sahib (Guru Granth Sahib Ji).
Or
Write a note on Adi Granth Sahib Ji.
Answer:
The most important work during Guru Arjan DeV Ji’s pontificate was the compilation of Adi Granth Sahib. The objective was to compile the Bani of Gurus in one place. Guru Arjan Dev Ji initiated this great work at Ramsar. The Bani of the first five Guru Sahibs, Saints, and Bhagats was included in it. The job of writing Guru Granth Sahib was done by Bhai Gurdas Ji. This great work was completed in 1604 A.D. Later on, the Bani of Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji was also included in it. Adi Granth Sahib occupies a special place in the history of Sikhism.

Question 2.
Briefly explain the importance of Adi Granth Sahib Ji.
Or
What is the importance of Adi Granth Sahib Ji?
Answer:
No doubt Guru Granth Sahib is a religious scripture, yet it furnishes valuable information regarding the social, religious, political, and economic life of the 16th and 17th centuries. Guru Nanak Sahib gave a vivid account of the political condition o- that time in Babar Vani. In the social field, women’s position was miserable. The compilation of Adi Granth Sahib is a landmark in the history of the Sikhs. It gave the message of the universal brotherhood of mankind to the world.

Short Answer Type Questions (Type-2):

Question 1.
Write a note on the compilation and importance of Adi Granth Sahib Ji.
Answer:
The most important work during Guru Aijan Dev Ji’s pontificate was the compliation of Adi Granth Sahib. The objective was to compile the Bani of Gurus at one place and provide the Sikhs with a separate scripture. Guru Arjan Dev Ji initiated this great work at Ramsar. The Bani of Guru Nank Dev Ji, Guru Angad Dev Ji, Guru Amar Das Ji, Guru Ram Das Ji and Guru Aijan Dev Ji was included in it. Guru Aijan Dev Ji’s Sabads are maximum in number. Its number is 2216. Besides, Guru Aijan Dev Ji included the Bani of some other Saints and Bhagats. The job of writing Guru Granth Sahib was done by Bhai Gurdas Ji.

This great work was completed in 1604 A.D. Later on, the Bani of Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji was also included in it. The compilation of Adi Granth Sahib is a great landmark in Sikh history. With its compilation, the Sikhs got a separate scripture of their own. Guru Arjan Dev Ji set a new example by including the Bani written by people of various religions and castes. Adi Granth Sahib is the main source for our information regarding the political, social, religious and economic condition of people of Punjab in the 15th and 16th centuries. Moreover, Adi Granth Sahib is am invaluable treasure of India’s spirituality, culture, literature and languages.

Question 2.
What was the need of the compilation of the Adi Granth Sahib Ji?
Answer:
There were many reasons responsible for the compilation of the Adi Granth Sahib. During the time of Guru Aijan Dev Ji, Sikhism was spreading very fast. It was essential to compile a religious scripture to guide them. Secondly, Prithia, Guru Aijan Dev Ji’s elder brother wanted to acquire the Gurgaddi. With this objective, he started propagating his own teachings in the name of the Bani of Guru Ji. Guru Aijan Sahib wanted to put the Bani in record in its pure form, so that the Sikhs had no doubt. Thirdly, if the Sikhs wanted to establish their own independent state, it was essential for them to have their own religious scriptures.

Fourthly, Guru Amar Das Ji also encouraged the Sikhs to read the divine Bani of Guru Sahib. Guru Sahib says in the Anand Sahib, Come, ye beloved disciples of the Guru, sing ye the true word. Sing ye the word of the Guru, which is the most sublime of all. They, on whom is the Lord’s Grace, cherish it in the mind. So drink in ye the Lord’s Nectar and be ever imbued with His love and dwell on the lord the support of the earth. Says Nanak, “Sing ye ever the word of the True Guru.” Due to these reasons, Guru Aijan Dev Ji felt the need for the compilation of the Adi Granth Sahib.

Question 3.
How were the hymns collected for Adi Granth Sahib Ji?
Or
Describe the compilation and editing of Sri Guru Granth Sahib Ji.
Or
How Guru Arjan Dev Ji edited Adi Granth Sahib? Discuss.
Or
Which sacred Granth was edited by Sri Guru Arjan Dev Ji? Discuss.
Answer:
Guru Arjan Dev Ji used various sources for writing the Bani. The Bani of the first three Gurus—Guru Nanak Dev Ji, Guru Angad Dev Ji and Guru Amar Das Ji was with the eldest son of Guru Amar Das Ji i.e. Baba Mohan Ji. To compile the Bani, Guru Arjan Dev Ji first sent Bhai Gurdas Ji and then Baba Buddha Ji to Baba Mohan Ji but they were not successful in their objective. After this, Guru Sahib himself went from Amritsar to Goindwal Sahib barefooted. Impressed by the humility of Guru Ji, Baba Mohan Ji gave away the entire Bani to Guru Ji.

Guru Arjan Dev Ji already had the Bani of Guru Ram Das Ji with him. Guru Sahib included his own Bani in it. After this Guru Sahib called upon the devotees of Hindu Bhagats and Muslim Saints and asked them to recite the hymns of their saints correctly. The hymns of only those Bhagats and Saints were included in the Guru Granth Sahib which were similar to the Bani of the Gurus. The works of Kahna, Chhajju, Shah Hussain and Pilu were rejected.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 6 The Adi Granth

Question 4.
What do you know about the importance of Adi Granth Sahib Ji?
Answer:
1. Importance for the Sikhs : The compilation of the Adi Granth Sahib Ji is a great landmark in the history of the Sikhs. It provided the Sikhs with a unique religious scripture. The Hindu scriptures now held no importance for them. It initiated a feeling of a separate communal entity and they totally disintegrated from Hinduism.

2. Message of Brotherhood : Adi Granth Sahib is the only sacred book of the world which contains hymns without any distinction on the basis of caste, colour or creed. By doing so Guru Arjan Dev Ji has given the message of brotherhood to all human beings.

3. Literary Importance : From the literary point of view Guru Granth Sahib is a unique work. It occupies the highest place in Punjabi literature. It contains beautiful similies and embellishments. It has a form and finish not equalled by subsequent writers. Therefore, from the literary point of view Guru Granth Sahib carries immense importance.

4. Historical Importance : No doubt Guru Granth Sahib is a religious scripture, yet it furnishes valuable information regarding the social, religious, political and economic life of 16th and 17th centuries.

5. Other Importances : Besides the above, there are several other importances of the Adi Granth Sahib Ji. It gives us direction to better our lives now and hereafter. Women who were treated like a shoe were given a new respect. Guru Nanak Sahib says, “Why belittle her who gives birth to Rajas?” The Adi Granth vehemently opposed the prevalent superstitions in the society thus lending the human race a new direction.

Answer in One Word to One Sentence:

Question 1.
Why was the Adi Granth compiled? Give one reason.
Answer:
Compilation was essential to guide the Sikhs.

Question 2.
From whom did the hymns of First three Gurus collected by Guru Arjan Dev Ji?
Answer:
Baba Mohan Ji.

Question 3.
Who was Baba Mohan Ji?
Answer:
The eldest son of Guru Amar Das Ji.

Question 4.
When and by whom was the Adi Granth compiled?
Or
When and by whom did the first compilation of Guru Granth Sahib takes place?
Or
By which Guru Sahib, Guru Granth Sahib was compiled?
Answer:
The Adi Granth Sahib was compiled by Guru Aijan Dev Ji in 1604 A.D.

Question 5. In which year and at what place was Guru Granth Sahib compiled?
Answer:
Guru Granth Sahib was compiled in 1604 A.D. at Ramsar.

Question 6.
Whom did Guru Arjan Dev Ji appoint to write the Adi Granth Sahib?
Answer:
Bhai Gurdas Ji.

Question 7.
Who was the first editor of Guru Granth Sahib?
Answer:
Guru Aijan Dev Ji was the first editor of Guru Granth Sahib.

Question 8.
Who compiled the First ‘Bir’ and where?
Answer:
Guru Aijan Dev Ji compiled the First ‘Bir’ at Ramsar.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 6 The Adi Granth

Question 9.
In which year and at what place was the First Bir compiled?
Answer:
The First Bir was compiled in 1604 A.D. at Ramsar.

Question 10.
When and where was Second ‘Bir’ compiled?
Answer:
The Second Bir was compiled by Guru Gobind Singh Ji at a place called Damdama Sahib.

Question 11.
Who was writer of Second ‘Bir’?
Answer:
Bhai Mani Singh Ji.

Question 12.
Where was first illumination of the Adi Granth Sahib done?
Answer:
At Harmandir Sahib Ji in Amritsar.

Question 13.
When was first illumination of the Adi Granth Sahib was done?
Or
In which year First Parkash of Sri Guru Granth Sahib Ji took place?
Answer:
The first illumination of the Adi Granth Sahib was done on 16th Aug. 1604 A.D.

Question 14.
Who was the First Head Granthi of Harmandir Sahib, Amritsar?
Answer:
The First Head Granthi of Harmandir Sahib, Amritsar was Baba Buddha Ji.

Question 15.
How many great people contributed to the Guru Granth Sahib?
Or
Who was contributors towards the Guru Granth Sahib?
Or
How many composers of Bani are there in Guru Granth Sahib?

Question 16.
The Bani of how many Sikh Gurus have been incorporated in the Guru Granth Sahib?
Answer:
6 Gurus.

Question 17.
Name the Sikh Gurus whose Bani has been incorporated in the Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:

  • Guru Nanak Dev Ji,
  • Guru Angad Dev Ji,
  • Guru Amar Das Ji,
  • Guru Arjan Dev Ji.

Question 18.
How many Sabads of Guru Nanak Dev Ji are there in the Adi Granth Sahib?
Answer:
976 Sabads.

Question 19.
Whose Shabads are incorporated the maximum in the Adi Granth Sahib?
Answer:
Guru Arjan Dev Ji.

Question 20.
How many Shabads of Guru Arjan Dev Ji are included in the Adi Granth Sahib?
Answer:
2216 Shabads.

Question 21.
The Bani of how many Bhagats have been incorporated in the Adi Granth Sahib?
Answer:
The Bani of 15 Bhagats has been incorporated in the Adi Granth Sahib.

Question 22.
Of all the Bhagats, whose Bani has been incorporated in Guru Granth Sahib? Name any four.
Answer:

  • Bhagat Kabir Ji,
  • Bhagat Farid Ji,
  • Bhagat Namdev Ji,
  • Guru Ravidas Ji.

Question 23.
Which Bhagat has contributed maximum Shabads to the Adi Granth Sahib?
Or
In Sri Guru Granth Sahib which Bahgat-Bani is included most.
Answer:
Bhagat Kabir Ji.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 6 The Adi Granth

Question 24.
How many Shabads of Kabir Ji are there in the Adi Granth Sahib?
Answer:
541 Shabads.

Question 25.
The Bani of how many Bhatts has been incorporated in the Adi Granth Sahib?
Answer:
The Bani of 11 Bhatts.

Question 26.
Whose Bani has not been included in the Adi Granth Sahib?
Answer:

  • Kanha,
  • Chhajju,
  • Shah Hussain,
  • Pilu.

Question 27.
How many pages are there in Adi Granth Sahib?
Answer:
The Adi Granth Sahib contains a total of 1430 pages.

Question 28.
Give the total number of Ragas used in Guru Granth Sahib.
Answer:
31 Ragas.

Question 29.
Name any two Ragas used in the Guru Granth Sahib.
Answer:
Ramkali and Basant.

Question 30.
With which composition does the Guru Granth Sahib begin?
Answer:
The Mul Mantra is at the beginning of the Guru Granth Sahib.

Question 31.
Who is the composer of Japji Sahib?
Answer:
Guru Nanak Dev Ji.

Question 32.
Who was composer of Sukhmani Sahib?
Answer:
Guru Arjan Dev Ji was composer of Sukhmani Sahib.

Question 33.
What is main subject of the Adi Granth Sahib?
Answer:
The main subject of the Adi Granth Sahib is the devotion towards the Absolute.

Question 34.
Which is the script of the Adi Granth Sahib?
Answer:
Gurmukhi is the script of the Adi Granth Sahib.

Question 35.
Name two languages whose Salads are contributed in the Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:

  • Punjabi,
  • Persian.

Question 36.
Name the main religious book of the Sikhs.
Answer:
The name of the main religious book of the Sikhs is the Adi Granth Sahib or Guru Granth Sahib.

Question 37.
Who gave Guru Granth Sahib the position of Guru in Sikhism?
Answer:
Guru Gobind Singh Ji gave Guru Granth Sahib the position of Guru in Sikhism.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 6 The Adi Granth

Question 38.
Who gave the Guru Granth Sahib its position and when?
Answer:
The Adi Granth Sahib was given the position of Guru on 6th Oct., 1708 A.D. by Guru Gobind Singh Ji.

Question 39.
Give anyone importance of the Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:
Adi Granth Sahib gave the message of unity of the whole mankind.

Fill in the Blanks:

1. Adi Granth Sahib was compiled in ……………
Answer:
1604 A.D.

2. Adi Granth Sahib was compiled by ……………..
Answer:
Guru Arjan Dev Ji.

3. Adi Granth Sahib was written at ………………
Answer:
Ramsar.

4. Adi Granth Sahib was written by ……………..
Answer:
Bhai Gurdas Ji.

5. The first illumination of Adi Granth Sahib was done at ……………….
Answer:
Harmandir Sahib.

6. ……………. was the first Head Granthi.
Answer:
Baba Buddha Ji.

7. ……………. compiled the second Bir of Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:
Guru Gobind Singh Ji.

8. ……………. gave the the position of Guru to Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:
Guru Gobind Sahib Ji.

9. Adi Granth Sahib contains the Bani of ………….. great people.
Answer:
36.

10. ……………. Shabads of Guru Nanak Dev Ji are present in the Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:
976.

11. The maximum Shabads of …………….. are incorporated in the Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:
Guru Aijan Dev Ji.

12. Bani of ……………… Bhagats have been incorporated in the Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:
15.

13. …………….. Shabads of Kabir are given in the Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:
541.

14. The Adi Granth Sahib has a total of …………… pages.
Answer:
1430.

15. Bani of Adi Granth Sahib is divided into ……………. Ragas.
Answer:
31.

16. ……………….. is the script of Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:
Gurmukhi.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 6 The Adi Granth

True Or False:

1. Adi Granth Sahib was compiled by Guru Ramdas Ji.
Answer:
False

2. Adi Granth Sahib was compiled in 1675 A.D.
Answer:
False

3. Bhai Gurdas Ji did the work of writing Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:
True

4. The first illumination of Adi Granth Sahib was done at Anandpur Sahib.
Answer:
False

5. Baba Buddha Ji was the first Head granthi of the Harmandir Sahib.
Answer:
True

6. The Second Bir of Adi Granth Sahib was compiled by Guru Gobind Singh Ji.
Answer:
True

7. 36 great persons contributed to the Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:
True

8. The largest number of Shabads of Guru Nanak Dev Ji were in the Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:
False

9. Adi Granth Sahib contains the Banis of the Six Sikh Gurus.
Answer:
True

10. The Bani of five Hindu Bhagats and Muslim Saints is included in Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:
False

11. 541 Shabads of Kabir are present in Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:
True

12. The Bani of 11 Bhatts have been included in Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:
True

13. Adi Granth Sahib has total of 1420 pages.
Answer:
False

14. The Bani of Adi Granth Sahib is divided according to 31 Ragas.
Answer:
True

15. Adi Granth Sahib is written in Gurmukhi.
Answer:
True

16. Adi Granth Sahib gives us historical knowledge.
Answer:
True

Multiple Choice Questions:

1. Who compiled the Adi Granth Sahib?
(a) Guru Nanak Dev Ji
(b) Guru Amar Das Ji
(c) Guru Arjan Dev Ji
(d) Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji
Answer:
(c) Guru Arjan Dev Ji

2. When was the Adi Granth Sahib compiled?
(a) 1604 A.D.
(b) 1605 A.D.
(c) 1606 A.D.
(d) 1675 A.D.
Answer:
(a) 1604 A.D.

3. Where was the Adi Granth Sahib compiled?
(a) Gangsar
(b) Ramsar
(c) Kartarpur
(d) Kiratpur
Answer:
(b) Ramsar

4. Who of the following helped Guru Arjan Dev Ji during the compilation of Adi Granth Sahib?
(a) Baba Buddha Ji
(b) Bhai Mani Singh Ji
(c) Bhai Gurdas Ji
(d) Bhai Deep Singh Ji
Answer:
(c) Bhai Gurdas Ji

5. Where was the first illumination of Adi Granth Sahib done?
(a) Harmandir Sahib
(b) Nankana Sahib
(c) Anandpur Sahib
(d) Punja Sahib
Answer:
(a) Harmandir Sahib

6. Who was the first head Granthi of Harmandir Sahib?
(a) Bhai Gurdas Ji
(b) Baba Buddha Ji
(c) Syfu Saint Mian Mir Ji
(d) Bhai Mani Singh Ji
Answer:
(b) Baba Buddha Ji

7. The Bani of how many Sikh Gurus have been incorporated in the Guru Granth Sahib?
(a) 5
(b) 6
(c) 8
(d) 10
Answer:
(b) 6

8. How many shabads of Guru Aijan Dev Ji are incorporated in the Adi Granth Sahib?
(a) 689
(b) 907
(c) 976
(d) 2216
Answer:
(d) 2216

9. Which of the following Bhagats has contributed maximum shabads to the Adi Granth Sahib?
(a) Farid Ji
(b) Namdev Ji
(c) Kabir Ji
(d) Ravidas Ji
Answer:
(c) Kabir Ji

10. In how many Ragas the Bani of Adi Granth has been divided?
(a) 11
(b) 21
(c) 30
(d) 31.
Answer:
(d) 31

11. What is the total number of pages of the Adi Granth Sahib?
(a) 1405
(b) 1420
(c) 1430
(d) 1440
Answer:
(c) 1430

12. Who gave the Adi Granth Sahib the position of Guru Granth Sahib?
(a) Guru Nanak Dev Ji
(b) Guru Aijan Dev Ji
(c) Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji
(d) Guru Gobind Singh Ji
Answer:
(d) Guru Gobind Singh Ji

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 6 The Adi Granth

13. When was the Adi Granth Sahib given the status of Guru Granth Sahib?
(a) 1604 A.D.
(b) 1675 A.D.
(c) 1705 A.D.
(d) 1708 A.D.
Answer:
(d) 1708 A.D.

14. Who wrote the Second Bir of Adi Granth Sahib?
(a) Bhai Gurdas Ji
(b) Bhai Mani Singh Ji
(c) Baba Buddha Ji
(d) Guru Gobind Singh Ji
Answer:
(b) Bhai Mani Singh Ji

15. In which language was the Adi Granth Sahib written?
(a) Gurmukhi
(b) Hindi
(c) English
(d) Sanskrit
Answer:
(a) Gurmukhi

PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Poem 1 Open Thy Eyes and see Thy God

Punjab State Board PSEB 9th Class English Book Solutions English Main Course Book Poem 1 Open Thy Eyes and see Thy God Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 9 English Main Course Book Poem 1 Open Thy Eyes and see Thy God

Question 1.
Write the central idea of the poem.
(कविता का केन्द्रीय भाव लिखें।)
Answer:
Tagore says that we can’t find God in temples. We can’t find Him by chanting and singing. We can’t find Him by telling beads. He lives among poor labourers. So we should go and work with the poor if we want to find God.”

टैगोर कहता है कि हम ईश्वर को मन्दिरों में नहीं ढूंढ सकते हैं। हम उसे भजन बोल कर और गा कर नहीं ढूंढ सकते हैं। हम उसे माला फेर कर नहीं ढूंढ सकते हैं। वह ग़रीब मजदूरों के मध्य रहता है। इसलिए हमें ग़रीबों के साथ जा कर काम करना चाहिए यदि हम ईश्वर को ढूंढना चाहते हैं।

PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Poem 1 Open Thy Eyes and see Thy God

Question 2.
Why does the poet say that we should leave chanting, singing and telling of beads ?
(कवि यह क्यों कहता है कि हमें भजन बोलना, गाना और माला फेरना छोड़ देना चाहिए ?)
Answer:
The poet believes that God does not live in temples. We cannot find him by chanting, singing and telling beads. So the poet says that we should leave chanting and telling beads.

कवि मानता है कि ईश्वर मन्दिरों में नहीं रहता है। हम उसे भजन बोलकर, गाकर और माला फेरकर प्राप्त नहीं कर सकते। इसलिए कवि कहता है कि हम भजन बोलना और माला फेरना छोड़ दें।

Question 3.
Where can God be found ?
(ईश्वर को कहां पाया जा सकता है ?)
Answer:
We can find God where the tiller is tilling the hard land. We can find Him where the pathmaker is breaking stones. In other words, God lives among the poor hardworking people.

हम ईश्वर को उस जगह पा सकते हैं जहां किसान सख्त ज़मीन पर हल चला रहा होता है। हम उसे वहां देख सकते हैं जहां सड़कें बनाने वाला पत्थर तोड़ रहा होता है। अन्य शब्दों में, ईश्वर कठोर परिश्रम करने वाले ग़रीब लोगों के मध्य रहता है।

Question 4.
What does the poet suggest regarding the presence of God ?
(कवि ईश्वर की उपस्थिति के बारे में क्या सुझाव देता है ?)
Answer:
The poet says that God doesn’t live in temples. He lives among the poor hard working people.
कवि कहता है कि ईश्वर मन्दिरों में नहीं रहता है। वह कठिन परिश्रम करने वाले निर्धन लोगों के मध्य रहता है।

Question 5.
Write ‘True’ or ‘False’ against the following statements :
(a) God lives in temples.
(b) By chanting, singing and telling of beads we can reach God.
(c) God is there where the tiller is tilling the land.
(d) We should not work hard.
Answer:
(a) False
(b) False
(c) True
(d) False.

PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Poem 1 Open Thy Eyes and see Thy God

Question 6.
Do you agree with Tagore’s contention in his poem, ‘Open Thy Eyes and See Thy God’ ? Why?
(क्या आप इस कविता में टैगोर के विचारों से सहमत हैं ? क्यों ?)
Answer:
I fully agree with Tagore’s contention. True worship does not mean chanting and telling beads. It does not mean going to temples. It means working hard and helping the poor.

मैं टैगोर के विचारों से पूरी तरह सहमत हूं। सच्ची पूजा का अर्थ भजन बोलना और माला फेरना नहीं होता है। इसका अर्थ मन्दिरों को जाना नहीं होता है। इसका अर्थ होता है – कठिन परिश्रम करना और ग़रीबों की मदद करना।

Stanzas For Comprehension

Stanza 1

Leave this chanting and
singing and telling of beads !
Whom dost thou worship in this
lonely dark corner of a temple
with doors all shut ? Open thine
eyes and see thy God is not
before thee !

Questions
1. What does the poet want us to leave? Why?
2. The poet in this stanza asks a question. What is the question?
3. Our eyes are open. Why does the poet say ‘Open thine eyes”?
4. Who are these lines addressed to?
5. What does the poet want the worshipper of God to do?
Answer:
1. The poet wants us to leave chanting and telling beads in temples. He says that God doesn’t live in temples. We can’t find him there by the singing of hymns and telling of beads.
2. The poet asks whom we are worshipping in the lonely dark corner of the temple with doors all shut.
3. Our physical eyes are open but our eyes of the mind are closed. That is why the poet asks us to open our eyes.
4. The poet imagines someone singing hymns and telling beads in a dark corner of a temple. He addresses these lines to such a worshipper of God.
5. He wants the worshipper to open his eyes and see that God whom he is worshipping is not there before him.

Stanza 2

He is there where the tiller is
tilling the hard ground and where
the pathmaker is breaking stones.
He is with them in sun and in
shower, and His garment is covered
with dust. Put off thy holy mantle
and even like Him come
down on the dusty soil !

Questions

1. ‘Thy God is not before thee. Where can we find him?
2. Why are His garments covered with dust?
3. What is the tiller doing?
4. What is the pathmaker doing?
5. How does the poet think we can seek God?
Answers
1. We can find God where the tiller is tilling the hard land and where the pathmaker is breaking stones.
2. His garments are covered with dust because He lives among those who till the hard land and break stones.
3. He is tilling the hard land.
4. He is breaking stones.
5. The poet thinks we can seek God by working among the poor people such as the tillers and pathmakers.

PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Poem 1 Open Thy Eyes and see Thy God

Stanza 3

Deliverance ? Where is this deliverance
to be found ? ‘Our master himself
has joyfully taken upon him the bonds
of creation; He is bound with us all
for ever.

Question
1. What is meant by ‘deliverance’ ?
2. Does the poet think of deliverance to be a desirable thing?
3. Who is our master ?
4. What bonds has our master taken upon himself ?
5. How is He bound with us all for ever?
Answer:
1. ‘Deliverance’ means freedom from a life of toil.
2. The poet doesn’t think of deliverance to be a desirable thing.
3. God is our master.
4. He has taken upon himself the bonds of creation.
5. We all are God’s creation. Thus God is bound with us for ever.

Stanza 4

Come out of thy meditations and
leave aside thy flowers and incense !
What harm is there if thy clothes
become tattered and stained ? Meet
him and stand by him in toil and in the
sweat of thy brow.

Question
1. What does the poet say about our meditations ?
2. What does he want us to leave aside ? Why?
3. How will our clothes become tattered and stained ?
4. Does the poet see any harm if our clothes become tattered and torn ?
5. ‘Meet him ………’ Who does ‘him’ here refer to ?’
Answer:
1. The poet says that we can’t find God through our meditations. So we should give them up.
2. He wants us to leave aside the flowers and the incense. He says this because he feels that we can’t please God by offering any flowers or incense.
3. Our clothes will become tattered and torn if we go to work with tillers and pathmakers.
4. No, he doesn’t see any harm in this.
5. The word ‘him’ here refers to God.

Objective Type Questions

Answer the following in one word / phrase / sentence :

Question 1.
Name the poet of the poem, ‘Open Thy Eyes ….
Answer:
Rabindranath Tagore.

Question 2.
Where is the devotee, as given in the poem ?
Answer:
In a dark corner of a temple.

Question 3.
Who is there with the devotee ?
Answer:
He is sitting there all alone.

Question 4.
Where does God live ?
Answer:
He lives where tiller tills the hard ground.

Question 5.
Where can God be found ?
Answer:
He can be found where the poor people work hard.

PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Poem 1 Open Thy Eyes and see Thy God

Complete the following :

1. The devotee is sitting ……………….. in ………………
2. We can’t find God by …………………. and …………..
3. God lives where the poor people …………… hard and shed ………..
Answer:
1. all alone, a temple
2. chanting hymns, telling beads
3. work / labour, sweat.

Write True or False against each statement :

1. The devotee was sitting in his home, doing Pooja.
2. God cannot be found in temples.
3. God has taken upon himself the task of creation.
Answer:
1. False
2. True
3. True.

Choose the correct option for each of the following:

Question 1.
God can be found by ……………….
(a) chanting hymns
(b) telling the beads
(c) praising him day and night
(d) none of the above.
Answer:
(d) none of the above.

Question 2.
The garment of God, in this poem, is ……..
(a) studded with gems
(b) covered with dust
(c) shining brightly
(d) colourful.
Answer:
(b) covered with dust

Open Thy Eyes and see Thy God Poem Summary in English

Open Thy Eyes and see Thy God Introduction:

In this poem, Tagore says that the worship of idols is useless. He says that God can never be found in places of worship. He can be found where the tillers are tilling land. He can be found where the workers are sweating in the sun. Anyone who wants to find God, should go and work with the tillers and the pathmakers.

PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Poem 1 Open Thy Eyes and see Thy God 1

Moksha cannot be achieved through empty rituals. In fact, the very desire for deliverance is unholy. Even God has not given Himself deliverance. He always remains busy in the task of creation. A true devotee of God should also work tirelessly. He should work for the poor and the downtrodden.

Character of a Happy Man Summary in English:

The poet sees a devotee in a dark corner of a temple. The devotee is sitting all alone. All the doors of the temple are shut. The devotee is chanting hymns. He is telling beads. The poet asks the devotee whom he is worshipping. He asks him to open his eyes. He asks him to see that his God is not there before him. The poet means to say we can’t find God by chanting hymns. We can’t find Him by telling beads. God does not live in temples.

The poet says that God lives where the tiller tills the hard ground. He lives where the path maker is breaking stones. He lives with the poor labouring people. He lives with them in sun and shower. His garment is covered with dust. So the poet asks the devotee to put off his mantle of worship. Like God Himself, he should go and work with the poor. The poet means to say that God cannot be found in temples. He can be found in places where the poor work hard and shed their sweat.

Then the poet talks of deliverance or moksha. Deliverance means the freedom from labour. The poet says that there is no deliverance for anyone. Even God has no deliverance. He has to do hard labour. He has taken upon Himself the difficult job of creation. He performs this task joyfully.

PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Poem 1 Open Thy Eyes and see Thy God

So the poet asks the devotee to come out of the dark corner of his meditations. He should leave aside his flowers and incense. He should go and work among the poor. No harm would come if his clothes get stained. Rather he would be able to fulfil his desire. He would be able to meet God and stand by Him.

Open Thy Eyes and see Thy God Poem Summary in Hindi

Open Thy Eyes and see Thy God Introduction:

कविता का संक्षिप्त परिचय इस कविता में टैगोर निरर्थक मूर्ति-पूजा की आलोचना करता है। वह कहता है कि ईश्वर को कभी भी पूजास्थलों में ढूंढा नहीं जा सकता। उसे वहां ढूंढा जा सकता है, जहां किसान भूमि जोत रहे होते हैं और जहां मज़दूर लोग धूप में पसीना बहा रहे होते हैं। कोई भी व्यक्ति जो ईश्वर की तलाश करना चाहता है उसे किसानों के साथ और सड़कें बनाने वालों के साथ जा कर काम करना चाहिए। मोक्ष खोखले रीति-रिवाजों द्वारा प्राप्त नहीं किया जा सकता। वास्तव में मोक्ष की इच्छा करना ही एक अपवित्र बात है। स्वयम् ईश्वर ने भी अपने आप को मुक्ति प्रदान नहीं की है। वह सदा रचना के काम में लगा रहता है। ईश्वर के सच्चे भक्त को भी अथक रूप से काम करना चाहिए। उसे गरीबों और दलितों के लिए काम करते रहना चाहिए।

Open Thy Eyes and see Thy God Summary in Hindi:

कवि को किसी मन्दिर के एकान्त और अन्धेरे कोने में बैठा एक भक्त दिखलाई देता है। मन्दिर के सभी दरवाजे बन्द हैं। भक्त भजन गा रहा है और माला फेर रहा है। कवि उससे पूछता है कि वह किसकी पूजा कर रहा है। वह भक्त से कहता है कि वह अपनी आंखें खोले और देखे कि वहां उसके सामने ईश्वर नहीं है। कवि के कहने का भाव यह है कि ईश्वर को भजन गा कर अथवा माला फेर कर प्राप्त नहीं किया जा सकता है। ईश्वर मन्दिरों में नहीं रहता है। कवि कहता है कि ईश्वर उस जगह पर रहता है जहां खेतिहर मजदूर धरती जोत रहा है। वह उस जगह पर रहता है जहां सड़कें बनाने वाला मज़दूर पत्थर तोड़ रहा है। वह मेहनत करने वाले इन लोगों के साथ धूप तथा वर्षा में खड़ा रहता है। उसके वस्त्र मजदूरों के वस्त्रों की भान्ति धूल से भरे रहते हैं।

इसलिए कवि भक्त से कहता है कि वह अपने पूजा वाले वस्त्र उतार दे। स्वयं ईश्वर की भान्ति उसे गरीब लोगों के साथ जा कर काम करना चाहिए। कवि के कहने का भाव है कि ईश्वर को मन्दिरों में नहीं खोजा जा सकता है। उसे उस स्थान पर देखा जा सकता है जहां निर्धन लोग परिश्रम करते हैं और अपना पसीना बहाते हैं। कवि मुक्ति की बात करता है। मुक्ति का अर्थ होता है कि कठिन परिश्रम करने से छूट। कवि कहता है कि मुक्ति कहीं नहीं मिलती है। स्वयं ईश्वर को भी मुक्ति प्राप्त नहीं है। उसे भी परिश्रम करना पड़ता है। उसने अपने ऊपर संसार की रचना करने का कठिन काम लिया हुआ है। वह उस काम को खुशी-खुशी करता रहता है।

PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Poem 1 Open Thy Eyes and see Thy God

इसलिए कवि भक्त से कहता है कि वह अपनी समाधि को छोड़ दे। उसे अपने फूल और धूपबत्ती एक तरफ रख देने चाहिएं। उसे निर्धन लोगों के मध्य जा कर काम करना चाहिए। कोई हानि नहीं होगी यदि उसके वस्त्र फट जाएंगे अथवा गंदे हो जाएंगे। इसके विपरीत उसे अपनी इच्छा की प्राप्ति हो जाएगी। वह ईश्वर से मिलने और उसके साथ खड़ा होने के योग्य हो जाएगा।

Open Thy Eyes and see Thy God Translation in Hindi

Stanza 1

Leave this chanting and
singing and telling of beads !
Whom dost thou worship in this
lonely dark corner of a temple
with doors all shut ? Open thine
eyes and see thy God is not
before thee !

कठिन शब्दार्थ-1. chanting-भजन गाना ; 2. telling of beads—माला फेरना ; 3. dost – do ; 4. thine-your, तुम्हारी ; 5. thee-you, तुम।

अनुवाद

छोड़ो यह भजन बोलना
और गाना तथा माला का फेरना !
किसकी पूजा कर रहे हो तुम इस
एकान्त अन्धेरे कोने में एक मन्दिर के
जिसके सब दरवाजे हैं बंद ? खोलो अपनी
आँखें और देखो तुम्हारा ईश्वर नहीं है
तुम्हारे सामने !

Stanza 2

He is there where the tiller is
tilling the hard ground and where
the pathmaker is breaking stones.
He is with them in sun and in
shower, and His garment is covered
with dust. Put off thy holy mantle
and even like Him come
down on the dusty soil !

कठिन शब्दार्थ-
1. tiller-खेती करने वाला मजदूर ; 2. tilling-खेती कर रहा, हल चला रहा ; 3. sun-धूप ; 4. garment-वस्त्र ; 5. mantle-ओढ़न।

PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Poem 1 Open Thy Eyes and see Thy God

अनुवाद
वह उस जगह है जहां किसान
चला रहा है हल, सख्त ज़मीन पर और जहां
सड़कें बनाने वाला, तोड़ रहा है पत्थर !
वह उनके साथ है, धूप और वर्षा में,
और उसका वस्त्र भरा हुआ है ।।
धूल से। उतार दो अपना पवित्र ओढ़न .
और आ जाओ उसी की भांति
नीचे धूल-भरी मिट्टी में !

Stanza 3

Deliverance ? Where is this deliverance
to be found ? Our master himself
has joyfully taken upon him the bonds
of creation; He is bound with us all
for ever.

कठिन शब्दार्थ-1. deliverance-मुक्ति, मोक्ष ; 2. bonds—बन्धन ; 3. creation-संसार की रचना।

अनुवाद

मुक्ति ? यह मुक्ति कहां
मिलती है ? स्वयं हमारे स्वामी ने
प्रसन्नतापूर्वक लिया हुआ है बन्धन |
संसार की रचना का; वह बन्धा हुआ है हम सबसे
सदा के लिए।

Stanza 4

Come out of thy meditations and
leave aside thy flowers and incense !
What harm is there if thy clothes
become tattered and stained ? Meet
him and stand by him in toil and in the
sweat of thy brow.

कठिन शब्दार्थ-1. meditations-समाधि, चिन्तन ; 2. aside-एक तरफ ; 3. incenseधूपबत्ती ; 4. tattered—कटे-फटे ; 5. stained—दाग-भरे ; 6. sweat of the brow-माथे (अर्थात् कड़ी मेहनत) का पसीना।

PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Poem 1 Open Thy Eyes and see Thy God

अनुवाद
जागो अपनी समाधि से और
रख दो एक तरफ अपने फूल और धूपबत्ती !
क्या होगा नुक्सान अगर तुम्हारे वस्त्र
हो जाएंगे कटे-फटे और दाग-भरे ? मिलो
उसे और उसकी मदद करो, अपनी मेहनत और
अपने माथे के पसीने के द्वारा।

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

Punjab State Board PSEB 10th Class English Book Solutions English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages Exercise Questions and Answers, Notes.

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

नोट : परीक्षा-पत्र में Unseen Reading Comprehension के लिए दिया जाने वाला पैरा प्रायः व्याकरण की निर्धारित पुस्तक में से ही लिया जाता है। इसलिए विद्यार्थियों को ऐसे पैरे बहुत ध्यान से तैयार कर लेने चाहिएं।

(A) Passages From Grammar Book Note :

In all the passages, questions have been changed according to new pattern of Testing.

Passage – 1

One evening a boy of three was out for a walk with his father. There was also an elderly man with the father. Chatting, they walked on and went beyond the village. The green crops delighted the eyes. The elders were walking along the edge of a field. Not hearing the footsteps of the boy, the father looked back. The boy was sitting on the ground and seemed to be planting something. The father became curious. “What are you doing?” said he. “Look, Father, I shall grow guns all over the field,” was the innocent reply of the boy. His eyes shone with the strong faith that guns would grow in the field. Both the elders were struck with wonder at the little boy’s words. The boy was Bhagat Singh who later fought like a hero for India’s freedom and sacrificed his life.

Word-meanings : 1. elderly – बुजुर्ग 2. chatting – बातचीत करते हुए ; 3. curious – उत्सुक; 4. sacrificed – बलिदान दे दिया

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
Where were the elders walking?
(a) Along the bank of a canal.
(b) Along the edge of a well.
(c) Along the bank of the river.
(d) Along the edge of a field.
Answer:
(d) Along the edge of a field.

Question 2.
What was the boy doing when his father looked back?
(a) He was sitting on the ground.
(b) He was planting something.
(c) Both (a) and (b).
(d) Neither (a) nor (b).
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b).

Question 3.
What faith did the boy have?
(a) He believed that bombs would grow in the field.
(b) He believed that guns would grow in the field.
(c) He believed that green crops would grow in the field.
(d) He believed that brave men would grow in the field.
Answer:
(b) He believed that guns would grow in the field.

Question 4.
Father looked back because …………
(a) he did not hear the footsteps of his son.
(b) his son was calling him.
(c) his son was left behind.
(d) his son asked him to do so.
Answer:
(a) he did not hear the footsteps of his son.

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

Question 5.
Bhagat Singh sacrificed his life for …..
(a) his family
(b) truth
(c) India’s freedom
(d) his ideals.
Answer:
(c) India’s freedom

Passage 2

Dr. C.V. Raman was, a genius? who won the Nobel Prize for Physics, using simple equipment barely worth $300. He was the first Asian scientist to win the Nobel Prize. He was a man of boundless curiosity and had a lively sense of humour. His spirit of inquiry and devotion to science laid the foundation for scientific research in India. And he won honour as a scientist, and affection as a teacher and a man. Raman was studious. He kept in touch with the latest developments in science in the world around him. He had personal contacts with many scientists. He used to read new books and research papers from different centres. “The equipment which brought me the Nobel Prize did not cost more than three hundred rupees. A table drawer can hold all my research equipment,” he used to say with pride. It was his conviction that if the research worker is not inspired from within, no amount of money can bring him or her success in research.

Word meanings : 1. genius – प्रतिभाशाली ; 2. equipment – साज-सामान, उपकरण; 3. inquiry – जांच, उत्सुकता ; 4. studious – अध्ययनशील ; 5. conviction – दृढ़-विश्वास।

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
What kind of a man was Dr. C.V. Raman?
(a) He was a man of unlimited curiosity.
(b) He had a lively sense of humour.
(c) Both (a) and (b).
(d) Neither (a) nor (b).
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b).

Question 2.
What is he famous for ?
(a) For being the first American scientist to win the Nobel Prize.
(b) For being the first Asian scientist to win the Nobel Prize.
(c) For being the first African scientist to win the Nobel Prize.
(d) For being the first Japanese scientist to win the Nobel Prize.
Answer:
(b) For being the first Asian scientist to win the Nobel Prize.

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

Question 3.
He believed that if the research work is not ……… any amount of money cannot make the research successful.
(a) applauded by people
(b) done deeply
(c) inspired from within
(d) done thoughtfully.
Answer:
(c) inspired from within

Question 4.
The equipment that won him the Nobel Prize
(a) did not cost more than five hundred rupees.
(b) did not cost more than three hundred rupees.
(c) did not cost more than four hundred rupees.
(d) did not cost more than six hundred rupees.
Answer:
(b) did not cost more than three hundred rupees.

Question 5.
Which word in the passage means ‘scholarly’?
(a) genius
(b) studious
(c) conviction
(d) barely.
Answer:
(b) studious

Passage 3

Early rising leads to health and happiness. The man who rises late can have little rest in the course of the day. Anyone who lies in bed late is compelled to work till late hours in the evening. He has to go without the evening exercise which is so necessary for his health. In spite of all his efforts, his work will not produce as good results as that of an early riser. The reason for this is that he cannot take advantage of the refreshing morning hours. Some people say that the quiet hours of midnight are the best time for working. Several great thinkers say that they can write best only when they burn the midnight. Yet it is true to say that few men have a clear brain at midnight when the body needs rest and sleep. Those who work at that time soon ruin their health. Bad health must, in the long run, have a bad effect on the quality of their work.

Word-meanings : 1. in the course of — के दौरान; 2. compelled — बाध्या होना ; 3. burn the midnight oil – देर रात तक काम करना

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
What leads to health and happiness ?
(a) Late rising.
(b) Early rising.
(c) Brisk walk.
(d) Long walk.
Answer:
(b) Early rising.

Question 2.
What is a late riser compelled to do ?
(a) To work for a short while.
(b) To work early in the morning.
(c) To stop working at all.
(d) To work till late hours in the evening.
Answer:
(d) To work till late hours in the evening.

Question 3.
Why can’t we have a clear brain at midnight?
(a) Because we are fully fresh at that time.
(b) Because we want to go for walk at that time.
(c) Because at that time our body needs rest and sleep.
(d) Because at that time we are fully disturbed.
Answer:
(c) Because at that time our body needs rest and sleep.

Question 4.
The man who rises late cannot take advantage of ………
(a) the refreshing sunny hours.
(b) the refreshing midnight hours.
(c) the refreshing evening hours.
(d) the refreshing morning hours.
Answer:
(d) the refreshing morning hours.

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

Question 5.
The word ‘essential’ means – …………
(a) compelled
(b) necessary
(c) advantage
(d) ruin
Answer:
(b) necessary

Passage 4.
Each one of us should have a hobby. Sometimes boys and girls are encouraged in schools to take up hobbies. They work at certain things in schools such as collecting stamps, or carpentry, but this so-called hobby is a thing for schools only. They do not pay any attention to it at their homes. Sometimes this is because of poverty, sometimes because of lack of interest. But a hobby is not really a hobby unless we are so interested in it that we want to carry it on whenever we have spare time. According to the dictionary meaning, a hobby is a favourite subject or occupation that is not one’s main business. It is something in which we are more interested than in anything else.

Word-meanings : 1. encouraged – प्रोत्साहित; 2. poverty – निर्धनता

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
What is the dictionary meaning of ‘hobby’ ?
(a) A skill that is one’s source of earning.
(b) Favourite subject or occupation that is not one’s main business.
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) Neither (a) nor (b).
Answer:
(b) Favourite subject or occupation that is not one’s main business.

Question 2.
When does a hobby become a thing for schools only?
(a) It is when no attention is paid to it at home.
(b) It is when full attention is paid to it at home.
(c) It is when no attention is paid to it at school.
(d) It is when full attention is paid to it at school.
Answer:
(a) It is when no attention is paid to it at home.

Question 3.
Name the hobbies mentioned in the passage.
(a) Stamp collecting.
(b) Carpentry.
(c) Both (a) and (b).
(d) Neither (a) nor (b).
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b).

Question 4.
We should carry on our hobby whenever we have ……..
(a) no time
(b) spare time
(c) golden time
(d) busy time
Answer:
(b) spare time

Question 5.
Sometimes students cannot pay attention to their hobbies due to ……….
(a) over work and studies
(b) lack of spare time
(c) poverty or lack of interest
(d) none of these three.
Answer:
(c) poverty or lack of interest

Passage – 5

Ashoka, the most trusted son of Bindusara and the grandson of Chandragupta Maurya, was a brave soldier. He was the most famous of the Mauryan kings and was one of the greatest rulers of India. Ashoka extended the Mauryan Empire to the whole of India, reaching out even into Central Asia. Ashoka succeeded in conquering Kalinga after a bloody war in which 100,000 men were killed, 150,000 injured and thousands were captured and retained as slaves. The sight of the slaughter involved in his conquest’ deeply affected his mind. He renounced war and sought peace in Buddha’s preachings of love and non-violence. So he gave up hunting.

Word-meanings: 1. extended – फैलाया; 2. in conquering- जीतने में; 3. retained – बंदी बना लिए गए ; 4. slaughter- हत्याकाण्ड; 5. conquest- जीत ; 6. renounced- त्याग दिया|

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
What was the name of Ashoka’s grandfather ?
(a) Bindusara Maurya.
(b) Rishabh Maurya.
(c) Chandragupta Maurya.
(d) Bhisham Maurya.
Answer:
(c) Chandragupta Maurya.

Question 2.
What happened in the war of Kalinga ?
(a) 100,000 men were killed.
(b) 150,000 men were injured.
(c) Thousands were captured and retained as slaves.
(d) All of these three.
Answer:
(d) All of these three.

Question 3.
Write the changes in Ashoka’s life after the war.
(a) He gave up war.
(b) He sought peace in love and non-violence.
(c) Both (a) and (b).
(d) Neither (a) nor (b)
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b).

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

Question 4.
Ashoka was one of the …………..
(a) greatest saints of India
(b) greatest rulers of India
(c) greatest preachers of India
(d) greatest yogis of India
Answer:
(b) greatest rulers of India

Question 5.
For Ashoka the war of Kalinga was a ……………
(a) bloody massacre
(b) great war
(c) great victory for him
(d) turning point of his life.
Answer:
(d) turning point of his life.

Passage 6

“Brothers and sisters, the long night is at last drawing to a close. Miseries and sorrows are disappearing. Ours is a sacred country. She is gradually waking up, thanks to the fresh breeze all around. Are you prepared for all sacrifices for the sake of your mother-land ? If you are, then you can rid the land of poverty and ignorance. You should develop a strong physique? You should shape your mind through study and meditation. Only then will victory be yours. I loved my motherland dearly before I went to America and England. After my return, every particle of the dust of this land seems sacred to me.” Do you know who carried this message to the whole continent of Asia ? It was Swami Vivekananda.

Word meanings : 1. miseries – दुःख ; 2. gradually-धीरे-धीरे ; 3. physique – डील-डौल ; 4. meditation – चिन्तन।

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
How can we rid the land of poverty and ignorance?
(a) By fighting for our rights.
(b) By doing our duties.
(c) By making sacrifices for our family.
(d) By making sacrifices for the sake of our motherland.
Answer:
(d) By making sacrifices for the sake of our motherland.

Question 2.
How can you shape your mind ?
(a) Through study.
(b) Through meditation.
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) Neither (a) nor (b)
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b)

Question 3.
Where did Swami Vivekananda carry the message ?
(a) To the whole continent of Antarctica.
(b) To the whole continent of Asia.
(c) To the whole continent of Africa.
(d) To the whole continent of Europe.
Answer:
(b) To the whole continent of Asia.

Question 4.
India is gradually. …….
(a) waking up
(b) sleeping
(c) lagging behind
(d) preparing for the war.
Answer:
(a) waking up

Question 5.
Who speaks the above lines ?
(a) Mahavira
(b) Gautama Buddha
(c) Swami Vivekananda
(d) Guru Nanak Dev.
Answer:
(c) Swami Vivekananda

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

Passage 7.

A Nation’s Strength :
Not gold, but only men can make
A nation great and strong
Men who, for truth and honour’s sake,
Stand fast and suffer long.

Brave men who work while others sleep,
Who darewhile others fly,
They build a nation’s pillars deep,
And lift them to the sky. – R.W. Emerson

Word-meanings : 1. stand fast – डटे रहना ; 2. dare – सामना करते हैं ; 3. fly – भाग जाते हैं ; 4. pillars – स्तम्भ।

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
What makes a nation great and strong ?
(a) Its youth.
(b) Its soldiers.
(c) Its people.
(d) Its government.
Answer:
(c) Its people.

Question 2.
What do brave men do while others sleep?
(a) They work hard.
(b) They suffer long.
(c) They also sleep.
(d) They run away.
Answer:
(a) They work hard.

Question 3.
How can they lift a nation to the sky ?
(a) Through their sacrifices.
(b) Through their faith.
(c) Through their duty.
(d) Through their hard work.
Answer:
(d) Through their hard work.

Question 4.
Complete the line :
Who dare while ……………..!
(a) others fly
(b) others laugh
(c) others die
(d) others challenge.
Answer:
(a) others fly

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

Question 5.
Who are the real pillars of a nation ?
(a) Common people.
(b) Rich people.
(c) Brave people.
(d) Poor people.
Answer:
(c) Brave people.

Question 6.
The word ‘dare’ means –
(a) endure
(b) challenge
(c) raise
(d) reality
Answer:
(b) challenge

Passage 8

My Books :

I love my books
They are the homes
of queens and fairies,
Knights? and gnomes.

Each time I read I make a call
On some quaint person large or small,
Who welcomes me with a hearty hand
And leads me through his wonderland.
Each book is like

A city street
Along whose winding
Way I meet
New friends and old who laugh and sing
And take me off adventuring.

Word-meanings : 1. knights – योद्धा ; 2. gnomes – बौने ; 3. quaint – अजीब ; 4. winding – बल-खाती।

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
The poet loves his books because through them he …………
(a) meets new friends
(b) sees new lands
(c) both (a) and (b)
(d) neither (a) nor (b)
Answer:
(c) both (a) and (b)

Question 2.
How does the quaint person welcome the poet ?
(a) With no smile.
(b) With a sad heart.
(c) With a hearty hand.
(d) Any of these three.
Answer:
(c) With a hearty hand.

Question 3.
The poet is led through a …….. each time he reads a book.
(a) homeland
(b) wonderland
(c) woodland
(d) farmland.
Answer:
(b) wonderland

Question 4.
In the books, the poet meets new and old friends in the ……
(a) city streets
(b) wonderland
(c) villages
(d) farmhouses.
Answer:
(a) city streets

Question 5.
The antonym of the word ‘winding’ is ……
(a) straight
(b) round
(c) curved
(d) feeble
Answer:
(a) straight

Passage 9

Stone Walls Do Not A Prison Make:
Stone walls do not a prison make
Nor iron bars a cage :
Mind’s innocence and quiet take
That for a hermitage?

If I have freedom in my love,
And in my soul am free,
Angels alone that soar above
Enjoy such liberty. -R. Lovelace

Word-meanings : 1. hermitage – आश्रम; 2. angel – देवदूत

choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
What does not make a prison ?
(a) Strong walls.
(b) Stone walls.
(c) Weak walls.
(d) Brick Walls.
Answer:
(b) Stone walls.

Question 2.
According to the poet, what does not make a cage ?
(a) Iron bars.
(b) Wooden bars.
(c) Golden bars.
(d) Silver bars.
Answer:
(a) Iron bars.

Question 3.
Which quality of the mind makes a hermitage ?
(a) Innocence of the mind.
(b) Quiet acceptance.
(c) Both (a) and (b).
(d) Neither (a) nor (b).
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b).

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

Question 4.
‘Such liberty’ is enjoyed only by ……….
(a) birds
(b) angels
(c) devils
(d) animals.
Answer:
(b) angels

Question 5.
The word ‘liberty’ means – ……….
(a) spirit
(b) freedom
(c) jail
(d) rise
Answer:
(b) freedom

Passage 10

A child’s Evening Prayer :
Erel on my bed my limbs I lay,
God grant me grace my prayers to
say:
O God ! preserve? my mother dear
In strength and health for many a year;

And, O ! preserve my father too,
And may I pay him reverence due;
And may I my best thoughts employ
To be my parents’ hope and joy;
And O ! preserve my brothers both

From evil doings and from sloth,
And may we always love each other,
Our friends, our father, and our mother :
And still, O Lord, to me impart
An innocent and grateful heart,

That after my great sleep I may
Awake to Thy eternal day! – Samuel Taylor Coleridge

Worst-meanings : 1. ere – से फूर्व ; 2. preserve – सुरक्षित रखना ; 3. reverence – सम्मान ; 4. sloth — सुस्ती; 5. Thy — your.

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
When does the child pray ?
(a) Before going to bed.
(b) After going to bed.
(c) Before getting up.
(d) After getting up.
Answer:
(a) Before going to bed.

Question 2.
The child prays to God that his mother ……………. .
(a) may remain strong
(b) may remain healthy
(c) live long
(d) all of these three.
Answer:
(d) all of these three.

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

Question 3.
What does he ask for himself ?
(a) An innocent heart.
(b) A grateful heart.
(c) Both (a) and (b).
(d) Neither (a) nor (b).
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b).

Question 4.
The child pays ………… to his father.
(a) reverence
(b) strength
(c) wealth
(d) attention.
Answer:
(a) reverence

Question 5.
The child wants to be the hope and joy of ………
(a) God
(b) his parents
(c) his siblings
(d) his teachers.
Answer:
(b) his parents

Question 6.
Give the rhyme-scheme of the last four lines.
(a) abab
(b) abba
(c) aabb
(d) baba.
Answer:
(c) aabb

Passage 11.

The Rainbow :
Boats sail on the rivers,
And ships sail on the seas;
But clouds that sail across the sky
Are prettier? than these.
There are bridges on the rivers,
As pretty as you please;
But the bow that bridges heaven,
And overtops the trees,
And builds a road from earth to sky,
Is prettier far than these. – Christina Rossetti

Word-meanings : 1. sail – तैरना; 2. prettier — जयादा सुन्दर; 3. bow – कमान, इन्दूधनुष ; 4. overtops – के ऊपर से गुजाती है

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
Where does the rainbow build a road?
(a) From the sky to the sea.
(b) From the earth to the sky.
(c) From the land to the sea.
(d) None of these three.
Answer:
(b) From the earth to the sky.

Question 2.
What are prettier than boats and ships ?
(a) Aeroplanes.
(b) Raindrops.
(c) Clouds.
(d) Trains.
Answer:
(c) Clouds.

Question 3.
According to the poet, the …… is the prettiest.
(a) sky
(b) rainbow
(c) rain
(d) cloud.
Answer:
(b) rainbow

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

Question 4.
The rainbow bridges ………..
(a) hell
(b) aboder
(c) heaven
(d) sky.
Answer:
(c) heaven

Question 5.
The word ‘far’ means – ……….
(a) a little.
(b) much more.
(c) many a.
(d) the few.
Answer:
(b) much more.

Passage 12 

The Noble Nature :
It is not growing like a tree
In bulk?, doth make man better be;
Or standing long an oak, three hundred year,
To fall a log at last, dry, bald and sere?:

A lily of a day
Is fairer far in May,
Although it falls and dies that night;
It was the plant and flower of light.
In small proportions we just beauties see:

And in short measures life may perfect be. -Ben Jonson

Word-meanings : 1. bulk — आकार में बड़ा ; 2. bald — गंजा; 3. sere – बेकार के; 4. proportions — मात्रा

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Passage 1.
What does not make a man a better being ?
(a) Being wealthy
(b) Becoming famous.
(c) Growing in size.
(d) Being kind-hearted.
Answer:
(c) Growing in size.

Passage 2.
Which thing in nature can live up to three hundred years ?
(a) A lily flower.
(b) An oak tree.
(c) A sunflower.
(d) A willow tree.
Answer:
(b) An oak tree.

Passage 3.
How long does a lily live ?
(a) For a day.
(b) For a week.
(c) For a month.
(d) For a year.
Answer:
(a) For a day.

Passage 4.
The message of this poem is that a …………. but ………… life is far better than a worthless life of long years.
(a) long, virtuous.
(b) long, vicious.
(c) short, virtuous.
(d) short, vicious.
Answer:
(c) short, virtuous.

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

Passage 5.
In short measures also, life may be …….
(a) pious
(b) perfect
(c) impious
(d) imperfect.
Answer:
(b) perfect

Passage 13.

The great advantage of early rising is the good start it gives us in our day’s work. The early riser has done a large amount of hard work before other men have got out of bed. In the early morning, the mind is fresh and there are few sounds or other distractions, so that the work done at that time is generally well-done. In many cases, the early riser also finds time to take some exercise in fresh morning air, and this exercise supplies him with a fund of energy that will last until the evening . By beginning so early, he knows that he has plenty of time to do thoroughly all the work he can be expected to do, and is not tempted to hurry over any part of it. All his work being finished in good time, he has a long interval of rest in the evening before the timely hour when he goes to bed. He gets to sleep several hours before midnight, at the time when sleep is most refreshing and after a sound night’s rest, rises early next morning in good health and spirits for the labour of the next day.

Word-meanings : 1. advantage – लाभ ; 2. distractions – भटकाव ; 3. thoroughly – अच्छी तरह।

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
……….. gives our day’s work a good start.
(a) Late rising.
(b) Going to bed late.
(c) Early rising.
(d) Going to bed early.
Answer:
(c) Early rising.

Question 2.
Why is the work done in the early hours generally well-done ?
(a) Because the mind is fresh
(b) Because the mind is free from noises.
(c) Because the mind is free from distractions.
(d) All of these three.
Answer:
(d) All of these three.

Question 3.
When is the mind fresh ?
(a) Late at night.
(b) In the evening.
(c) In the early morning.
(d) At midnight.
Answer:
(c) In the early morning.

Question 4.
We can find ample time of rest in the evening by …
(a) taking exercise
(b) finishing our work at night
(c) rising late
(d) finishing our work in good time.
Answer:
(d) finishing our work in good time.

Question 5.
The word ‘tempted’ means –
(a) suitable
(b) benefit
(c) usually
(d) attracted
Answer:
(d) attracted

(B) Some Other Passages

Passage 1

Of all the trees, of southern Asia, the banyan is unique, not only for the manner of its growth, but for the area of shade it provides from the burning sun. Its close relationship with man has evolved? over the years to make the banyan a popular meeting place, a focal point of worship and a source of practical materials for commerce. Known as the strangler fig because of its unusual manner of growth, the banyan is an epiphyte6 or air plant, that has its birth in the branches of a host tree and lives on airborne moisture and nutrients. Banyan seeds are deposited by birds, bats or monkeys in the rich soil collected in the crevices? of host-tree branches. As the banyan grows, it sends aerial roots down the trunk of the supporting tree. In time, the roots that reach the ground choke the host tree by preventing its trunk from enlarging. The two best-known species of banyans are : the Indian (Ficus benghalensis), one of the world’s largest tropicalo trees; and the Chinese (Ficus retusa), a smaller species with fewer aerial roots.

Word-meanings : 1. provides – देता है, टिंटा 7 ; 2. evolved – धीरे-धीरे विकसित हुआ ; 3. focal – केन्द्रीय ; 4. strangler – जो किसी चीज़ की वृद्धि को दबाता या रोकता है ; 5. fig – चौड़े पत्तों वाला पेड़; 6. epiphyte – एक पौधा जो दूसरे पौधे या कभी-कभी दूसरी चीज़ पर बढ़ता है; 7. crevices – दरारें; 8. aerial – आकाश में लटका हुआ ; 9. tropical – उष्ण कटिबन्धी।

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
Why is the banyan called the strangler fig?
(a) Because it chokes the host tree.
(b) Because it chokes other trees.
(c) Because it chokes the drains.
(d) Any of these three.
Answer:
(a) Because it chokes the host tree.

Question 2.
In what ways is the banyan tree unique ?
(a) It is unique in the manner of its growth.
(b) It is unique in terms of the area of shade it provides.
(c) Both (a) and (b).
(d) Neither (a) nor (b).
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b).

Question 3.
The banyan tree is a popular meeting place because ……….
(a) it provides cool shade.
(b) it provides sweet fruit.
(c) it provides a focal point of worship.
(d) none of these three.
Answer:
(c) it provides a focal point of worship.

Question 4.
The Indian banyan is one of the world’s tropical trees.
(a) oldest
(b) smallest
(c) youngest
(d) largest
Answer:
(d) largest

Question 5.
The antonym of the word ‘enlarging’ is –
(a) enhancing
(b) following
(c) contracting
(d) forgiving.
Answer:
(c) contracting

Passage 2

Sir Alexander Fleming was a very humble? and modest? man. He found penicillin by chance. He was very hard-working. He tried all his life to fight for killing germs in the human body. Before the invention of penicillin, carbolic acid and sulpha drugs were used as disinfectants. These things killed the germs of many diseases, but they also harmed the cells of human body. Penicillin saved the lives of millions of human beings.

Word-meanings : 1. humble – नम्र, विनीत ; 2. modest – विनम् संकोची; 3. by chance – संयोग से ; 4. cells – कोशिकाएं।

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
What was the nature of Sir Alexander Fleming ?
(a) A very humble man.
(b) A very hardworking man.
(c) A very modest man.
(d) All of these three.
Answer:
(d) All of these three.

Question 2.
What did he find ?
(a) Penicillin.
(b) Radium.
(c) Carbolic acid.
(d) Sulpha drugs.
Answer:
(a) Penicillin.

Question 3.
Penicillin saved the lives of ……………….. human beings.
(a) hundreds
(b) thousands
(c) millions
(d) any of these three.
Answer:
(c) millions

Question 4.
……… harmed the cells of human body.
(a) Carbolic acid
(b) Sulpha drugs
(c) Both (a) and (b).
(d) Neither (a) nor (b).
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b).

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

Question 5.
The word ‘invention’ means –
(a) medicines
(b) Sulpha drugs
(c) noble
(d) discovery
Answer:
(d) discovery

Passage 3

The elephant is the only animal with a trunk?. It uses its trunk in many ways. It pulls leaves of trees with its trunk and then puts them into its mouth. It can use its trunk to get water. The trunk can hold a lot of water to drink. An elephant needs to drink more than three pints of water every day. In Africa, men have hunted elephants for their tusks. The ivory from tusks is made into many beautiful things.
heavy things over long distances.

Word-meanings : 1. trunk- हाथी की सूंड ; 2. pint- तरल पदार्थ नापने की इकाई ; 3. tusk- हाथी का लम्बा दांत जो मुंह से बाहर निकला होता है ; 4. ivory- हाथीदांत।

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
An elephant uses its trunk to …..
(a) pull leaves
(b) put food into its mouth
(c) get water
(d) all of these three.
Answer:
(d) all of these three.

Question 2.
How much water does an elephant need to drink in a day?
(a) More than one pint of water.
(b) More than three pints of water.
(c) Less than two pints of water.
(d) Less than four pints of water.
Answer:
(b) More than three pints of water.

Question 3.
Which is the only animal who has a trunk ?
(a) The lion.
(b) The horse.
(c) The leopard.
(d) The elephant
Answer:
(d) The elephant

Question 4.
The ivory from ………… is used to make many beautiful things.
(a) trunk
(b) tusks
(c) tail
(d) trumpet.
Answer:
(b) tusks

Question 5.
Which word in the passage means ‘teeth?
(a) tusks
(b) trunk
(d) ivory.
Answer:
(b) tusks

Passage 4.

Guru Gobind Singh, the last of the ten Sikh Gurus, was a great son of India. He led India to sublime heights of glory. He brought about moral resurgences and created order out of disorderly social conditions. He was a multi-faceted personality. He was a poet, a soldier, a statesman, a leader and a true socialist, all in one. He put life into the dying social order by giving it a wholly new outlook.

Word-meanings : 1. sublime – उत्कृष्ट, भव्य; 2. glory – यश, गौरव: ; 3. resurgence – एक बार फिर से अधिक ताक़तवर तथा अधिक प्रसिद्ध होना।

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
Who was the last Sikh Guru ?
(a) Guru Nanak Dev.
(b) Guru Gobind Singh.
(c) Guru Arjun Dev.
(d) Guru Ram Das.
Answer:
(b) Guru Gobind Singh.

Question 2.
What did he do to improve the social order ?
(a) He brought about financial prosperity.
(b) He brought about moral resurgence.
(c) Both (a) and (b).
(d) Neither (a) nor (b).
Answer:
(b) He brought about moral resurgence.

Question 3.
How did he put life into the dying social order ?
(a) By working for the poor and weak people.
(b) By leading it to heights of glory.
(c) By giving it a wholly new outlook.
(d) None of these three.
Answer:
(c) By giving it a wholly new outlook.

Question 4.
Guru Gobind Singh was ……..
(a) a great soldier
(b) a great poet
(c) a true socialist
(d) any of these three.
Answer:
(d) any of these three.

Question 5.
The antonym of the word ‘disorderly’ is ……..
(a) ordered
(b) disorder
(c) orderly
(d) disordered.
Answer:
(c) orderly

Passage 5

True Friendship:

Everyone that flatters thee
Is no friend in misery.
Words are easy like the wind
Faithful friends are hard to find.

Every man will be thy friend,
Whilst thou hast wherewithal to spend.
But if store of crowns” be scant,

No man will supply thy want’.
He that is thy friend indeed,
He will help thee in thy need.
If thou sorrow, he will weep,
If thou wake, he cannot sleep.
Thus of every grief in heart,
He with thee doth bear a part.

These are certain signs to know,
Faithful friends from flattering foe. -William Shakespeare

Word-meanings : 1. flatter – चापलूसी करना, खुशामद करना; 2. thee, thou – तुम्हें, तुम; 3. easy like the wind – कुछ खर्च नहीं होता; 4. wherewithal – सम्पत्ति; 5. crowns – पुराने समय में ब्रिटेन में प्रचलित सिक्के; 6. scant – कम, थोड़ा; 7. want – ज़रूरत, आवश्यकता; 8. doth bear – लेता है; 9. foe – शत्रु।

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
What is this poem about ?
(a) About the love of money.
(b) About true friendship.
(c) About great leaders.
(d) About foolish persons.
Answer:
(b) About true friendship.

Question 2.
What does the poet say about flatterers ?
(a) He calls them friends.
(b) He calls them enemies.
(c) He calls them teachers.
(d) He calls them poets.
Answer:
(b) He calls them enemies.

Question 3.
When do people become our friends ?
(a) When we have the money to spend.
(b) When we have the time to spare.
(c) When we have the power to rule.
(d) When we have the wisdom to judge.
Answer:
(a) When we have the money to spend.

Question 4.
How will a true friend feel when we are in grief?
(a) He will feel a sense of relief.
(b) He will feel bored and disturbed.
(c) He will feel very indifferent.
(d) He will feel very unhappy.
Answer:
(d) He will feel very unhappy.

Question 5.
What distinction does the poet want us to understand ?
(a) The distinction between poverty and riches.
(b) The distinction between high and low.
(c) The distinction between friends and flatterers.
(d) The distinction between purity and impurity.
Answer:
(c) The distinction between friends and flatterers.

Passage 6

The Centipede

The little creature
with a hundred feet
was on its journey
to where

only it knew
My civilised foot
dressed in polished leather
came down upon it
ever so gently

there was only a soft sound
signifyings
the end
of a creature of God
my Maker.

I looked to see
if my sole was soiled?
and walked away.

word-meanings : 1. centipede – कनखजूरा ; 2. creature – जीव ; 3. civilised – सभ्य ; 4. polished leather – पॉलिश किए चमड़े के जूते ; 5. signifying – व्यक्त करते हुए ; 6. sole – तलवा ; 7. soiled – गन्दा होना।

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
What little creature does the poet talk of ?
(a) The scorpion.
(b) The wasp.
(c) The ringworm.
(d) The centipede.
Answer:
(d) The centipede.

Question 2.
Why does the poet call his foot civilised ?
(a) Because he was wearing polished shoes.
(b) Because his foot had crushed the little creature.
(c) Because his polished shoes had come down gently upon the little creature.
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(c) Because his polished shoes had come down gently upon the little creature.

Question 3.
What kind of poem would you say this is ?
(a) Romantic.
(b) Satirical.
(c) Humorous.
(d) Religious.
Answer:
(b) Satirical.

Question 4.
What happened when the poet’s foot came down upon the little creature ?
(a) There was a soft sound.
(b) There was a loud sound.
(c) There was a sharp cry.
(d) There was no sound at all.
Answer:
(a) There was a soft sound.

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

Question 5.
The poet walked away. What does this show ?
(a) He was full of repentance on what he had done.
(b) He was full of pity for the little creature.
(c) He was indifferent to what had happened.
(d) He was full of praise for God.
Answer:
(c) He was indifferent to what had happened.

Passage 7.

Who Loved The Best :
‘I Love you, mother,’ said little John;
Then, forgetting his work his cap went on,
And he was off to the garden swing?,
Leaving his mother, the wood to bring.
‘I love you, mother,’ said little Nell,
‘I love you better than tongue can tell.’
Then she teased and pouted half the day,
Till mother rejoiced when she went to play.
‘I love you, mother,’ said little Fan,

“To-day I’ll help you all I can’.
To the cradle then she did softly creep
And rocked the baby till it fell asleep.
Then stepping softly she took the broom
And swept floor and dusted the room.
Busy and happy all day was she,
Helpful and cheerful as child can be.
‘I love you, mother,’ again they said,
Three little children going to bed.
How do you think the mother guessed”,
Which of them really loved the best?

Word-meanings : 1. little – नन्हा; 2. swing— झूला; 3. pouted – मुंह फुला लिया; 4. rejoiced – बहुत खुश हो गई; 5. cradle – पालना; 6. cheerful- प्रसन्न guessed–अंदाज़ा लगाया

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
Who said, “I love you, mother’?
(a) John.
(b) Nell.
(c) Fan.
(d) All the three.
Answer:
(d) All the three.

Question 2.
Who had to bring the wood ?
(a) Mother.
(b) John
(c) Nell.
(d) Fan.
Answer:
(a) Mother.

Question 3.
Who was lying in the cradle ?
(a) John.
(b) Nell.
(c) Fan.
(d) None of these three.
Answer:
(d) None of these three.

Question 4.
Who was busy and happy all day ?
(a) Little John.
(b) Little Nell.
(c) Little Fan.
(d) The mother.
Answer:
(c) Little Fan.

Question 5.
Who do you think loved mother the best ?
(a) John.
(b) Nell.
(c) Fan
(d) None of these three.
Answer:
(c) Fan

Passage 8

The storm came on before its time,
She wandered? up and down;
And many a hill did Lucy climb;
But never reached the town.

The wretched parents all that night,
Went shouting far and wide;
But there was neither sound nor sight,
To serve them for a guide.

Word-meanings : 1. wandered — इधर-इधर भटकती रही; 2. wretched – दुःखी, शोक-संतप्त; 3. far and wide – दूर-दूर तक।

Choose the correct answer for each question :

Question 1.
When did the storm come ?
(a) Before its time.
(b) After its time.
(c) At midnight.
(d) Early in the morning.
Answer:
(a) Before its time.

Question 2.
Why did Lucy not reach the town?
(a) Because she didn’t want to travel in the storm.
(b) Because she didn’t want to leave her native place.
(c) Because she drowned in the river.
(d) Because she lost her way in the storm.
Answer:
(d) Because she lost her way in the storm.

Question 3.
What did the parents do?
(a) They went to the town.
(b) They searched for Lucy all night.
(c) They waited for her return from the town.
(d) They went to the police station for help.
Answer:
(b) They searched for Lucy all night.

Question 4.
She wandered ………..
(a) up and down
(b) here and there
(c) far and wide
(d) near and far.
Answer:
(a) up and down

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

Question 5.
But there was …..
(a) neither heat nor light
(b) neither sound nor sight
(c) either heat or light
(d) either sound or sight.
Answer:
(b) neither sound nor sight

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Punjab State Board PSEB 11th Class Political Science Book Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 11 Political Science Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Discuss the qualifications, mode of election and procedure for impeachment of the President of India.
Or
How is the President of India elected?
Answer:
Since India is a Republic, the President of India is elected by the people in an indirect manner for a fixed time. As to what method should be adopted for the election of the President, there was no unanimity of opinion in the Constituent Assembly. One suggestion was that the President should be directly elected by the people.

It will not only be in consonance with the democratic principles but it will also make the President the direct representative of the people. This proposal was rejected on the ground that such a method will unnecessarily convulse the nation, particularly when he was being made the nominal head of the State. The other proposal was that the President should be elected only by the members of the Union Parliament.

This proposal was equally rejected because in that case the President would become a puppet in the hands of the majority party. That would rob him of all his appearance of independence and dignity. In order to uphold the federal principle, it was finally agreed that the States should also be given a share in the election of the President.

Qualifications:
The Constitution prescribes the following qualifications for a presidential candidate-

  • He should be a citizen of India.
  • He must have completed the age of 35 years.
  • He must be qualified to be elected as a member of the Lok Sabha.
  • He must not hold any office of profit under the Government of India or any State Government or local authority.However, this provision is not applicable to a person who holds the office of the President, Vice-President, Governors and Ministers of the Central and State Government.
  • He cannot at the same time be a member of the Parliament or a member of State Legislature; his seat will be deemed to have been vacated on the date he assumes his office as President.
  • According to Presidential and Vice-Presidential Elections Act, the candidate for the office of president must deposit Rs. 15,000 as security.
  • The name of the candidate for the office of President must be proposed by 50 electors and seconded by 50 electors.

Method of Election:
Following are the features of the election of the President of India-

1. President elected by an Electoral College:
The President of India is elected by an electoral college consisting of the elected members of the Lok Sabha, the elected members of the Rajya Sabha and the elected members of the State Legislative Assemblies.

2. System of Proportional Representation:
The election of the President is held in accordance with the system of proportional representation by means of the single transferable vote.

3. Uniformity of Representation:
According to the Constitution, as far as possible, there is to be maintained uniformity of representation of the different States at the presidential election and parity between the States as a whole and the Union. In other words, in the election of the President, the principle of ‘One member- One-vote’ had not been and could not be adopted. In different States different ratios prevail between the population and the number of legislators.

The Constituencies in the different States are unequal in the matter of population. For example, in one State it may be one representative for every 50,000 of the population while in another the proportion may be one to 75,000 or more. Thus since the States differ in their population, the strength of the elected members of the State Legislative Assemblies also differs. Then, the total strength of the elected members of the State Legislative Assemblies is far greater than that of the elected members of both the Houses of Parliament. That being so, the problem was to ensure that the votes cast will have a value in proportion to the population that the votes represented.

4. Procedure of determining the votes of the Members of the State Assembly:
Article 55(4) of the Constitution lays down the procedure of determining the votes of the member of the State Assembly, which is as follows:
PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister 1
If the remainder is less than 500, it is ignored.
If it is more than 500, then the vote of each member shall be further increased by one.
For example, in 2017 population of Punjab was 27,704,236 and the Legislative Assembly of Punjab consists of 117 members. Hence each member was entitled to cast 237 votes:
PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister 2
5. Procedure of determining the votes of the Members of the Parliament:
The Constitution lays down the following procedure of determining the votes of the member of Parliament.
PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister 3
Fraction exceeding one-half being counted as one. Let us explain this formula also by taking an example. Suppose the total number of votes assigned to the elected members of all the State Legislative Assemblies is 424856 and the total strength of elected members of the Parliament is 705. Now to obtain the number of votes which elected member of the Parliament will have at the election of the President:
PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister 4
In the presidential election in July 2017, the number of votes of each member of the Parliament entitled to vote was 708.
Total votes of the elected member of State Assemblies = 5,49,495
No. of elected members of the Parliament = 776 (Lok Sabha 543 + Rajya Sabha 233)
No. of votes of each member of the Parliament = \(\frac {5,49,495 }{776}\) = 708
Total votes of the members of the Parliament = 708 x 776 = 5,49,408
Total votes of the electoral college = 5,49,495 + 5,49,408 = 10,98,903

6. Vacant Seats in Electoral College:
The President of India, as said, is elected by an electoral college. Now the question arises if the electoral college is not complete, how to proceed with the election of the President. Our Constitution was not clear on this point. To remove this flaw 11th Amendment (1961) was made in the Constitution.
According to this amendment, the election of the President or the Vice-President cannot be challenged on the ground of any vacancy in the electoral college for whatever reason among the members of the electoral college electing him.

7. Method of Fixing the Quota:
Under the system of Proportional Representation a candidate to be elected, must secure the necessary quota of votes. The quota is determined by the following formula:
PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister 5
Suppose the total number of valid votes polled at the presidential election is 8,00,000. Applying the above-mentioned formula, the quota shall be:
\(\frac {800000}{1+1}\) + 1 = 4,00,001
In order to be elected, the candidate must secure 4,00,001 votes-an absolute majority of votes. If the first counting does not give any candidate the quota of votes, the candidate who got the least number of votes is eliminated and his votes transferred to the remaining candidates on the basis of the preferences shown. The process is repeated until one candidate gets the requisite number of votes. Let us explain the system in detail.

Assuming that there are four candidates and the total number of valid votes cast are 15,000.
To be declared elected President, a candidate must secure a minimum of 7501 votes. Now suppose the first preference votes secured by the four candidates are as follows:
A—5250
B—4800
C—2700
D—2250
Since the candidate D gets the least number of votes, hence he is eliminated. Now the second preference votes on his 2250 ballot papers shall be counted.
Suppose A gets 300, B gets 1050 and C gets 900.

Now the total votes of A are 5250 + 300 = 5550, of B are 4800 + 1050 = 5800 and of C are 2700 + 900 = 3600. It means even now no candidate is securing the requisite quota of 7501 votes.

Now candidate C shall be eliminated because he got the least number of votes. Now third preference votes on the 3600 votes of C shall be counted. In the third preference suppose A gets 1700 and B gets 1900.
Now the total votes of A are 5550 + 1700 = 7250
Total votes of B are = 5850 + 1900 = 7750

According to the Proportional Representation system, B shall be declared President. The system proves the doctrine that candidate B is preferred by a numerically large number of electors than candidate A. It may be recalled that the election of Mr. V. V. Giri was decided in the Second Count. “It made the people realise the significance of the system of proportional represenataion by means of single transferable vote.”

So far fifteen presidential elections have been held in India:

  1. First election was held in 1952 and Dr. Rajendra Prasad was elected.
  2. Second election was held in 1957 and again Dr. Rajendra Prasad was elected.
  3. Third election was held in 1962 and Dr. Radhakrishnan was elected.
  4. Fourth election was held in 1967 and Dr. Zakin Hussain was elected.
  5. Fifth election was held in 1969 and Shri V. V. Giri was elected.
  6. Sixth election was held in 1974 and Shri Fakhruddin Ali Ahmed was elected.
  7. In July, 1977, for the first time, Shri Sanjiva Reddy was nominated by a consensus of all paries and was elected unopposed.
  8. Eighth election was held in July, 1982 and Congress (I) candidate Giani Zail Singh was elected and opposition candidiate Justice Khanna was defeated.
  9. Ninth Presidential election was held in July, 1987 and Congress (I) candidate R. Venkataraman was elected and opposition candidate Justice V. R. Krishna Iyer was defeated.
  10. Tenth Presidential election was held in July, 1992 and Congress (I) candidate Dr. Shankar Dyal Sharma was elected and opposition candidate was defeated.
  11. Eleventh Presidential election was held in July 1997. Joint candidate of United Front and Congress Mr. K. R. Narayanan supported by BJP and others was elected and Mr. T. N. Seshan was defeated. Mr. K. R. Narayanan secured 94.97 per cent of the votes.
  12. Twelfth Presidential election was held in July, 2002. Joint candidate of rulling National Democratic Alliance Dr. A.P. J. Abdul Kalam supported by Indian National Congress, Bahujan Samaj Party, Samajvadi Party, Janata Dal and others was elected and Capt. Lakshmi Sahgal, the opposition candidate supported by Communist Parties was defeated.
  13. 13th Presidential election was held in July 2007, joint candidate of United Progressive Alliance Mrs. Pratibha Devi Singh Patil was elected and Independent Candidate Mr. Bhairon Singh Shekhawat was defeated.
  14. 14th Presidential election was held in July 2012. Candidate of UPA and Supported by S.P., B.S.P., Janata Dal (U) and Shiv Seva, Mr. Pranab Mukherjee was elected and independent candidate Mr. P.A. Sangma was defeated.
  15. 15th Presidential election was held in July 2017. Candidate of N.D.A. Sh. Ram Nath Kovind was elected and U.P.A. candidate Smt. Meera Kumar was defeated.

The election of the President is conducted by the Chief Election Commissioner. He issues the notification and fixes dates for nomination, scrutiny of nomination and withdrawal of candidature. Only those eligible to vote in the election of the President, i.e. elected members of Parliament and elected members of the State Legislative Assemblies can propose a candidate for election. The Chief Election Commissioner counts the votes cast and declares the result.

The validity of the election of the President can be challenged by the electors only. The election of the President can be challenged only after the completion of the election, i.e., after a candidate is declared to be elected to the office of the President. If a petition is allowed before such election, it would involve the non-compliance with the mandatory provisions of Art. 62 which says that an election to fill a vacancy caused by the expiration of the term of the office of the President shall be completed before the expiration of the term.

Oath of the President:
Before entering upon his office, the President elected or any person acting as President for discharging the functions of President, is required to take an oath in the presence of the Chief Justice, or in his absence, the senior-most judge of the Supreme Court available.

Tenure:
The President is elected for a period of five years. The period of five years begins from the day he enters upon his office. The President is eligible for re-election.

Removal by Impeachment:
The President can be removed from office by impeachment only. The Constitution lays down a detailed procedure for the impeachment of the President. He can be impeached “for violation of the Constitution”.

When a President is to be impeached for the violation of the Constitution, the charges can be prepared by either House of the Parliament. In other words, the impeachment charged may be initiated by the Lok Sabha or the Rajya Sabha. (in the United States of America, this right belongs exclusively to the Lower House, i.e., the House of Representatives). But no such charge is to be preferred unless the proposal to prefer such a charge is contained in a resolution which has been moved after at least 14 days’ notice in writing signed by not less than one-fourth of the total number of members of the House.

The resolution must be passed by a two-third majority of the total membership of the House. If passed by the requisite majority in one house, it is sent to the other House for investigation. The other House is empowered to entrust this job of investigation to a court or tribunal.

However, the resolution had got to be passed by the other house by a two-third majority of the total membership of this House. If the other House also passes the resolution by a two-third majority of the total membership of this House, then it means the charge is proved and the President is removed from his office from the ‘date’ (word ‘time has not been used’) on which the investigating House passes the resolution.

However, the President has the right to be heard and defended when the charges against him are being investigated. He may defend himself in person or through his council. One thing to be noted here is that there is no provision for suspension of the President under impeachment. He continues to hold his office during the period of investigation.

Salary and Allowances:
The President of India gets a salary of Rs. 5,00,000 per month and an official residence (called Rashtrapati Bhavan in New Delhi) free of rent. In addition to the salary, the President also gets handsome allowances of various kinds as determined by Parliament. According to the President’s Pension Act, a person who ceases to hold office as President, either by expiration of his term of office or by resignation, is entitled to a monthly pension of Rs. 2,50,000. The Government may also allow him a free medical aid as was done in the case of Dr. Rajendra Prasad.

The salary and other allowances of the President are charged on the Consolidated Fund of India. According to Art. 59 (4), the emoluments and allowances of the President shall not be diminished during his term of office.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 2.
Describe the powers of the President of India
Or
Discuss the executive and judicial powers of the President.
Or
Explain the powers of the President of India other than emergency powers.
Answer:
The Constitution of India establishes a federal form of government.
According to Art. 53, the executive powers of the Union have been vested in the President which shall be exercised by him directly or through officers subordinate to him in accordance with the Constitution. However, India being a parliamentary form of government, the President is only a nominal head and the working executive is the Council of Ministers headed by the Prime Minister.
The powers of the President can be divided into two categories-
(A) Powers in normal times and
(B) Emergency powers.

(A) POWERS IN NORMAL TIMES:
During normal times the President exercises four types of powers:
1. Executive Powers
2. Legislative Powers
3. Financial Powers
4. Judicial Powers.

1. Executive Powers:
The President is the Chief Executive or Head of the State. According to Art. 53 (1) of the Constitution, the executive powers of the Union have been vested in the President. He may exercise these powers himself or get them exercised through officers subordinate to him.

(i) Appointments:
The President is authorised to make a number of appointments. He appoints the Prime Minister and the other Ministers on the advice of the Prime Minister, the Attorney General, the Comptroller and the Auditor General, Judges of the Supreme Court and the High Courts, the Chairman and Members of Joint Public Service Commission, the Chairman and members of Joint Public Service Commission, the Election Commission, Finance Commission, the Official

Language Commission and Commission for the Scheduled Castes, Tribes, Backward Classes, etc. He also appoints the State Governors, Lt. Governors and Chief Commissioners of the Union Territories. He also sends and receives diplomatic representatives. He makes rule for the convenient transaction of business of the Government of India and allocates this business among the Ministers. Under Art. 78, the Prime Minister is bound to communicate to the President all decisions of the Cabinet relating to administration and such proposals for legislation as the President may call for.

(ii) Military Powers:
The President is the Supreme Commander of the Defence Forces, but the exercise of military powers of the President is regulated by the Parliament. The President cannot declare war or deploy forces without the sanction of the Parliament or in anticipation of the sanction by the Parliament.

(iii) Power Relating to Foreign Affairs:
The President has extensive diplomatic powers. He represents his country in international affairs. He appoints Indian representatives to foreign countries and also receives diplomatic representatives of other States which have been recognised by Parliament.

(iv) Power of Direction, Control and Co-ordination:
The President has the power of direction, control and co-ordination of the work in the States. He can issue directions to the States for the compliance of Union laws. In particular, he can direct a State or States to construct and maintain communications of national or military importance and for the protection of railways. He can establish an Inter-State council to advise him upon co-ordination of policy and settlement of disputes between the States.

(v) Administration of Union Territories:
Art. 239 provides that every Union Territory shall be administered by the President acting through an administrator. The administrator, given any designation by the President, is appointed by the President. The President may appoint the Governor of a State as the administrator of an adjoining Union Territory. When the Governor is discharging the duties of the administrator he shall exercise his functions as administrator independently of his Council of Ministers.

The Parliament by law can establish democratic institutions in the Union Territories. The President can make regulations for the peace, progress and good government of the Union Territory of the Andaman and Nicobar Islands and the Laccadive, Minicoy and Amindivi Islands. The regulations made by the President have the same effect as an act of Parliament. The President is also competent to repeal or amend, through such regulations, any existing Act dealing with the administration of these Islands.

(vi) Informative Powers:
The President had a right to ask for information with regard to the decision of the Council of Ministers. The Prime Minister is required to keep in touch with the President for this purpose.

(vii) Sending back the decision of the Council of Ministers for reconsideration:
Under 44th amendment the President is empowered to send back the decision of the Council of Ministers for reconsideration, but if the council of Ministers repeats the decision, then the President is bound to accept the decision.

(viii)Link between the Centre and States:
The President is the link between the centre and the states. He is the executive head both of the union and of the federation.

2. Legislative Powers:
The President enjoys many legislative powers. He is a part of the Parliament. Besides the Lok Sabha and Rajya Sabha, the President is also a part of the Parliament. The legislative powers of the President are provided by Article 123.

(i) Power to Summon:
Prorogue and Dissolve the Parliament. The President can convene, prorogue and dissolve the Parliament. He can order fresh elections to the Lok Sabha on the recommendation of the Prime Minister. He must call the session of the Parliament within 6 months.

(ii) Address to the Parliament:
He can address the two Houses of the Parliament jointly or he may address them independently. The first session of the Parliament after the General elections is inaugurated by the President. He also addresses the first session of the Parliament every year. In his address the President explains the policy of the Government to the House.

(iii) Nominates the Members of the Parliament:
He nominates 12 persons to the Rajya Sabha. These persons must have distinguished themselves in the fields of art, literature, science and social service. He can nominate two persons of the Anglo-Indian community to the Lok Sabha if he feels that the community has not got adequate representation.

(iv) Assent on Bills:
No bill passed by the Parliament can become an Act without the assent of the President. He can reject an ordinary bill only once and when passed for the second time, the President is to give his assent.

(v) He gives approval to many bills passed by the State Legislatures.

(vi) Joint Session:
He can call a joint session of the two Houses of the Parliament. If the two Chambers differ on an ordinary bill, only then he calls a joint session.

(vii) Power to Send Messages: He can send messages to any House from time to time.

(viii)Ordinance:
During the intervals of the sessions of the Parliament he can issue ordinances. These ordinances have the force of laws. The ordinance is put before the Parliament as soon as it meets. The Parliament has the authority to reject the ordinance. It can be withdrawn by the President also. If it is neither rejected by the Parliament nor withdrawn by the President, it will automatically end six weeks after the first meeting of the Parliament. On Sept. 22, 1980 the President promulgated the National Security Ordinance to enable the government to detain any person to prevent him from acting against the defence or security of the country.

(ix) Constitutional Amendment Bill:
A Constitutional Amendment Bill is finally sent to the President for his assent. The President is bound to give his assent to the Constitutional Amendment Bilk

3. Financial Powers:
The financial powers of the President as mentioned in the Constitution are as follows:

(i) It is the duty of the President to place the Budget for the current year before the Parliament. It is to be presented before the beginning of the financial year. Normally the budget is presented to the Parliament by the Finance Minister on behalf of the President.

(ii) Money Bills can only be introduced in the Parliament on the recommendation of the President.

(iii) The President has full control over the contingency fund and he can spend it according to his sweet will.

(iv) He distributes the share of income tax among the States.

(v) He appoints Finance Commission. 15th Finance Commission was appointed on 27 Nov.- 2017 in the Chairmanship of Sh.N.K. Singh.

4. Judicial Powers:
The President has some judicial power also. It is provided by Article 122 of the Constitution.

  • The President appoints the judges and the chief justice to the Supreme Court and the State High Courts.
  • The President cannot be sured in any court of India in connection with any matter concerning his office.
  • He has the power to pardon, reprieve and commute punishment.

(B) EMERGENCY POWERS
Besides powers in normal times the President of India has Emergency Powers as well. The President enjoys three types of emergency powers:
1. Emergency due to external aggression or armed rebellion.
2. Emergency arising out of failure of the constitutional machinery a State.
3. Financial emergency.

For detailed study of Emergency Powers:
1. Emergency arising out of external aggression or Armed Rebellion:
According to Art. 352 if the President is satisfied that a grave emergency exists whereby the security of India or any part of India is threatened by war, external aggression or armed rebellion, he may proclaim a state of emergency. Under 59th amendment in Punjab emergency can be declared on the ground of internal disturbances. The President can declare emergency even before the actual occurrence of war, external aggression or armed rebellion.

But in the 44th Amendment it is provided that the President shall not issue a proclamation of Emergency unless the decision of the Cabinet that such a proclamation may be issued has been communicated to him in writing. According to 42nd Amendment, President can declare emergency in the whole of India or in such part of the territory there of as may be specified in the proclamation. Such a Proclamation may be revoked by a consequent proclamation. If the proclamation has not been approved within one month by both the Houses of Parliament by two-thirds of the majority of the members present and voting, it will become ineffective. If such a

proclamation is issued at a time when the Lok Sabha has been dissolved or the dissolution of the Lok Sabha takes place during the period of one month, and if the Rajya Sabha has approved the proclamation within one month, but it had not been approved by the Lok Sabha, the proclamation shall cease to operate at the expiration of 30 days from the date on which the Lok Sabha sits after its reconstitution. However, if within 30 days the Lok Sabha approves the proclamation, it continues.

After approval of the Parliament emergency continues till the President revokes it by a subsequent proclamation. But it is provided in the 44th Amendment that for the continuance of the emergency, approval by resolution of both Houses would be required every six months. Provision is also made in the 44th Amendment that the proclamation of Emergency would cease to be opeative whenever a resolution to that effect is adopted by the Lok Sabha by a simple majority of the members of the House present and voting.

Ever since the operation of the Constitution (Jan. 26, 1950), such an emergency has been declared three times. First, when India was attacked by China in October, 1962 and second when all of a sudden, Pakistan attacked India on December 3, 1971. Third time internal emergency was declared on 26th June, 1975 and this emergency was-removed on 21st March, 1977 whereas external emergency declared in 1971 was lifted on 27th March, 1977.

Effects of this Proclamation:
1. The most significant effect of this proclamation is that the federal form of the Constitution is converted into unitary form of government. The authority of the Centre is increased till the emergency lasts. It should be remembered the State Governments do not cease to function. They continue, to function as before under normal conditions. But the Centre gets the authority to give directions to the States as the manner in which the executive power of the States is to be exercised. The legislative power of the Centre is also widened.

2. Parliament will have the power to make laws for the whole or part of India with respect to any of the matters given in the State List. Laws so made by Parliament shall cease to operate six months after the Proclamation of Emergency has come to an end.

3. The President, may by an order, modify the provisions relating to distribution of revenues between the Union and the States.

4. The Fundamental Rights given under Art. 19 (six freedoms) are automatically suspended throughout the country. The suspension of Art. 19 continues until the proclamation of emergency ends. However, under 59th Amendment this right can be suspended when emergency is declared in Punjab.

5. The President by order can also suspend the right to move the courts to enforce any Fundamental Rights. All proceedings pending in any court for the enforcement of the rights so mentioned may remain suspended for the period during which Proclamation is in force or for such short period as may be specified in the order. But according to 44th Amendmenl the enforcement of the right to life and personal liberty under Article 21 cannot be suspended. The order so made may extend to the whole or to any part of the territory of India. However, the order of the

parliament is required to be laid before each House of Parliament “as soon as may be after it is made.” And what is the definition of ‘as soon as may be’, the constitution does not fix any time limit for the order to be laid before Parliament.

2. Emergency arising out of the failure of constitutional machinery in a State. (Art. 356):
The second type of emergncy powers given to the President deal with the failure of constitutional machinery in the State. If the President, either on the receipt of a report from the Governor of a State or otherwise, is satisfied that a situation has arisen in which the Government of the State cannot be carried on in accordance with the provisions of the Constitution, the President can proclaim emergency in that state.

In May, 1994, the Supreme Court had declared that dismissal of a state government by the President under Article 356 of the Constitution is open to judicial scrutiny. The apex Court had held that presidential proclamation under Article 356 could be challenged only on the ground that the exercise of power was malafide or based on wholly extraneous and irrelevant grounds.

Any proclamation made under Art. 356 may be revoked or varied by a subsequent Proclamation. The Proclamation issued by the President is required to be laid before each House of Parliament and it ceases to operate after the expiry of two months unless before the expiration of that period it has been approved by resolutions of both Houses of Parliament. If approved by Parliament, the Proclamation, remains in force for six months after the parliamentary approval. The duration of the proclamation can be extended for six months at a time and the maximum period is one year.

According to 44th Amendment, a resolution with respect to the continuance in force of a Proclamation under the article for any period beyond the expiration of one year from the date of issue of such proclamation shall not be passed by either House of Parliament unless a Proclamation of Emergency is in operation at the time of the passing of such resolution and the Election Commission certifies that the continuance in force of the proclamation under the Article during the period specified in such resolution is necessary on account of difficulties in holding elections to the Legislative Assembly of the State concerned.

Under 59th Amendment in Punjab President’s rule can be extended up-to three years. Under 64th Amendment President’s rule in Punjab was extended six months more beyond three years. By 68th amendment President’s rule in Punjab can be extended up-to 5 years.

Effects of this Proclamation:
(i) The President can assume to himself all or any of the functions of the State or he may vest all or any of those functions in the Governor or any other executive authority.

(ii) The President can suspend or dissolve the State Legislative Assembly. He may declare that the powers of the State Legislature shall be exercisable by or under the authority of Parliament. However, Parliament will be competent to confer that power on the President and also authorise him to delegate those powers to anybody he thinks fit. .

(iii) The President can make any other incidental or consequential provisions necessary to give effect to the object of the Proclamation.

(iv) If the Lok Sabha is not in session then the President sanctions the expenditure from the consolidated fund of the State.

President’s rule has been promulgated almost 121 times in states since the enforcement of the Constitution. Almost all the States have been, at one time or the other, been put under President’s Rule.

3. Financial Emergency (Art. 360):
If the President is satisfied that a situation has arisen whereby the financial stability or credit of India or any part of it is threatened, he may declare a Financial Emergency under Art. 360 of the Constitution. Such a Proclamation may be revoked by a subsequent Proclamation. The proclamation has to be laid before each House of Parliament.

It ceases to operate at the expiration of two months unless it is approved earlier by a resolution of both Houses of Parliament. The Proclamation in this case also should be approved by Parliament as in the other two cases of emergency. Like the Proclamation of war-emergency, Financial Emergency also continues for an indefinite period. Fortunately, this kind of Emergency has not been declared so far.

Effects of this Proclamation:
(i) During the Financial emergency, the executive authority of the union shall extend to the giving of directions to any State to observe such canons of financial property as may be specified in the direction or any other directions which the President may deem necessary for this purpose.

(ii) The President can ask a State to reduce salaries and allowances of all or any class of public servants connected with the affairs of a State.

(iii) The President can give direction to a State to reserve all Money Bills for the consideration of the President after they have been passed by the State Legislature.

(iv) The President shall be competent to issue directions for the reduction of salaries and allowances of all or any class of persons serving in connection with the affairs of the Union including the judges of the Supreme Court and the High Courts.

Criticism:
Evidently the Constitution gives the President very drastic powers to deal with Emergency. Emergency powers of the President were criticised within and outside the Constituent Assembly. It has been said that these powers are not compatible with democracy. When the provisions relating to Emergency powers were passed, Sh. H. V. Kamath, member of the Constituent Assembly, declared, “ It is a day of shame and sorrow, God save the Indian people.”

Sh. K. T. Shah described Article 359, which empowers the President to suspend the right to seek enforcement of fundamental rights “as the grand final and crowning glory of this chapter of reaction and retrogression.” The power to abrogate fundamental rights of citizens during Emergencies can easily be abused for depriving the people of their liberty and imposing a totalitarian rule on the country.

According to H. V. Kamath, “ There is no parallel to the chapter of Emergency in any Constitution of democratic countries of the world”. He further said,, “I fear that by the single chapter we are seeking to lay the foundation of a totalitarian State, a police State, State completely opposed to all the ideas and principles that we have held aloft during the last few decades, a State where the rights and liberties of millions of innocent men and women will be in continuous jeopardy, a State where if there be peace it will be the peace of the grave and the void of the desert. I only pray to God that He may grant us wisdom, wisdom to avert any such catastrophe, grant us fortitude and courage.”

Another point of criticism is that during Emergency federal structure is changed into unitary one. T. T. Krishnamachari said, “The Constitution of India is designed to work as a federal system in normal times and as a unitary system in war and other emergencies.” Moreover, ruling party at the Centre by using Article 356 can declare President’s rule in a particular State simply because some other party is ruling the State. Article 356 was misused when nine state governments were dismissed on 30th April 1977 and in Feb 1980.

Justification of Emergency Powers. Emergency powers of the President are defended on the ground that Strong Centre is needed for security of the country. V. N. Shukla writes, “ These provisions may appear to be harsh, particularly in a constitution which professes to be built upon an edifice of fundamental rights and democracy. But the provisions may be studied in the light of India’s past history. India has had her inglorious days whenever the Central power was weak.

It is well that the Constitution guards against the forces of disintegration. Events may take place threatening the very existence of the State, together with all that is desired to remain basic and immutable will be swept away.” Country’s security is more important than the federal system. In the words of Dr. Ambedkar, “ It is only the Centre which can work for the common purpose and for the general interest of the country as a whole. Herein lies the justification of giving to the Centre overriding power to be used in the Emergency.”

It is not possible for the President to become a dictator. In India there exists a parliamentary form of Government. The essence of parliamentary form of Government is that the Head of the State is a nominal head. It is the Council of Ministers which is the real executive.

According to 44th Amendment, an Emergency can be proclaimed only on the basis of written advice tendered by the cabinet. In addition a Proclamation of Emergency must be approved by the two Houses of parliament by two-thirds majority within a period of one month.

As a further check against the misuse of the emergency powers and to put the right to life and liberty on a secure footing, it is provided in 44th Amendment Act that the power to suspend the right to move the court for the enforcement of a fundamental right cannot be exercised in respect of the fundamental right to life and liberty.

According to 44th Amendment the provisions of Article 19 will become suspended only in the case of a proclamation of Emergency issued on the ground of war or external aggression and not in the case of a Proclamation of Emergency issued on the ground of armed rebellion. Moreover, if the President tries to become a despot, he will be impeached by the Parliament.

There is no question of autocracy under any circumstances. Only State autonomy may suffer temporarily.” Sh. Amar Nandi rightly remarked that the power conferred on the central executive to meet national emergencies is, so as to say, a loaded gun which can be used both to protect and to destroy the liberty of citizens. The gun must be used, therefore, with extreme caution.

Position of the President:
What exactly is the position of the President in the Indian Constitution? Different writers have taken different and sometimes radical views. A lay man who reads the provisions of the Constitution may literally interpret them and come to the conclusion that he has been armed with drastic powers. His Emergency Power “is a bottomless well of dictatorial possibilities”. Under Art. 53 of the Constitution,
“The Executive power of the Union shall be vested in the President and shall be exercised by him either directly or through officers subordinate to him in accordance with the Constitution.”

It means the President can use the executive powers himself. Under Art. 74 of the Constitution there shall be a Council of Ministers to aid and advise the President in the exercise of his functions. But nowhere it had been stated that the President shall be bound to act in accordance with the advice of the Council of Ministers. Then, the President of India can dissolve Parliament, issue ordinances, declare emergency and can take into his hands the administration of the whole of the country. Being the Supreme Commander of all the forces he can establish his personal rule with the help of the armed forces of the country.

But this is a legal view. And the fact is a legal truth, may be a political untruth. In India, there exists parliamentary form of government. The essence of the parliamentary form of government is that the Head of the State is a titular head, a constitutional head. His powers are formal. It is the Council of Ministers which is the real functionary.

By 42nd amendment even legal position of the President has changed. Under this amendment he was bound to accept the advice of the Council of Ministers. But according to 44th Amendment the President may require the Council of Ministers to reconsider any advice tendered by them and that the President shall act in accordance with the advice tendered after such reconsideration, Thus, the critics argue that the position of the Indian President is one of honour and dignity but not of power.

Commenting upon the position of the President, Dr. Ambedkar had himself said in the Constituent Assembly: “The President occupies the same position as the King under the British Constitution. He is the head of the State but not of the Executive. He represents the nation but does not rule the nation.” To quote him again: “The President of the Indian Union will be generally bound by the advice of ministers.

He can do nothing contrary to their advice nor can he do anything without their advice.” According to late Pt. Nehru, “We have not given our President any real power but we have made his position one of great authority and dignity’. Expressing his views on the position of the President, Sh. Morarji Desai said, “It is wrong to think that our President is vested with any real power of rulership; in normal times he has none, under the Constitution he is merely a constitutional head, very much like the British King.”

However, all the critics do not subscribe to the view that the President under the Constitution is only a figure head. These critics draw our attention to the Weimar Constitution of Germany. The Weimar Constitution was based on thoroughly democratic lines. Yet it gave rise to a dictator, Hitler who trampled under his feet all the democratic principles of the Constitution. Similarly, Dr. Ambedkar himself used the words “ generally bound”. It shows that the President is not a rubber stamp, he is not a puppet in the hands of the Council of Ministers.

The Constitution allows him opportunities when he can use his discretion. For example, he can use his discretion in the appointment of the Prime Minister when no political party gets absolute majority in the Lok Sabha. After all, the President is a promoted politician. As Jennings has said, “He cannot be expected to play the same role of impartiality as is expected from the British Monarch.”

Under Art. 78 of the Constitution, it shall be the duty of the Prime Minister to communicate to the President all decisions of the Council of Ministers relating to the administration of the affairs of the Union and proposals for legislation, to furnish such information ralting to the administration to the affairs of the Union and proposals for legislation as the President may call for Under Art. Ill the President can use his veto power also.

His emergency powers are so sweeping that, as H. V. Kamath feared, he can lay the foundation of a totalitarian State, a police State…. In his address delivered on the occasion of the laying of the foundation stone of the Indian Law Institute, New Delhi in November, 1960, President Rajendra Prasad urged the Institute to make a study of the powers and functions of the President and find out to what extent they differed from those of the King of England.

He was doubtful that the position of the President is like the position of the British Monarch. He clearly pointed out that because the conditions in India were different from those in England, “ It may not be desirable to treat ourselves so strictly bound by the interpretations which have been given from time to time to expressions in England.”

His successor Dr. Radhakrishnan also expressed publicly similar views. While speaking in the civic reception at Kanpur, he said, “Jpdia was suffering because sufficient care had not been taken to explain our position abroad.” Dr. Radhakrishnan was criticising the foreign policy of the country. At the time of the assumption of his office the President has to take the oath to protect, preserve and defend the Constitution and to devote himself to the service and well-being of the people of India. No wonder, he may veto a Bill which in spirit, runs counter to the Directive Principles of State Policy.

Conclusion:
The conclusion is clear. The President is not a rubber-stamp under the Constitution. Accroding to B. Shiva Rao, the President is more than a figure-head. Even President Giri agreed to this view when he said that the country needed a “really independent and strong President who could see things straight and do justice well without fear or favour.” In his election campaign he clearly said, “If elected he would not be a sleeping partner, nor a rubber stamp

He would be an active partner within the four walls of the Constituion.” Thus, a fairly large section of the educated public opinion in the country feels that the president has a share in the actual government of the country. Even Dr. Radhakrishnan on the the day of his retirement indirectly hinted on such a role of the President when he said, “The President symbolizes national purpose and national unity and can be a great influence for stability and progress.”

The real position of the President depends upon his relationship with the Council of Ministers and, to a great extent, upon his personality. It he is a man of dynamic personality, he will have an edge over the Council of Ministers.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 3.
Explain emergency powers of the President.
Or
Discuss the emergency powers of the President of India. Do you agree with the view that the President can become a dictator by exercising them?
Answer:
Besides powers in normal times the President of India has Emergency Powers as well. The President can use the emergency powers even when there is the likelihood of an emergency.
1. Emergency due to external aggression or armed rebellion.
2. Emergency arising out of the failure of the constitutional machinery in the States.
3. Financial emergency.

1. Emergency arising out of external aggression or Armed Rebellion:
According to Art. 352 if the President is satisfied that a grave emergency exists whereby the security of India or any part of India is threatened by war, external aggression or armed rebellion, he may proclaim a state of emergency. Under 59th amendment in Punjab emergency can be declared on the ground of internal disturbances. The President can declare emergency even before the actual occurrence of war, external aggression or armed rebellion.

But in the 44th Amendment it is provided that the President shall not issue a proclamation of Emergency unless the decision of the Cabinet that such a proclamation may be issued has been communicated to him in writing. According to 42nd Amendment, President can declare emergency in the whole of India or in such part of the territory there of as may be specified in the proclamation. Such a Proclamation may be revoked by a consequent proclamation. If the proclamation has not been approved within one month by both the Houses of Parliament by two-thirds of the majority of the members present and voting, it will become ineffective. If such a

proclamation is issued at a time when the Lok Sabha has been dissolved or the dissolution of the Lok Sabha takes place during the period of one month, and if the Rajya Sabha has approved the proclamation within one month, but it had not been approved by the Lok Sabha, the proclamation shall cease to operate at the expiration of 30 days from the date on which the Lok Sabha sits after its reconstitution. However, if within 30 days the Lok Sabha approves the proclamation, it continues.

After approval of the Parliament emergency continues till the President revokes it by a subsequent proclamation. But it is provided in the 44th Amendment that for the continuance of the emergency, approval by resolution of both Houses would be required every six months. Provision is also made in the 44th Amendment that the proclamation of Emergency would cease to be operative whenever a resolution to that effect is adopted by the Lok Sabha by a simple majority of the members of the House present and voting.

Ever since the operation of the Constitution (Jan. 26, 1950), such an emergency has been declared three times. First, when India was attacked by China in October, 1962 and second when all of a sudden, Pakistan attacked India on December 3, 1971. Third time internal emergency was declared on 26th June, 1975 and this emergency was-removed on 21st March, 1977 whereas external emergency declared in 1971 was lifted on 27th March, 1977.

Effects of this Proclamation:
1. The most significant effect of this proclamation is that the federal form of the Constitution is converted into unitary form of government. The authority of the Center is increased till the emergency lasts. It should be remembered the State Governments do not cease to function. They continue, to function as before under normal conditions. But the Center gets the authority to give directions to the States as the manner in which the executive power of the States is to be exercised. The legislative power of the Center is also widened.

2. Parliament will have the power to make laws for the whole or part of India with respect to any of the matters given in the State List. Laws so made by Parliament shall cease to operate six months after the Proclamation of Emergency has come to an end.

3. The President, may by an order, modify the provisions relating to distribution of revenues between the Union and the States.

4. The Fundamental Rights given under Art. 19 (six freedoms) are automatically suspended throughout the country. The suspension of Art. 19 continues until the proclamation of emergency ends. However, under 59th Amendment this right can be suspended when emergency is declared in Punjab.

5. The President by order can also suspend the right to move the courts to enforce any Fundamental Rights. All proceedings pending in any court for the enforcement of the rights so mentioned may remain suspended for the period during which Proclamation is in force or for such short period as may be specified in the order. But according to 44th Amendmenl the enforcement of the right to life and personal liberty under Article 21 cannot be suspended. The order so made may extend to the whole or to any part of the territory of India. However, the order of the

parliament is required to be laid before each House of Parliament “as soon as may be after it is made.” And what is the definition of ‘as soon as may be’, the constitution does not fix any time limit for the order to be laid before Parliament.

2. Emergency arising out of the failure of constitutional machinery in a State. (Art. 356):
The second type of emergency powers given to the President deal with the failure of constitutional machinery in the State. If the President, either on the receipt of a report from the Governor of a State or otherwise, is satisfied that a situation has arisen in which the Government of the State cannot be carried on in accordance with the provisions of the Constitution, the President can proclaim emergency in that state.

In May, 1994, the Supreme Court had declared that dismissal of a state government by the President under Article 356 of the Constitution is open to judicial scrutiny. The apex Court had held that presidential proclamation under Article 356 could be challenged only on the ground that the exercise of power was malafide or based on wholly extraneous and irrelevant grounds.

Any proclamation made under Art. 356 may be revoked or varied by a subsequent Proclamation. The Proclamation issued by the President is required to be laid before each House of Parliament and it ceases to operate after the expiry of two months unless before the expiration of that period it has been approved by resolutions of both Houses of Parliament. If approved by Parliament, the Proclamation, remains in force for six months after the parliamentary approval. The duration of the proclamation can be extended for six months at a time and the maximum period is one year.

According to 44th Amendment, a resolution with respect to the continuance in force of a Proclamation under the article for any period beyond the expiration of one year from the date of issue of such proclamation shall not be passed by either House of Parliament unless a Proclamation of Emergency is in operation at the time of the passing of such resolution and the Election Commission certifies that the continuance in force of the proclamation under the Article during the period specified in such resolution is necessary on account of difficulties in holding elections to the Legislative Assembly of the State concerned.

Under 59th Amendment in Punjab President’s rule can be extended upto three years. Under 64th Amendment President’s rule in Punjab was extended six months more beyond three years. By 68th amendment President’s rule in Punjab can be extended up-to 5 years.

Effects of this Proclamation:
(i) The President can assume to himself all or any of the functions of the State or he may vest all or any of those functions in the Governor or any other executive authority.

(ii) The President can suspend or dissolve the State Legislative Assembly. He may declare that the powers of the State Legislature shall be exercisable by or under the authority of Parliament. However, Parliament will be competent to confer that power on the President and also authorize him to delegate those powers to anybody he thinks fit.

(iii) The President can make any other incidental or consequential provisions necessary to give effect to the object of the Proclamation.

(iv) If the Lok Sabha is not in session then the President sanctions the expenditure from the consolidated fund of the State.

President’s rule has been promulgated almost 121 times in states since the enforcement of the Constitution. Almost all the States have been, at one time or the other, been put under President’s Rule.

3. Financial Emergency (Art. 360):
If the President is satisfied that a situation has arisen whereby the financial stability or credit of India or any part of it is threatened, he may declare a Financial Emergency under Art. 360 of the Constitution. Such a Proclamation may be revoked by a subsequent Proclamation. The proclamation has to be laid before each House of Parliament.

It ceases to operate at the expiration of two months unless it is approved earlier by a resolution of both Houses of Parliament. The Proclamation in this case also should be approved by Parliament as in the other two cases of emergency. Like the Proclamation of war-emergency, Financial Emergency also continues for an indefinite period. Fortunately, this kind of Emergency has not been declared so far.

Effects of this Proclamation:
(i) During the Financial emergency, the executive authority of the union shall extend to the giving of directions to any State to observe such canons of financial property as may be specified in the direction or any other directions which the President may deem necessary for this purpose.

(ii) The President can ask a State to reduce salaries and allowances of all or any class of public servants connected with the affairs of a State.

(iii) The President can give direction to a State to reserve all Money Bills for the consideration of the President after they have been passed by the State Legislature.

(iv) The President shall be competent to issue directions for the reduction of salaries and allowances of all or any class of persons serving in connection with the affairs of the Union including the judges of the Supreme Court and the High Courts.

Criticism:
Evidently the Constitution gives the President very drastic powers to deal with Emergency. Emergency powers of the President were criticised within and outside the Constituent Assembly. It has been said that these powers are not compatible with democracy. When the provisions relating to Emergency powers were passed, Sh. H. V. Kamath, member of the Constituent Assembly, declared, “ It is a day of shame and sorrow, God save the Indian people.”

Sh. K. T. Shah described Article 359, which empowers the President to suspend the right to seek enforcement of fundamental rights “as the grand final and crowning glory of this chapter of reaction and retrogression.” The power to abrogate fundamental rights of citizens during Emergencies can easily be abused for depriving the people of their liberty and imposing a totalitarian rule on the country.

According to H. V. Kamath, “ There is no parallel to the chapter of Emergency in any Constitution of democratic countries of the world”. He further said,, “I fear that by the single chapter we are seeking to lay the foundation of a totalitarian State, a police State, State completely opposed to all the ideas and principles that we have held aloft during the last few decades, a State where the rights and liberties of millions of innocent men and women will be in continuous jeopardy, a State where if there be peace it will be the peace of the grave and the void of the desert. I only pray to God that He may grant us wisdom, wisdom to avert any such catastrophe, grant us fortitude and courage.”

Another point of criticism is that during Emergency federal structure is changed into unitary one. T. T. Krishnamachari said, “The Constitution of India is designed to work as a federal system in normal times and as a unitary system in war and other emergencies.” Moreover, ruling party at the Centre by using Article 356 can declare President’s rule in a particular State simply because some other party is ruling the State. Article 356 was misused when nine state governments were dismissed on 30th April 1977 and in Feb 1980.

Justification of Emergency Powers. Emergency powers of the President are defended on the ground that Strong Centre is needed for security of the country. V. N. Shukla writes, “ These provisions may appear to be harsh, particularly in a constitution which professes to be built upon an edifice of fundamental rights and democracy. But the provisions may be studied in the light of India’s past history. India has had her inglorious days whenever the Central power was weak.

It is well that the Constitution guards against the forces of disintegration. Events may take place threatening the very existence of the State, together with all that is desired to remain basic and immutable will be swept away.” Country’s security is more important than the federal system. In the words of Dr. Ambedkar, “ It is only the Centre which can work for the common purpose and for the general interest of the country as a whole. Herein lies the justification of giving to the Centre overriding power to be used in the Emergency.”

It is not possible for the President to become a dictator. In India there exists a parliamentary form of Government. The essence of parliamentary form of Government is that the Head of the State is a nominal head. It is the Council of Ministers which is the real executive.

According to 44th Amendment, an Emergency can be proclaimed only on the basis of written advice tendered by the cabinet. In addition a Proclamation of Emergency must be approved by the two Houses of parliament by two-thirds majority within a period of one month. As a further check against the misuse of the emergency powers and to put the right to life and liberty on a secure footing, it is provided in 44th Amendment Act that the power to suspend the right to move the court for the enforcement of a fundamental right cannot be exercised in respect of the fundamental right to life and liberty.

According to 44th Amendment the provisions of Article 19 will become suspended only in the case of a proclamation of Emergency issued on the ground of war or external aggression and not in the case of a Proclamation of Emergency issued on the ground of armed rebellion. Moreover, if the President tries to become a despot, he will be impeached by the Parliament.

Conclusion:
We can conclude safely that it is not possible for the President to become a dictator. No doubt suspension of rights of the citizens is against democratic system but rights of the individual are not more important than the security of the State. To quote K. Santhanam, “The net result of Article 356 is that when there is a proclamation the State Government may come to be temporarily merged with the Government of the Union.

There is no question of autocracy under any circumstances. Only State autonomy may suffer temporarily.” Sh. Amar Nandi rightly remarked that the power conferred on the central executive to meet national emergencies is, so as to say, a loaded gun which can be used both to protect and to destroy the liberty of citizens. The gun must be used, therefore, with extreme caution.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 4.
Discuss the election, powers and functions of the Vice-President of India.
Or
Write a short note on the Vice-President of India.
Answer:
Article 63 of the Constitution lays down that there shall be a Vice-President of India. Like the President of India, the Vice-President is also elected indirectly by the people. Whenever the office of the President falls vacant due to the death, resignation or removal of the President, the Vice-President acts for him. However, he acts for limited period only.

Qualifications:
A candidate for the office of the Vice-President must possess the following qualifications:
1. He should be a citizen of India.

2. He should have completed the age of 35 years.

3. He should be eligible to be elected as a member of the Rajya Sabha.

4. He must not hold any office of profit under any Government—Centre, State of Local. For purposes of this provision, the Constitution lays down that the offices of the President or Vice- President, Governor of a State or Ministers of the Union or State Governments, shall not be considered places of profit.

5. The Vice- President cannot be a member of either House of Parliament or of a State Legislature. If he is a member of either of these Houses at the time when he is elected as Vice- President, his seat in that Legislature is declared vacant from the date he takes over as Vice-President.

6. The name of the candidate for the office of Vice-President must be proposed and seconded by at least 20 electors each.

Election:
The Vice-President of India is elected by an electoral college consisting of the members of both Houses of Parliament in accordance with the system of proportional representation by means of the single transferable vote and the voting at such election shall be by secret ballot. The two Houses need not sit together for this purpose. (The Eleventh Amendment).

It is significant to note that in the election of the Vice-President the nominated members of both the Houses have the right to vote while in the election of the President only the elected members of Parliament are eligible to vote. According to the Eleventh Amedment (1961) of the constitution the election of the President or Vice-President is not to be questioned on the ground that there was a vacancy in the Electoral College.

In August 2017. Sh. Venkaiah Naidu candidate of National Democratic Alliance was elected Vice¬President of India. Sh. Venkaiah Naidu defeated United Progressive Alliance candidate Sh. Gopal Krishna Gandhi. Sh. Venkaiah Naidu secured 516 votes while Sh. Gopal Krishna Gandhi secured 244 votes.

Term:
The Vice-President is elected for a term of five years. The period of five years starts from the date on which he enters upon his office. He is eligible for re-election. The Vice-President may resign his office by writing to the President before the expiry of five years. In 1969 when the Acting President V.V. Giri resigned, he addressed his letter of resignation to the President. This he had done on the advice of the Attorney-General. The office of the Vice-President may also fall vacant either on the death of the Vice-President or when he has been removed from office by impeachment.

Removal by Impeachment:
The Vice-President can be removed from office by impeachment. He can be removed from office if a resolution to that effect is passed by the Rajya Sabha by a majority of its then members and if the resolution is approved by the Lok Sabha. Fourteen days’ notice is necessary for moving such a resolution.

Salary:
As Vice-President of India, he gets no salary. The Vice-President is the ex-officio Chairman of the Rajya Sabha and he receives- a salary of Rs. 4,00,000 per month. He is also entitled to the use of offical residence. When the Vice-President acts as President, he has all the privileges, powes and immunities of the President. According to Vice¬President Pension Act, a person who ceases to hold office as Vice-President, either by expiration of his term of office or by resignation, is entitled to a monthly pension of Rs. 2,00,000.

Functions:
The duties of the Vice-President are two-fold: 1. He is the ex-officio Chairman of the Rajya Sabha and 2. He acts for the President when the office of the President is vacant. Even when the President is ill or otherwise unable to perform the duties of his office, the Vice-President acts for him.

As Vice-President. In the absence of the President or during casual vacancy in the office of the President, the Vice-President shall perform all the functions of the President. If the President is unable to discharge his functions owing to absence, illness or any other cause, the Vice-President will discharge his functions until the date on which the President resumes his duties. Under such circumstances:

  1. The Vice-President performs the duties of the President.
  2. The Vice-President has the authority to exercise all the powers concerning the office of the President.
  3. He can remain for a period of 6 months in the office of the President in the case of President’s resignation, death and removal from office. He cannot continue in the office of the President more than this period.
  4. He makes arrangement for the election of the new President within a period of six months. The new President must be elected within this period.
  5. The Vice-President can himself contest for Presidentship of the country.

The office of the Vice-President is next to the office of the President of the country. But the Vice-President has no functions to perform as the President of the country. He has the functions to perform only in the absence of the President. It is only an office of pride and honour.

As Chairman of Rajya Sabha. The Vice-President is the ex-officio Chairman of Rajya Sabha. That means that being the Vice-President of the country he is the Chairman of the Rajya Sabha. He is to perform various functions in this capacity as the Chairman of the Rajya Sabha and they are given as follows:

  1. He presides over the meetings of the Rajya Sabha.
  2. He maintains decorum and decency in the House.
  3. He allots time to the members to speak.
  4. He is not a member of the Rajya Sabha. Therefore, he is not entitled to cast his vote but in case of a tie he makes use of his casting vote.

The Vice-President cannot perside over the meeting of the Rajya Sabha when:

  • He is acting as the President of the country and
  • When the Rajya Sabha is considering charges against him.

Position of the Vice-President:
The office of the Vice-President is not of any great importance. No doubt his office is next to the office of the President of India but he does not exercise any powers. The American Vice-President enjoys the remaining tenure of the President in case of President’s death or resignation or removal but in India under such circumstances the Vice-President works only as the acting President till the newly elected President joins.

As acting President the Vice-President will enjoy all the privileges and powers of the President. When a vacancy is caused, new President is to be elected within 6 months. The office of the Vice-President is not of great importance. But we will have to admit this that much depends upon the personality of the person who becomes the Vice-President. A person with a wonderful personality can become a very useful part of administration.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 5.
What do you know of the composition, powers and functions of the Union Council of Ministers?
Answer:
The Constitution of India provides for parliamentary government in the country. At the Centre as well as in the States there is parliamentary government. The President is only the nominal head of the State. He exercises his powers on the advice of the Council of Ministers. It is written in the Constitution that there will be a Council of Ministers headed by the Prime Minister to aid and advise the President. In fact all the powers of the President are actually exercised by the ministers. The Council of Ministers takes decisions and the President can give them a piece of advice. The ministers run the administration according to their sweet will. It is why the parliamentary system of Government is called the Cabinet Government.

Composition:
The only provision made in the constitution for the formation of the Council of Ministers is that the President appoints the Prime Minister and the other ministers are appointed by him with the consultation of the latter. But the fact is that the President does not appoint, the Prime Minister of his own sweet will. Normally the leader of the majority party in the Lok Sabha is made the Prime Minister and all other ministers are appointed by the President on the recommendation of the Prime Minister. The President cannot make any change in the list of ministers.

It is again the Prime Minister who distributes portfolios among the ministers. The ministers are taken out of the members of the legislature. If any outsider is appointed a minister, he must become the member of the legislature within 6 months. In Feb. 1988, Prime Minister Rajiv Gandhi reorganized his Council of Ministers and there were 60 members in the Council of Ministers. In the Constitution, 91st Amendment Act provides that the total number of ministers including the Prime Minister, shall not exceed 15% of the total number of members of the Lok Sabha.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister 6

In May 2019, there were 57 members in the Council of Ministers. It included 24 cabinet ministers, 24 ministers of state and 9 ministers having independent charge.

Term of Office:
It is written in the Constitution that the ministers will remain in the office during the pleasure of the President, It means that the President can remove the ministers from office whenever he likes. But it is not so. If the majority of the members of the Lok Sabha supports the Council of Ministers, it will continue to remain in office and the President cannot remove it. The ministers remain in office so far as they enjoy the confidence of the members of the Lok Sabha.

Salary:
The Constitution of India lays down that the salaries, allowances, etc. of the ministers shall be decided by the Parliament. The ministers are entitled to a salary, daily allowances and constituency allowances at the same rate as the members of Parliament.

Powers and Functions Of The Cabinet:
The Cabinet is the real ruler of the country. All the executive authority of the President is exercised by the cabinet. Following are the powers and functions of the Cabinet:

1. Determination of National Policy:
The polity of the nation is formulated by the Cabinet. After taking office the Cabinet is to formulate its internal and external policy according to which it is to run the administration of the State. It is the Government which is responsible for internal peace and order, and freedom from external aggression and better living of the people of the country. It has, therefore, to formulate policies in a way that they are helpful for the people of the country at large.

2. Control over Administration:
The administration of the country is to be run by the ministers. Every member of the Council of Ministers has one or more departments under his charge and he has to look after its working and administration. No doubt, it is the civil servants who carry on the administration but this administration has to be within the framework of the policies laid down by the Council of Ministers. Departmental administration has to be run by the civil servants but it is the minister who is responsible for the smooth running of the administration.

3. Foreign Relations:
It is the function of the Cabinet to maintain relations with other countries. These relations are established according to the policies laid down by the Cabinet. The ambassadors to foreign countries are appointed on the advice of the cabinet. The correspondence with other countries is done of course in the name of the President but actually it is the Cabinet who performs this function. It is the Cabinet which enters into treaties with other countries.

4. Legislative Powers: In a Parliamentary Government there is a close relationship between the Cabinet and the legislature. It enjoys many legislative powers.

  1. The ministers are taken from among the members of the Parliament and they have a big share in law-making.
  2. The President convenes the meetings of the Parliament on the advice of the Council of Ministers.
  3. The Cabinet prepares the programme of the session.
  4. The ministers introduce the bills in the House and see them through. Most of the bills in a Parliamentary Government are introduced in the Parliament by the ministers. They explain the policy and the purpose of the bills to the Parliament.
  5. Laws in the Parliament are framed in accordance with the wishes of the Cabinet. As the ministers belong to the majority party so they are sure of the support of the members to their bills.
  6. The President issues ordinances on the advice of the ministers.

5. Financial Powers: The Cabinet enjoys many financial powers:

  1. The budget is prepared by the Finance Minister in consultation with other ministers.
  2. It is the ministers who suggest an increase, decrease or abolition in the taxes. Money bills can only be introduced by the ministers.

6. Appointments:
Important appointments are made only on the advice of the ministers. For example, the appointments of Governors, Ambassadors and members of the Union Public Service Commission are made on the recommendations of the ministers.

7. Administrative Justice:
The ministers also exercise judicial powers. They are to decide many administrative matters. They are to give a decision in administrative matters and decisions of the ministers are final. While deciding cases the ministers have the right to adopt judicial methods like all other courts.

Conclusion:
The above mentioned powers and functions of the Cabinet clearly explain that the administration of the State is run according to the wishes of the Cabinet. It can run the administration in a way it likes. It is rightly said that the ‘Cabinet is the steering wheel of the ship of the State’. It is said that the British Cabinet has become the virtual dictator, the State and the Parliament have become subservient to it.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 6.
Distinguish between the Cabinet and the Council of Ministers.
Answer:
There are some differences between the Cabinet and the Council of Ministers. This distinction must be clarified. The Cabinet is a part of the Council of Ministers and the real authority is enjoyed by it.

Council of Ministers:
The Council of Ministers consists of the following types of ministers:
1. Cabinet Ministers:
These are the most important ministers. They control the important departments of administration. They frame policies and decide all other important matters, They are generally 25 to 30 in number. It is these ministers who form the Cabinet. All the powers of the Council of Ministers are exercised according to the wishes of the Cabinet.

2. State Ministers:
The State Ministers also head some departments. But they are not entitled to participate in the meetings of the Cabinet. They can be invited to attend the meetings of the Cabinet when some special issue or the issue concerning their department is to be discussed.

3. Deputy Ministers: The Deputy Ministers are appointed to assist the Cabinet ministers and the State ministers in the performance of their functions. The Deputy Minister is not the head of any department. The Deputy Ministers are appointed almost in each department.

4. Parliament Secretaries:
The Parliamentary Secretaries are not minister and they are not members of the Council of Ministers. Parliamentary Secretaries are not appointed by the President. They are appointed by the Prime Minister. They have no independent powers or functions. They assist the ministers to whom they are attached to do their parliamentary work. They have no control over the administrative departments. They are, infact, probationers under training and may hope to rise to higher ranks if they make good.

5. Deputy Prime Minister:
Neither the Constitution nor any of the Union laws provide for the office of the Deputy Prime Minister. It is the sole discretion of the Prime Minister to bestow the rank and the status of Deputy Prime Minister on any number of members of the Cabinet. Sardar Vallabh Bhai Patel was given the status and rank of Deputy Prime Minister in the Council of Minister headed by Late Pt. Jawaharlal Nehru.

Similarly in the Cabinet headed by Late Mrs. Indira Gandhi, Mr. Morarji Desai was ranked as Deputy Prime Minister of the country. The rank and status’of Deputy Prime Minister was conferred on Sarvashri Charan Singh and Jagjivan Ram in the Council of Ministers headed by Sh. Morarji Desai.

In the Ministery headed by Sh. V.P. Singh, Ch. Devi Lai was sworn in as the Deputy Prime Minister of the country. In June, 2002, Mr. Lai Krishan Adwani sworn in as the Deputy Prime Minister of India in the ministry of Mr. Atal Behari Vajpayee. The office of the Deputy Prime Minister carries neither special responsibilites nor special privileges.

The Council of Ministers consists different types of ministers. Their number is near about 65. But the Cabinet consists of only the Cabinet ministers and all important decisions are taken by them. Whatever decisions are taken by the Cabinet all the ministers are to abide by them. All the members of the Council of Ministers are to carry out those decisions.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 7.
What are the main features of the Cabinet System in India?
Answer:
In India the parliamentary system of government has been adopted. The Council of Ministers exercises all the powers of the President. It performs its functions on the basis of the following principles:

1. President a Constitutional Head:
The first important feature of the parliamentary system of government is that the Head of State enjoys only nominal powers. The entire administration of the State is run in the name of the President but in reality it is the Cabinet which is responsible for running the administration of the State. The President takes all the decisions on the advice of the Prime Minister.

The Prime Minister is the head of the government whereas the President is the head of the State. The President cannot participate in the meetings of the Cabinet and he is kept out of the Cabinet. The President appoints the Prime Minister, but he must appoint the leader of the majority party as the Prime Minister of India. He does not interfere in the formation, meetings and the decisions of the Cabinet.

2. Close relationship between the Cabinet and Parliament:
There is a very close relationship between the Cabinet and the Parliament. The Cabinet is formed from among the members of the Parliament. If any outsider is appointed a minister he must become the member of the Parliament within six months otherwise he will have to quit the office.

3. Leadership of the Cabinet:
The Cabinet performs its functions under the control and guidance of the Prime Minister. The appointments of the ministers are made by the President on the advice of the Prime Minister. The Prime Minister presides over the meetings of the Cabinet. He can remove any minister from office. He also co-ordinates the working of the ministry.

4. Political Homogeneity:
The members of the Cabinet hold the same view point because they belong to the same political party. The Cabinet works like a unit. Therefore, all the members of the. Cabinet must agree with one another. If the ministers are taken from different political parties, they will never agree over policy matters because each political party would like to implement its own policy. It is very necessary that the ministers should be taken from the same party so that administration could be run smoothly.

5. Cabinet works as a Team:
The Cabinet works as a team. The members of the Cabinet swim and sink together. They perform their functions in consultation with one another. All the ministers are individually as well as collectively responsibly for their work. No-confidence motion against a particular minister means a no-confidence motion against the entire ministry and the entire ministry is to resign. The resignation of the Prime Minister means the resignation of the entire ministry. All the ministers are to abide by the decisions taken by the Cabinet. All the ministers remain in office or lose office together.

6. Leadership of the Prime Minister:
Indian Cabinet works under the leadership of the Prime Minister. According to Art. 74, there shall be a Council of Ministers with the Prime Minister at its head to aid and advise the President in the exercise of his functions. Ministers are appointed by the President on the advice of the Prime Minister. Portfolios are distributed by the Prime Minister and he has the power to change the portfolios of the ministers.

He presides over the meetings of the Cabinet. In case of disagreement between a minister and the Prime Minister, the minister will have to resign. No person can remain in the Cabinet against the wishes of the Prime Minister. The resignation of the Prime Minister means the resignation of the whole Council of Ministers.

7. Prime Minister’s right to get the Lok Sabha dissolved:
Another feature of the Indian Cabinet system is that the Prime Minister can advise the president to dissolve the Lok Sabha. On Feb. 6, 2004 the President Dr. A.P.J. Adbul Kalam dissolved the Lok Sabha on the advice of the Prime Minister Atal Behari Vajpayee.

8. Secrecy:
Cabinet keeps the proceedings of its meetings absolutely secret. No minister can convey to anybody the decisions taken by the ministry and the discussion which took place while taking the decisions. The decisions can be announced by the concerned minister at the proper time.

9. Ministerial Responsibility:
The ministers cannot exercise their powers in an arbitrary manner. They are responsible for their actions and policies to the legistature. The members of the Parliament can ask them questions and supplementary questions and they are to answer them on the floor of the House. In case, the Parliament loses confidence in the ministers, they will have to resign. The Parliament can indicate its lack of no-confidence over the ministry by passing a no-confidence resolution. Even if the Parliament passes a no-confidence motion against one minister the entire ministry is to resign.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 8.
How is the Prime Minister appointed? Discuss his powers and functions.
Or
Discuss the position of the Prime Minister.
Answer:
The Prime Minister is the most important and powerful functionary of the State. He can be called the ruler of the State. The Prime Minister is the head of the Council of Ministers and all the powers of the President are actually exercisd by the Prime Minister. He can rule the country in a way which he thinks the best. He is the architect of the fate of State. The Government can do nothing against his will.

Appointment:
The Prime Minister is appointed by the President but while doing so the President is not having a free hand. Only that person can be appointed to the office of Prime Minister who is the leader of majority party in the Lok Sabha. After the general election the President invites the leader of the party which has gained majority in the Lok Sabha to form the Government.

In Dec. 1984, Mr. Rajiv Gandhi was appointed Prime Minister because he was the leader of the majority party (Congress I) in the Lok Sabha. If no political party gets an absolute majority in the Lok Sabha even then the President is not free to appoint anybody the Prime Minister. Under such circumstances only that person will be invited to form the Government who can seek the co-operation of the majority of members in the Lok Sabha.

After the 17th Lok Sabha election held in April-May, 2019, Sh Narender Modi was appointed as the Prime Minister.
Term of Office. The Prime Minister does not have a fixed tenure of offfice. He remains in office so long as he enjoys the support of the majority party. If the majority of members of the Lok Sabha loses confidence in the Prime Minister, he is to resign the office. On 11th April, 1997 Prime Minister H.D. Deve Gowda resigned because his resolution of vote of confidence was rejected by the majority members of the Lok Sabha.

Salary and Allowances. The Prime Minister gets the same salary and allowances which are paid to members of Parliament. He also receives a constituency allowance like other M.Ps. He is also entitled to free official residence, free travels, medical facilities, etc.

Powers And Functions Of The Prime Minister:
The Prime Minister enjoys vast powers which have made his office very important and powerful. His powers and functions are given as follows:
1. Prime Minisiter and the Cabinet:
The Prime Minister is the maker of the Cabinet. The Cabinet has no existence without the Prime Minister. He can make or unmake a Cabinet. The Cabinet performs all its functions under the control and guidance of the Prime Minister. Therefore, he is called “the keystone of the Cabinet arch” or “shining moon among the stars”. He enjoys the following powers in connection with the Cabinet:

(i) Formation of the Council of Ministers:
His first duty after assuming office is the formation of the Council of Ministers. He prepares a list of ministers according to his sweet will. He has a free hand in the selection of ministers. Nobody can be appointed a minister against the wishes of the Prime Minister. Number of Council of Ministers depends upon him. In the Constitution, 91st Amendment Act provides that the total number of ministers including the Prime Minister, shall not exceed 15% of the total number of members of the Lok Sabha. In May 2019, there were 57 members in the Council of Ministers.

(ii) Distribution of Portfolios:
The Prime Minitser distributes work among the ministers. He decides what department is to be allotted to a particular . minister. He controls the working of the departments of his ministers. If the Prime Minister is not satisfied with the working of a department, he can change the department of that minister. He distributes particular departments to ministers in such a way that they can run the departments quite efficiently. He also co-ordinates the working of different departments.

(iii) Removal of the Minister:
The ministers remain in office during the pleasure of the Prime Minister. If the Prime Minister is not satisfied with the working of a minister or the minister does nto run the department in accordance with wishes of the Prime Minister, he can ask him to quit the office and can appoint someone else in his place. In June, 1978 Prime Minister Morarji Desai asked Home Minister Char an Singh and Mr. Raj Narayan to resign from the cabinet and Mr. Charan Singh and Raj Narayan submitted their resignations.

On 1st August, 1990 the Prime Minitser V.P. Singh sacked his Deputy Prime Minister, Mr. Devi Lai, from the Council of Ministers. On April 20, 1998 Prime Minister Vajpayee sacked Communication Minister Buta Singh because he refused to resign. The Prime Minister can make changes in the Cabinet whenever he likes. With the resignation of the Prime Minister the entire ministry falls.

(iv) Leadership of the Cabinet:
The Prime Minister is the leader of the Cabinet. The Cabinet functions under the conrol of the Prime Minister. He can call the meetings of Cabinet whenever he likes. The Prime Minister prepares the agenda of the meeting as well as controls it. He presides over the Cabinet meetings. All the decisions in Cabinet meetings are taken according to the wishes of the council of ministers.

2. Link between the President and the Cabinet:
The Prime Minister is the link between the President and the Cabinet. It is the duty of the Prime Minister to convey the decisions of the Cabinet to the President. No minister can discuss a particular problem with the President without the permission of the Prime Minister. The President can demand information from the Prime Minister regarding the working of administration. The Cabinet can discuss any issue with the President only through the Prime Minister.

3. Leadership of the Cabinet in the Parliament:
The Prime Minister leads the Cabinet in the Parliament. The ministers answer the questions put to them by the members of the Parliament. Whenever a minister is in difficulty, the Prime Minister helps him. The Prime Minster explains the policy and decisions of the Cabinet to the Parliament. All important statements on behalf of the Cabinet are made by the Prime Minister in the Parliament.

4. Principal adviser of the President:
The Prime Minister is the chief adviser of the President. The President seeks the advice of the Prime Minister in all matters of the state. The Prime Minister informs the President regarding all the decisions taken by the Cabinet. If the President requires any information regarding the administration of any department, he would demand such an information from the Prime Minister.

5. Appointments:
All the important appointments in the State are made.by the Prime Minister. The President makes appointments of the State Governors, Ambassadors and members of the Union Pubilc Service Cmmission only on the advice of the Prime Minister. The President cannot make any such appointment of his own accord.

6. Leader of the Parliament:
The Prime Minister is also the leader of the House. Out of the two Houses the position of Lok Sabha is of great importance and the Prime Minister is the leader of the Lok Sabha. The Parliament always depends upon the policy and guidance of the Prime Minister for facing any problem. All the important decisions in the Parliament are taken according to the wishes of the Prime Minister. He can get any law passed by the parliament because he is the leader of the majority party. He can get the Lok Sabha dissolved.

7. Leader of Nation:
The Prime Minister is also the leader of the nation. The President is the head of the State and the Prime Minister is the head of the Government. Gveneral election means the election of the Prime Minister. Each poiltical party has its leader already and the people vote for the party whose leader they want to see as the Prime Minister of the country. During emergency the people have always high hopes on the Prime Minister and they always act upon his advice. His office has become more important for his being the leader of the nation. He is always supported by public and with the help of the public he can do things which he likes.

Position of the Prime Minister:
An analysis of the powers of the Prime Minister proves that “he is the pivot of the whole system of government.” He occupies a position of exceptional authority. K.T. Shah observed in the Constituent Assembly, “This Constitution concentrates so much power and influence in the hands of the Prime Minister that there is every danger to apprehend that the Prime Minister may become a dictator if he chooses to do so.” N.V. Gadgil, former Governor of Punjab said, “The Prime Minister is invested with formidable power and influence unless he be a genuine democrat by nature, he is very likely to become a dictator.”

In the words of Nehru, ‘The Prime Minister is the linchpin of the government.” While the President is the nominal head, the Prime Minister is the real head. The powers of the President are in reality exercised by the Council of Ministers, But the Prime Minister is the head of the Council of Ministers. Without him, the ministers have no entity. To quote Laski, ‘The Prime Minister is central to the formation of the Council of Ministes, central to its birth and central to its death.” For his appointment, he is not dependent upon the favour of the President.

It is his right to form the Council of Ministers because he commands the confidence of the Lok Sabha. In the words of A.C. Dash, “The Indian Prime Minister like the German Chancellor is superior to the entire Cabinet, for under the Constitution he is declared to be the head of Council of Ministers and all other Ministers are appointed and probably will be dismissed on his advice.” The Prime Minister forms the Cabinet and he is its life breath.

He is the leader of the Parliament and the nation and the principal adviser of the President. The decisions of the Cabinet are virtually the decisions of the Prime Minister. There is hardly any elected functionary in the world comparable to the Prime Minister of India. Backed by a stable and substantial majority in the Lok Sabha, he is more powerful than even the President of the United States of America.

However, the Prime Minister’s supremacy is not due entirely to the powers which belong to his office. Much depends upon his personality. If he is a man of dynamic prsonality he will be able to dominate the political scene. A fickle minded person will never be able to impress. Ideally, the Prime Minister should have a personality which earns him not only the loyalty of his own party but also a measure of considerable respect from the opposition.

Mr. Nehru who held the office of the Prime Minister nearly eighteen years, possessed an unparalleld personality. He was an institution. In the words of Norman D. Palmer, “Important and able men have held ministerial posts but with the exception of Vallabhbhai Patel, who served as Deputy Prime Minister until his death in 1950, no one has really shared Nehru’s authority.” Prime Minister Lai Bahadur Shastri gave his country brilliant leadership in terms of war and peace and gave up his life in quest for peace. He served his country with his life.

He did not possess the external symbols of greatness yet he rose to great heights. Though short in stature there was more iron in his soul than appeared on the surface. The manner in which Morarji Desai was relieved of the Finance Department by Prime Minister Indira Gandhi, highlights the fact that not even the ‘tallest’ among the Prime Minister’s colleagues can measure upto the stature of the Prime Minister. After the election of 1971 and 1980, Prime Minister Indira Gandhi was considered the source of all power. According to Ashok Mehta, “Our Cabinet form of Government has come to a near Presidential regime.”

According to Frank Morris, “Mrs. Gandhi was not only the undisputed leader of the Congress Party, but it was her party and she could dominate it in a way which none else had done. She was free to choose her colleagues who were her agents or assistants and in her presence trembled and obeyed.” In the words of Greame C. Moodie, “For many the Prime Minister is the part of the government and at times, may become the personification of the political nation.” Mr. Rajiv Gandhi was very powerful because like Mrs. Indira Gandhi he was also the president of the Congress (I).

The position of the Prime Minister also depends upon the support of his party. Without his party he is nothing. He must maintain close contact with party opinion. His aloofness, reserve and indifference militates against sound leadership. He must rely on co-operation, not coercion. He is to lead the party and not drive it. The manner in which Pt. Nehru had to bow before the party demand on the removal of Mr. Krishna Menon in 1962 proves that there are limits beyond which the Prime Minister cannot carry the party.

To conclude, powerful as he may be, no particular Prime Minister is indispensable, irremovable, or omnipotent. “He is not Caesar, he is not an unchangeable oracle, his views are not dooms; he is always on suffrance and its germs are whether he can render indubitably useful services. At any time a rival may supplant him.” The essence of the powers of the Prime Minister lies in a united Cabinet, a united Parliament and united people.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Short Answer Type Questions 

Question 1.
How is the President of India elected?
Answer:
The President is the head of the state. He is elected indirectly by an electoral college. Elected members of both the Houses of Parliament and elected members of legislative assemblies of the States constitute the electoral college. The nominated members of the Parliament and the assemblies do not take part in the election. The voting is held on’ the basis of proportional representation by the single transferable vote system. Only an Indian citizen, who has attained the age of 35 years, and whose name has been proposed and seconded by a definite number of the electors, can contest election.

Question 2.
Explain in brief the composition of the Electoral College constituted for the election of the President.
Answer:
According to Article 54 of Indian Constitution, the President shall be elected indirectly by an electoral college consisting of the elected members of the union and state legislatures in accordance with the principle of proportional representation with single transferable vote system.

Question 3.
Describe the formula by which the value of the vote of the members of State Legislative Assembly is determined.
Answer:
Article 55 (4) of the Constitution lays down the procedure of determining the votes of the members of the State Assembly, which is as follows:
PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister 7
If the remainder is less than 500, it is ignored.
If it is more than 500, then the vote of each member shall be further increased by one.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 4.
Describe the procedure of determining the value of votes of the members of the Parliament.
Answer:
The constitution lays down the following procedure of determining the votes of the members of Parliament.
PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister 8
Fraction exceeding one-half being counted as one.

Question 5.
Describe the tenure of the President.
Or
Discuss in brief the removal of the President.
Answer:
The President is elected for a period of five years. But he can be removed from his office before the expiry date. The President can be removed from office by impeachment only. The Constitution lays down a detailed procedure for the impeachment of the President. He can be impeached “for violation of the Constitution.” When a President is to be impeached for the violation of the Constitution, the charges can be prepared by either House of the Parliament.

But no such charge is to be preferred unless the proposal to prefer such a charge is contained in a resolution which has been moved after at least 14 days notice in writing signed by not less than one-fourth of the total number of members of the House. The resolution must be passed by a two-thirds majority of the total number of members of the House. If passed by the requisite majority in one house, it is sent to the other House for investigation. If the other House also passes the resolution by a two- thirds majority of the total membership of this House, then it means the charge is proved and the President is removed from his office.

Question 6.
Describe the method of fixing the quota for the election of the President.
Answer:
Under the system of Proportional Representation, a candidate to be elected must secure the necessary quota of votes. The quota is determined by the following formula:
PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister 9
Suppose the total number of valid votes polled at the Presidential election is 8,00,000. Applying the above-mentioned formula, the quota shall be
\(\frac {8,00,000}{1+1}\) +1 = 4,00,001

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 7.
Describe the salary and allowances of the President.
Answer:
The President of India gets a salary of Rs. 5,00,000 per month and an official residence (called Rashtrapati Bhavan in New Delhi) free of rent. In addition to the salary, the President also gets handsome allowances of various kinds as determined by Parliament. According to the President’s Pension Act, a person who ceases to hold office as President, either by expiration of his term of office or by resignation, is entitled to a monthly pension of Rs. 2,50,000. The Government may also allow him a free medical aid as was done in the case of Dr. Rajendra Prasad.

The salary and other allowances of the President are charged on the Consolidated Fund of India. According to Art. 59 (4), the emoluments and allowances of the President shall not be diminished during his term of office.

Question 8.
Describe any four executive powers of the President.
Answer:
Following are the executive powers of the President:

  1. All executive functions of the Union (central) government are performed in the name of the President.
  2. He appoints the Governors, Chief Justice and other judges of the Supreme Court and the High Courts.
  3. He appoints the Attorney General of India and the members and Chairman of the Union Public Service Commission.
  4. He is the supreme commander of the armed forces.

Question 9.
Mention four legislative powers of the President.
Answer:
Following are the legislative powers of the President:

  1. He can address both the Houses of the Parliament and can send messages to either house at any time.
  2. He can summon any House of the Parliament at any time.
  3. He can dissolve the Lok Sabha.
  4. He nominates two members of the Anglo-Indian community to the Lok Sabha.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 10.
Describe financial powers of the President.
Answer:

  1. It is the duty of the President to place the Budget for the current year before the Parliament. It is to be presented before the beginning of the financial year. Normally the budget is presented to the Parliament by the
  2. Finance Minister on behalf of the President.
  3. Money Bill can only be introduced in the Parliament on the recommendation of the President.
  4. The President has full control over the contingency fund and he can spend it according to his sweet will. He distributes the share of income tax among the States.

Question 11.
Describe judicial powers of the President.
Answer:
The President has some judicial powers also. It is provided by Article 122 of the Constitution.

  • The President appoints the judges and the chief justices to the Supreme Court and the State High Courts.
  • The President cannot be sued in any court of India in connection with any matter concerning his office.
  • He has power to pardon, reprieve and commute punishment.
  • The President can seek the advice of the supreme court of India over any legal matter or a bill of Republic Importance.

Question 12.
What do you know about the emergency powers of the President?
Ans.
The President can declare emergency in three special circumstances :
1. If the President thinks that the security of the country is threatened by a war or external aggression or armed rebellion threatening the integrity of India, he can declare an emergency for the whole of India or any part of it. But the advice should come from the Council of Ministers in writing.

2. In case of the failure of the constitutional machinery in a state or states, the President can take over the entire work of the executive and dissolve or suspend the state assembly.

3. If the President thinks that there is an economic situation in which the financial stability or the credit of India is threatened, he can declare a financial emergency.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 13.
Discuss about the power of the President to issue an ordinance.
Answer:
During the intervals of the sessions of the Parliament he can issue ordinance. These ordinances have the force of laws. The ordinance is put before the Parliament as soon as it meets. The Parliament has the authority to reject the ordinance. It can be withdrawn by the President also. If it is neither rejected by the Parliament nor withdrawn by the President, it will automatically end six weeks after the first meeting of the Parliament.

Question 14.
Discuss in brief about various emergencies provided in the Constitution of India.
Answer:
There are three types of emergencies provided into the Constitution of India. These are:

  • National Emergency (Article 352) or Emergency arising out of external aggression or armed rebellion.
  • Emergency arising out of the failure of constitutional machinery in a state (Art. 356).
  • Financial Emergency (Art. 360).

Question 15.
What do you understand by National Emergency?
Answer:
According to Art. 352, if the President is satisfied that a grave emergency exists whereby the security of India or any part of India is threatened by war, external aggression or armed rebellion, he may proclaim a state of emergency. But the President can declare such type of emergency if the cabinet decision that such a proclamation may be made has been communicated to him in writing.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 16.
Under which condition the Constitutional Emergency is imposed?
Answer:
According to article 356, if the President, either on the receipt of a report from the Governor of a State or otherwise, is satisfied that a situation has arisen in which the Government of the State cannot be carried on in accordance with the provisions of the Constitution, the President can proclaim emergency in that state.

Question 17.
What is the Financial Emergency?
Answer:
According to Article 360, if the President is satisfied that a situation has arisen whereby the financial stability or credit of India or any part of it is threatened, he may declare a Financial Emergency under Article 360 of the constitution. Such a Proclamation may be revoked by a subsequent Proclamation. The Proclamation has to be laid before each House of-Parliament.

It ceases to operate at the expiration of two months unless it is approved earlier by a resolution of both the Houses of Parliament. The Proclamation in this cases should also be approved by Parliament as in the other two cases of emergency. Like the Proclamation of war-emergency, Financial Emergency also continues for an indefinite period. Fortunately, this kind of Emergency has not been declared, so far.

Question 18.
Describe any four points of criticism against the emergency powers of the President.
Answer:
Different persons criticised the emergency powers of the President on different grounds. Following are the points of criticisms against the emergency powers of the President:’

  • Possibility of misuse of emergency powers.
  • Emergency powers are undemocratic.
  • Emergency proclamation is beyond judicial control.
  • Emergency powers can crush the rights and liberties of the individuals.

Question 19.
Describe the justification of emergency powers.
Answer:

  • Historical experiences reveal that emergency powers are necessary to face national crisis.
  • National security is more important than that of the individual liberty.
  • It is the responsibility of the centre to maintain the unity and integrity of the nation.
  • President is a constitutional head.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 20.
Is it possible for the President of India to be a dictator?
Answer:
Emergency powers of the President indicate that he can be a dictator. But it is not possible for the President to become a dictator because:

  1. In India there exists a Parliamentary form of Government. In this system the President is a constitutional head and his role is nominal.
  2. According to 44th Amendment an Emergency can be proclaimed only on the basis of written advice tendered by the cabinet and the advice of the council of ministers is binding on the President.
  3. If President tries to misuse his powers, he can be removed by impeachment.
  4. President’s rule can’t be imposed at the Centre level.

Question 21.
Describe the election method of the Vice-President of India.
Answer:
The Vice-President of India is elected by an electoral college consisting of the members of both Houses of Parliament in accordance with the system of proportional representation by means of the single transferable vote and the voting at such election shall be by secret ballot. The two Houses need not sit together for this purpose.

It is significant to note that in the election of the Vice-President the nominated members of both the Houses have the right to vote while in the election of the President only the elected members of Parliament are eligible to vote.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 22.
Describe in brief the functions of the Vice-President.
Answer:
The duties of the Vice-President are two-fold:1. He is the ex-officio Chairman of the Rajya Sabha and 2. he acts for the President when the office of the President is vacant. Even when the President is ill or otherwise unable to perform the duties of his office, the Vice-President acts for him.

As Vice-President. In the absence of the President or during casual vacancy in the office of the President, the Vice-President shall perform all the functions of the President. If the President is unable to discharge his functions owing to absence, illness or any other cause, the Vice-President will discharge his functions until the date on which the President resumes his duties.

As Chairman of Rajya Sabha. The Vice-president is the ex-officio Chairman of Rajya Sabha, that means that by being the Vice-President of the country, he is the Chairman of the Rajya Sabha. He is to perform various functions in his capacity as the Chairman of the Rajya Sabha and they are given as follows:

  • He presides over the meetings of the Rajya Sabha.
  • He maintains decorum and decency in the House.
  • He allots time to the members to speak.

Question 23.
Describe any four qualifications to become a member of Union Council of Ministers.
Answer:

  • He must be a citizen of India.
  • He must not hold any office of profit under the Government of India or the Government of any State.
  • He must possess such other qualifications as may be prescribed by the Parliament.
  • No person can be a member of both Houses of Parliament. In case he becomes, he must vacate one of the two seats. Likewise, one person cannot be a member of a House of Parliament and of a State Legislature simultaneously.

Question 24.
How is the Council of Ministers at the centre formed?
Answer:
After the general elections the various parties in the Parliament elect their leaders. The President invites the leader of the majority party and appoints him the Prime Minister. The Prime Minister selects other ministers and sends their names to the President. The President appoints them as ministers. He cannot make any change in the list given to him by the Prime Minister. It might happen that no party has a majority in the Lok Sabha. In such a situation the President invites the leader of the coalition of many parties and appoints him Prime Minister.

The Prime Minister and other ministers have to take oath of loyalty to the Constitution before they assume office.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 25.
Give four features of the Cabinet System in India.
Ans.
1. Nominal Head of the State:
The first important feature of the Cabinet system in India is that the President enjoys only nominal powers. The President is a constitutional head of the State.

2. Close Relations Between the Executive and the Legislature:
There is a close relationship between the Cabinet and the Parliament. All the ministers are members of one or the other house of Parliament. They attend the meetings of Parliament, participate in debates and move the bills in the Parliament.

3. Leadership of the Prime Minister:
The Cabinet works under the control and guidance of the Prime Minister. He is the head of the Council of Ministers. He presides over the meetings of the Cabinet and determines the agenda of the meetings.

4. Collective Responsibility:
The Indian Cabinet is responsible to the Lok Sabha. It remains in office so long as it enjoys the confidence of the Lok Sabha. The moment it loses the majority of the members in the house, it has to quit office.

Question 26.
Distinguish between the Cabinet and the Council of Ministers.
Ans.

  1. In the Constitution the words ‘Council of Ministers’ are used and not the word ‘Cabinet’.
  2. The Cabinet is a part of the Council of Ministers. The Council of Ministers consist of all types of ministers. Their number is about 70. But the cabinet consists of only the cabinet ministers. The cabinet consists of about 25 members.
  3. Cabinet is more important than the Council of Ministers. All decisions of the cabinet are to be carried out by the members of the Council of Ministers.
  4. The cabinet ministers get higher salaries than other ministers.

Question 27.
Discuss various types of Ministers in Union Council of Ministers.
Answer:
The Council of Ministers consists of all the ministers. There are four categories of ministers in-India :
1. Cabinet Ministers:
These are the most important ministers. They control the important departments of administration. They frame policies and decide all other important matters. They are generally 20 to 25 in number. It is these ministers who form the Cabinet. All the powers of the Council of Ministers are exercised according to the wishes of the Cabinet.

2. State Ministers:
The state ministers are also head of some departments. But they are not entitled to participate in the meetings of the Cabinet. They can be invited to attend the meetings of the Cabinet when some special issue or the issue concerning their departments is to be discussed.

3. Deputy Ministers:
The Deputy Ministers are appointed to assist the Cabinet ministers and the State ministers in the performance of their functions. A Deputy Minister is not the head of any department. The Deputy Ministers are appointed almost in each department.

4. Parliament Secretaries: Parliament Secretaries are appointed to assist the ministers in the Parliament. They are not the ministers.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 28.
Discuss any four functions of Council of Ministers.
Ans.
1. Determination of National Policy:
The policy of the Nation is formulated by the Cabinet. After taking office, the Cabinet is to formulate its internal and external policy according to which it is to run the administration of the State.

2. Control over Administration:
The administration of the country is to be run by the ministers. Every member of the Council of Ministers has one or more departments under his charge and he has to look after its working and administration.

3. Foreign Relations:
It is the function of the Cabinet to maintain relations with other countries. These relations are established according to the policies laid down by the Cabinet.

4. Cabinet give a decision in administrative matters.

Question 29.
How is the Prime Minister of India appointed?
Answer:
The President appoints the Prime Minister. He invites the leader of the majority party in the Lok Sabha and appoints him the Prime Minister. If no single party has a majority, many parties may form a coalition to make a majority and elect a leader. Then the leader of the coalition will be appointed as the Prime Minister. After 17th Lok Sabha election in April-May 2019, President appointed Sh. Narender Modi, leader of the National Democratic Alliance as Prime Minister.

Question 30.
What are the functions of Prime Minister?
Answer:
The Prime Minister enjoys vast powers which have made his office very important and powerful. His powers and functions are as ahead:

  1. The first function of the Prime Minister is the formation of Council of Ministers. He has a free hand in the selection of ministers. Number of Council of Ministers depends upon him.
  2. The Prime Minister distributes portfolios among the ministers.
  3. The ministers remain in office during the pleasure of the Prime Minister. The Prime Minister can make changes in the Council of Ministers whenever he likes.
  4. Prime Minister is the leader of the Cabinet. The Cabinet functions under the control of the Prime Minister.

Question 31.
Write down the names of present President, Vice-President and Prime Minister of India.
Answer:
Name of Post – Name of Person

  • President – Sh. Ram Nath Kovind
  • Vice President – Sh. Venkaiah Naidu
  • Prime Minister – Sh. Narendra Modi

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 32.
Write down the salary of President and Vice-President.
Answer:
Name of Post – Salary (Monthly)

  • President – Rs. 5,00,000
  • Vice-President – Rs. 4,00,000

Very Short Type Questions

Question 1.
How is the President of India elected?
Answer:
The President is elected indirectly by an electoral college. Elected members of both the Houses of Parliament and elected members of legislative assemblies of the States constitute the electoral college. The voting is held on the basis of proportional representation by the single transferable vote system.

Question 2.
Describe the tenure of the President.
Answer:
The President is elected for a period of five years. But he can be removed from his office before the expiry date. The President can be removed from office by impeachment only. The Constitution lays down a detailed procedure for the impeachment of the President. He can be impeached “for violation of the Constitution.”

Question 3.
Describe the salary and allowances of the President.
Answer:
The President of India gets a salary of Rs. 5,00,000 per month. According to the President’s Pension Act, a person who ceases to hold office as President, either by expiration of his term of office or by resignation, is entitled to a monthly pension of Rs. 2,50,000.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 4.
Write any two privileges of the President.
Answer:

  • The President of India is not answerable to any court for the exercise of his constitutional rights and powers.
  • No criminal proceeding can be launched against him during his term.

Question 5.
Describe any two executive powers of the President.
Answer:
Following are the executive powers of the President:

  • All executive functions of the Union (central) government are performed in the name of the President.
  • He appoints the Governors, Chief Justice and other judges of the Supreme Court and the High Courts.

Question 6.
Mention two legislative powers of the President.
Answer:
Following are the legislative powers of the President:

  • He can address both the Houses of the Parliament and can send messages to either house at any time.
  • He can summon any House of the Parliament at any time.

Question 7.
Explain financial powers of the President.
Answer:

  • It is the duty of the President to place the Budget for the current year before the Parliament. It is to be presented before the beginning of the financial year. Normally the budget is presented to the Parliament by the
  • Finance Minister on behalf of the President.
  • Money Bill can only be introduced in the Parliament on the recommendation of the President.

Question 8.
Describe judicial powers of the President.
Answer:
The President has some judicial powers also. It is provided by Article 122 of the Constitution.

  • The President appoints the judges and . the chief justices to the Supreme Court and the State High Courts.
  • The President cannot be sued in any court of India in connection with any matter concerning his office.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 9.
Discuss in brief about various emergencies provided in the Constitution of India.
Answer:
There are three types of emergencies provided into the Constitution of India. These are:

  • National Emergency (Article 352) or Emergency arising out of external aggression or armed rebellion.
  • Emergency arising out of the failure of constitutional machinery in a state (Art. 356).
  • Financial Emergency (Art. 360).

Question 10.
What do you understand by National Emergency?
Answer:
According to Art. 352, if the President is satisfied that a grave emergency exists whereby the security of India or any part of India is threatened by war, external aggression or armed rebellion, he may proclaim a state of emergency.

Question 11.
Under which condition the Constitutional Emergency is imposed?
Answer:
According to article 356, if the President, either on the receipt of a report from the Governor of a State or otherwise, is satisfied that a situation has arisen in which the Government of the State cannot b,e carried on in accordance with the provisions of the Constitution, the President can proclaim emergency in that state.

Question 12.
What is the Financial Emergency?
Answer:
According to Article 360, if the President is satisfied that a situation has arisen whereby the financial stability or credit of India or any part of it is threatened, he may declare a Financial Emergency under Article 360 of the constitution. Such a Proclamation may be revoked by a subsequent Proclamation.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 13.
Explain any two points of criticism against the emergency powers of the President.
Answer:
Different persons criticised the emergency powers of the President on different grounds. Following are the points of criticisms against the emergency powers of the President:

  • Possibility of misuse of emergency powers.
  • Emergency powers are undemocratic.

Question 14.
Describe the justification of emergency powers.
Answer:

  • Historical experiences reveal that emergency powers are necessary to face national crisis.
  • National security is more important than that of the individual liberty.

Question 15.
Is it possible for the President of India to be a dictator?
Answer:
It is not possible for the President to become a dictator because:

  1. In India there exists a Parliamentary form of Government. In this system the President is a constitutional head and his role is nominal.
  2. According to 44th Amendment an Emergency can be proclaimed only on the basis of written advice tendered by the cabinet and the advice of the council of ministers is binding on the President.

Question 16.
Describe the election method of the Vice-President of India.
Answer:
The Vice-President of India is elected by an electoral college consisting of the members of both Houses of Parliament in accordance with the system of proportional representation by means of the single transferable vote and the voting at such election shall be by secret ballot. The two Houses need not sit together for this purpose.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 17.
Describe the term of the Vice-President.
Answer:
The Vice-President is elected for a term of five years. The period of five years starts from the date on which he enters his office. He is eligible for re-election. The Vice¬President may resign his office by writing to the President before the expiry of five years. Vice-President can be removed from office by impeachment.

Question 18.
Describe about the salary of the Vice-President.
Answer:
The Vice-President is the ex-officio Chairman of the Rajya Sabha and he receives a salary of Rs. 4,00,000 per month. When the Vice-President acts as President, he has all the privileges, powers and immunities of the President. After retirement Vice-President is entitled to a monthly pension of Rs. 2,00,000.

Question 19.
Describe in brief the functions of the Vice-President.
Answer:
The duties of the Vice-President are two-fold:

  1. He is the ex-officio Chairman of the Rajya Sabha and
  2. he acts for the President when the office of the President is vacant. Even when the President is ill or otherwise unable to perform the duties of his office, the Vice-President acts for him.

Question 20.
Discuss any two qualifications to become a member of Union Council of Ministers.
Answer:

  • He must be a citizen of India.
  • He must not hold any office of profit under the Government of India or the Government of any State.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 21.
How is the Council of Ministers at the centre formed?
Answer:
After the general elections the various parties in the Parliament elect their leaders. The President invites the leader of the majority party and appoints him the Prime Minister. The Prime Minister selects other ministers and sends their names to the President. The President appoints them as ministers.

Question 22.
Give two features of the Cabinet System in India.
Answer:

  1. Nominal Head of the State: The first important feature of the Cabinet system in India is that the President enjoys only nominal powers. The President is a constitutional head of the State.
  2. Close Relations Between the Executive and the Legislature: There is a close relationship between the Cabinet and the Parliament.

Question 23.
Distinguish between the Cabinet and the Council of Ministers.
Answer:

  • In the Constitution the words ‘Council of Ministers’ are used and not the word ‘Cabinet’.
  • The Cabinet is a part of the Council of Ministers. The Council of Ministers consist of all types of ministers. Their number is about 70. But the cabinet consists of only the cabinet ministers. The cabinet consists of about 25 members.

Question 24.
Mention any two functions of Council of Ministers.
Answer:

  1. Determination of National Policy: The pohcy of the Nation is formulated by the Cabinet. After taking office, the Cabinet is to formulate its internal and external pohcy according to which it is to run the administration of the State.
  2. Control over Administration: The administration of the country is to be run by the ministers. Every member of the Council of Ministers has one or more departments under his charge and he has to look after its working and administration.

Question 25.
How is the Prime Minister of India appointed?
Answer:
The President appoints the Prime Minister. He invites the leader of the majority party in the Lok Sabha and appoints him the Prime Minister. If no single party has a majority, many parties may form a coalition to make a majority and elect a leader. Then the leader of the coalition will be appointed as the Prime Minister.

Question 26.
What are the functions of Prime Minister?
Answer:
The Prime Minister enjoys vast powers which have made his office very important and powerful. His powers and functions are as follows:

  • The first function of the Prime Minister is the formation of Council of Ministers. He has a free hand in the selection of ministers. Number of Council of Ministers depends upon him.
  • The Prime Minister distributes portfolios among the ministers.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

One Word to One Sentence Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What is the term of the Prime Minister?
Answer:
The Prime Minister does not have a fixed tenure of office. He remains in office so long as he enjoys .the support of the majority party.

Question 2.
Mention any one power of the Prime Minister.
Answer:
The first and significant duty o$ the Prime Minister is the formation of the Council of Ministers.

Question 3.
Who is the leader of the Cabinet?
Answer:
The Prime Minister is the leader of the Cabinet.

Question 4.
Who was the first Prime Minister of India?
Answer:
Pt. Jawahar Lal Nehru was the first Prime Minister of India.

Question 5.
Who is the link between the Council of Ministers and the President? Answer:The Prime Minister is the link between the Council of Ministers and the President.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Fill in the blanks

1. The …………… of India is head of the state.
Answer:
President

2. Minimum age needed for the President is …………… .
Answer:
35 years

3. The term of office of the Indian President is …………… .
Answer:
Five years

4. Sh …………… appointed Prime Minister after 17th Lok Sabha.
Answer:
Narendra Modi.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

True or False statement

1. President is the head of the state.
Answer:
True.

2. Prime Minister is the head of the state.
Answer:
False

3. The tenure of the Cabinet is 10 years.
Answer:
False

4. Prime Minister form the Council of Minsters.
Answer:
True.

5. Prime Minister is the Chief Co-ordinator in the Cabinet.
Answer:
True.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Choose The Correct Answer

Question 1.
Who will administer the oath of office to the person who is to take over as President?
(A) Chief Justice of High Court
(B) Vice-President
(C) Chief Justice of India
(D) Speaker.
Answer:
(C) Chief Justice of India

Question 2.
The Cabinet is responsible to the
(A) Prime Minister
(B) President
(C) Parliament
(D) Speaker.
Answer:
(C) Parliament

Question 3.
The Prime Minister is appointed by the:
(A) President
(B) Parliament
(C) Cabinet
(D) Supreme Court.
Answer:
(A) President

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 4.
The President of India is elected by:
(A) The Parliament
(B) The Assemblies
(C) The People
(D) The Electoral College.
Answer:
(D) The Electoral College.

Question 5.
The term of office of the Indian President is:
(A) 3 years
(B) 5 years
(C) 2 years
(D) 4 years.
Answer:
(B) 5 years

Question 6.
Minimum age needed for president is:
(A) 25 years
(B) 30 years
(C) 21 years
(D) 35 years.
Answer:
(D) 35 years.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 7.
The tenure of the Prime Minister is:
(A) 5 yeafrs
(B) 6 years
(C) 4 years
(D) Not fixed.
Answer:
(D) Not fixed.

Question 8.
The Prime Minister presides over:
(A) Lok Sabha
(B) Rajya Sabha
(C) Cabinet
(D) Parliament.
Answer:
(C) Cabinet

 

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 9 पथ की पहचान

Punjab State Board PSEB 8th Class Hindi Book Solutions Chapter 9 पथ की पहचान Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 8 Hindi Chapter 9 पथ की पहचान

Hindi Guide for Class 8 PSEB पथ की पहचान Textbook Questions and Answers

(क) भाषा – बोध

I. शब्दार्थ-देखिए सप्रंसग व्याख्या में।

बटोही = मुसाफिर।
बाट = रास्ता।
अनगिनत = जिनकी गिनती न की जा सके, असंख्य।
निशानी = चिह्न।
मूक = खामोशी।
पंथी = मुसाफिर।
पंथ = मार्ग।
व्यर्थ = बेकार ।
असम्भव = नामुमकिन।
पथ = रास्ता।
पग = पैर।
अवधान = मन लगाना।
सरित् = नदी।
गिरि = पहाड़।
गह्वर = गड्ढा, खाई।
सुमन = फूल।
कंटकों = कांटों।
शर = तीर।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 9 पथ की पहचान

II. इन शब्दों/मुहावरों के अर्थ बताकर वाक्यों में प्रयोग करेंपथ, सुमन, अनगिनत, सहसा, बटोही, पैरों की निशानी छोड़ना, मन में बिठाना।

उत्तर:
पथ = मार्ग-व्यक्ति को. महापुरुषों के बताए हुए पथ का अनुसरण करना चाहिए।
सुमन = फूल-वाटिका में खिले हुए सुमन सबको अपनी ओर आकर्षित करते हैं। – अनगिनत = असंख्य, जिनकी गणना न हो सके-अनगिनत कीड़े-मकोड़े खेत पर मंडरा रहे हैं।
सहसा = अचानक-सीढ़ियों से सहसा पाँव फिसलने से मोहन को गम्भीर चोट लगी। बटोही = यात्री, मुसाफिर-थके-हारे बटोही ने वट-वृक्ष के नीचे आराम किया।
पैरों की निशानी छोड़ना = संकेत छोड़ना-श्रीकृष्ण ने गीता में पैरों की निशानी छोड़कर ही हमें कर्म का पाठ पढ़ाया है।
मन में बिठाना = याद रखना-अरे राघव, मन में बिठा लो कि तुम्हें कल तक वापस लौटना ही है।

(ख) विषय – बोध

प्रश्न 1.
कवि ने कविता में किस पथ की पहचान कर लेने का भाव प्रस्तुत किया
उत्तर:
कवि ने कविता में व्यक्ति को जीवन-पथ की पहचान कर लेने का भाव प्रस्तुत किया है।

प्रश्न 2.
‘अनगिनत राहियों’ से कवि ने किस ओर जाने का संकेत दिया है ?
उत्तर:
व्यक्ति के जीवन पथ में अनेक साथी मिलते हैं, परन्तु जो अपने पाँव के निशान छोड़ गए हैं, उन पर ही आगे बढ़ना चाहिए।

प्रश्न 3.
राही पथ पर अपनी निशानी कैसे छोड़ जाते हैं ?
उत्तर:
अपने अच्छे कारनामों से यात्री पथ पर अपनी निशानियाँ छोड़ जाते हैं, जो सबके लिए अनुकरणीय होती हैं।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 9 पथ की पहचान

प्रश्न 4.
सफल यात्री राह पर कैसे बढ़ता है ?
उत्तर:
सफल यात्री मार्ग की विघ्न-बाधाओं की परवाह किये बिना आगे बढ़ता है। वह अपने मार्ग को पूरी तरह पहचान कर लेता है।

प्रश्न 5.
राही को कब नहीं रुकना चाहिए ?
उत्तर:
साथियों के छोड़ जाने पर और बाधाएं आने पर भी राही को नहीं रुकना चाहिए।

प्रश्न 6.
इन पंक्तियों की व्याख्या करो-
है अनिश्चित किस जगह पर सरित, गिरि, गह्वर मिलेंगे,
है अनिश्चित किस जगह पर बाग़-वन सुन्दर मिलेंगे।
उत्तर:
हे यात्री ! यह पहले से निश्चित नहीं है कि जीवन-पथ पर कहाँ नदी, पर्वत और खाई मिलेंगे, किस समय कौन-सी कठिनाई का सामना करना पड़े, इस विषय में पहले से कोई अनुमान लगाना सम्भव नहीं। किस मार्ग पर सुन्दर बाग और वन मिलेंगे अर्थात् किस समय सुख का अनुभव होगा, इस विषय में भी पहले से कुछ नहीं कहा जा सकता। किस स्थान पर जीवन-यात्रा समाप्त हो जाएगी, यह भी पहले से नहीं जाना जा सकता। यह भी निश्चित नहीं कि कब सुख रूपी फूल और कब तीव्र चुभन पैदा करने वाले दुःख रूपी कांटे मिलेंगे। इस जीवन-पथ पर बढ़ते हुए कौन-से साथी अलग हो जाएंगे और कौन-से नए आ मिलेंगे यह भी पहले से जानना सम्भव नहीं। बस तू केवल इतना फैसला कर ले कि तुम्हारे मार्ग में भले ही कुछ आ जाए पर तू अपने पथ पर रुकेगा नहीं, अपितु निरन्तर आगे बढ़ता जाएगा। अतः हे पथिक ! तू चलने से पूर्व अपने मार्ग की पहचान कर ले। भाव है कि जीवन-पथ के यात्री के लिए यह अनिश्चित होता है कि उसे कहाँ सुख मिलेंगे और कहाँ दुःख।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 9 पथ की पहचान

(ग) व्यावहारिक व्याकरण

I. इन शब्दों के दो-दो पर्यायवाची शब्द लिखें

आँख – ……………….
पहाड़ – ……………….
नदी – ………………..
मुसाफिर – ………..
वन – ……………….
उत्तर:
आँख – नेत्र, नयन।
पहाड़ – पर्वत, गिरि।
नदी – सरिता, तटिनी।
मुसाफिर – यात्री, बटोही।
वन – अरण्य, कानन।

II. इन शब्दों के आगे ‘अ’ लगाकर विलोम शब्द बनाएँ

ज्ञात – ……………..
निश्चित – ……………..
सम्भव – ……………..
सफल – ……………..
सत्य – ……………..
उत्तर:
ज्ञात – अज्ञात।
निश्चित-अनिश्चित।
सम्भव – असम्भव।
सफल – असफल।
सत्य – असत्य।

III. अनेक शब्दों के लिए एक शब्द लिखें

(1) जो गिना न जा सके
(2) जो निश्चित न हो
(3) पथ पर चलने वाला।
उत्तर:
(1) अनगिनत
(2) अनिश्चित
(3) पथिक।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 9 पथ की पहचान

IV. ‘अनगिनत’, ‘अनुमान’ शब्द में ‘अन’ और ‘अनु’ उपसर्ग हैंइसी प्रकार ‘अन’ और ‘अनु’ उपसर्ग लगाकर नये शब्द बनाएँ

अन + होनी =………….
अन + जान =…………..
अन + मोल =………….
अन + अन्य =…………..
अनु + सार =………….
अनु + शासन =………….
अनु + मति =………….
अनु + करण। = ……….
उत्तर:
अन + होनी = अनहोनी
अन + जान = अनजान
अन + मोल = अनमोल
अन + अन्य = अनन्य
अनु + सार = अनुसार
अनु + शासन = अनुशासन
अनु + मति = अनुमति
अनु + करण = अनुकरण।

(घ) रचना बोध

प्रश्न 1.
कविता के आधार पर सभी विद्यार्थी जीवन का लक्ष्य’ विषय पर निबन्ध करें।
उत्तर:
‘जीवन का लक्ष्य’ निबन्ध के लिए विद्यार्थी व्याकरण के निबन्ध भाग में देखें।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Guide पथ की पहचान Important Questions and Answers

बहुविकल्पीय प्रश्न निम्नलिखित प्रश्नों के उत्तर सही विकल्प चुनकर लिखें

प्रश्न 1.
चलने से पहले बटोही को किसकी पहचान करनी चाहिए ?
(क) साथी की
(ख) बाट की
(ग) बाहर की
(घ) वातावरण की।
उत्तर:
बाट की।

प्रश्न 2.
कवि किस पथ की पहचान की बात कर रहा है ?
(क) घर के
(ख) वन के
(ग) जीवन के
(घ) समाज के।
उत्तर:
जीवन के।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 9 पथ की पहचान

प्रश्न 3.
राही पथ पर अपने निशान कैसे छोड़ जाते हैं ?
(क) निशान लगाकर
(ख) धर्मशाला बनाकर
(ग) पक्का रास्ता बनाकर
(घ) अच्छे कार्य करने से।
उत्तर:
अच्छे कार्य करने से।

प्रश्न 4.
सफल यात्री किसकी चिंता नहीं करता ?
(क) साथी की
(ख) रास्ते की
(ग) वस्त्रों की
(घ) विघ्न बाधाओं की
उत्तर:
विघ्न बाधाओं की।

प्रश्न 5.
राही की आन क्या है ?
(क) सड़कें बनाना
(ख) साथी के साथ रहना
(ग) किसी की चिंता नहीं करना
(घ) सदा चलते रहना।
उत्तर:
सदा चलते रहना।

पथ की पहचान Summary

सप्रसंग व्याख्या

1. पूर्व चलने के बटोही, बाट की पहचान कर ले।
पुस्तकों में है नहीं, छापी गई इसकी कहानी,
हाल इसका ज्ञात होता है न औरों की जबानी,
अनगिनत राही गये इस राह से, उनका पता क्या,
पर गए कुछ लोग इस पर छोड़ पैरों की निशानी,
यह निशानी मूक होकर भी बहुत कुछ बोलती है,
खोल इसका अर्थ पंथी, पंथ का अनुमान कर ले,
पूर्व चलने के बटोही, बाट की पहचान कर ले।

शब्दार्थ:
बटोही = मुसाफिर। बाट = रास्ता। अनगिनत = जिनकी गिनती न की जा सके, असंख्य। निशानी = चिह्न। मूक = खामोशी। पंथी = मुसाफिर। पंथ = मार्ग।

प्रसंग:
प्रस्तुत पद्यांश हमारी हिन्दी की पाठ्य-पुस्तक में संकलित श्री हरिवंश राय ‘बच्चन’ द्वारा रचित ‘पथ की पहचान’ नामक कविता में से लिया गया है। इसमें कवि ने जीवन मार्ग पर निरन्तर आगे बढ़ने की प्रेरणा दी है। जीवन-मार्ग पर चलने वाले मनुष्य को सावधान किया गया है।

व्याख्या:
कवि कहता है कि जीवन के मार्ग पर चलने वाले हे यात्री ! तू चलने से पहले रास्ते को समझ ले। इस जीवन के रास्ते की कहानी पुस्तकों में नहीं छापी गई है। दूसरे के मुँह से सुनकर भी इसका हाल ज्ञात नहीं होता। आज तक इस रास्ते पर अनगिनत यात्री जा चुके हैं, परन्तु उन सब का आज कुछ भी पता नहीं कि कहाँ गए, परन्तु कुछ लोग इस रास्ते पर अपने पैरों की निशानी छोड़ गए हैं। यह निशानी चुप रह कर भी बहुत कुछ बताती है। हे यात्री ! तू इसका अर्थ समझ कर अपने रास्ते का अनुमान लगा ले। मुसाफिर ! तू चलने से पहले अपने मार्ग की पहचान कर ले। भाव है कि जीवन-पथ का रास्ता बड़ा विस्तृत है। इस पर सोच-समझ कर चलना चाहिए।

विशेष:

  1. कवि ने मानव को जीवन पथ पर आगे बढ़ते हुए जिन बातों को जानने की आवश्यकता होती है उसका पाठ पढ़ाया है।
  2. भाषा सरल और सरस है।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 9 पथ की पहचान

2. यह बुरा है या कि अच्छा व्यर्थ दिन इस पर बिताना,
जब असम्भव छोड़ यह पथ दूसरे पर पग बढ़ाना,
तू इसे अच्छा समझ यात्रा सरल इससे बनेगी,
सोच मत केवल तुझे ही, यह पड़ा मन में बिठाना,
हर सफल पंथी यही विश्वास ले इस पर बढ़ा है,
तू इसी पर आज अपने चित्त का अवधान कर ले,
पूर्व चलने के बटोही बाट की पहचान कर ले।

शब्दार्थ : व्यर्थ = बेकार । असम्भव = नामुमकिन। पथ = रास्ता। पग = पैर। अवधान = मन लगाना।

प्रसंग:
यह पद्यांश ‘श्री हरिवंश राय बच्चन द्वारा लिखित ‘पथ की पहचान’ नामक कविता से लिया गया है। इसमें कवि ने मनुष्य को जीवन पथ पर निरन्तर आगे बढ़ने की प्रेरणा दी है। कवि जीवन-मार्ग पर चलने वाले मनुष्य को सावधान करते हुए कहते हैं

व्याख्या:
कवि कहता है कि हे पथिक! यह मार्ग बुरा है या अच्छा, इस बात के लिए सोच-सोचकर दिन बिता देना बेकार है। तू अपने पथ पर निरन्तर आगे बढ़ता जा, जबकि .इस रास्ते को छोड़कर दूसरे रास्ते पर चलना असम्भव है। जीवन का रास्ता एक ही है, उस पर चलना ही पड़ेगा, इसलिए यह सोचना व्यर्थ है कि यह बुरा है या अच्छा। तू इसी मार्ग को अच्छा जान ले, इससे तू रास्ते पर आसानी से चल सकेगा। यह मत सोच कि केवल तुझे ही मन में यह निश्चय करना पड़ा है, बल्कि हर एक सफल यात्री ने इसी विश्वास को लेकर इस रास्ते पर अपना मन लगा कर चलना शुरू किया है। तू भी आज. इसी रास्ते पर अपना मन लगा ले। हे यात्री ! चलने से पहले अपने मार्ग की पहचान कर ले। भाव है कि जब व्यक्ति कोई रास्ता अपना ले तो फिर उस पर बढ़ते रहना चाहिए।

विशेष:

  1. कवि ने मनुष्य को जीवन में स्थिरता का परिचय दिया है और माना है कि उसे बार-बार अपने लक्ष्य को बदलना नहीं चाहिए।
  2. भाषा सरल, सरस और भावपूर्ण है।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 9 पथ की पहचान

3. है अनिश्चित किस जगह पर सरित्, गिरि, गह्वर मिलेंगे,
है अनिश्चित किस जगह पर बाग, वन सुन्दर मिलेंगे,
किस जगह यात्रा खत्म हो जाएगी, यह भी अनिश्चित,
है अनिश्चित, कब सुमन, कब कंटकों के शर मिलेंगे,
कौन सहसा छूट जाएंगे, मिलेंगे कौन सहसा,
आ पड़े कुछ भी, रुकेगा तू न, ऐसी आन कर लें,
पूर्व चलने के बटोही, बाट की पहचान कर ले।

शब्दार्थ : सरित् = नदी। गिरि = पहाड़। गह्वर = गड्ढा, खाई। सुमन = फूल। कंटकों = कांटों। शर = तीर।

प्रसंग:
यह पद्यांश ‘पथ की पहचान’ नामक कविता से लिया गया है। यह श्री हरिवंश राय बच्चन द्वारा रचित है। इसमें कवि ने मनुष्य को जीवन पथ पर निरन्तर आगे बढ़ने की प्रेरणा दी है। कवि जीवन-मार्ग पर चलने वाले मनुष्य को सावधान करते हुए कहते हैं

व्याख्या:
हे यात्री ! यह पहले से निश्चित नहीं है कि जीवन-पथ पर कहाँ नदी, पर्वत और खाई मिलेंगे, किस समय कौन-सी कठिनाई का सामना करना पड़े, इस विषय में पहले से कोई अनुमान लगाना सम्भव नहीं। किस मार्ग पर सुन्दर बाग और वन मिलेंगे अर्थात् किस समय सुख का अनुभव होगा, इस विषय में भी पहले से कुछ नहीं कहा जा सकता। किस स्थान पर जीवन-यात्रा समाप्त हो जाएगी, यह भी पहले से नहीं जाना जा सकता। यह भी निश्चित नहीं कि कब सुख रूपी फूल और कब तीव्र चुभन पैदा करने वाले दुःख रूपी कांटे मिलेंगे। इस जीवन-पथ पर बढ़ते हुए कौन-से साथी अलग हो जाएंगे और कौन-से नए आ मिलेंगे यह भी पहले से जानना सम्भव नहीं। बस तू केवल इतना फैसला कर ले कि तुम्हारे मार्ग में भले ही कुछ आ जाए पर तू अपने पथ पर रुकेगा नहीं, अपितु निरन्तर आगे बढ़ता जाएगा। अतः हे पथिक ! तू चलने से पूर्व अपने मार्ग की पहचान कर ले। भाव है कि जीवन-पथ के यात्री के लिए यह अनिश्चित होता है कि उसे कहाँ सुख मिलेंगे और कहाँ दुःख।

विशेष:

  1. कवि ने मनुष्य को निरन्तर आगे बढ़ने की प्रेरणा दी है।
  2. भाषा सरल और सरस है।।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 9 पथ की पहचान

पथ की पहचान कविता का सार

‘पथ की पहचान’ कविता श्री हरिवंश राय ‘बच्चन’ की श्रेष्ठ रचना है। इसमें कवि मनुष्य को सम्बोधित करते हुए कहता है कि हे मनुष्य ! जीवन के मार्ग पर चलने से पहले तू उसकी पहचान कर ले, क्योंकि इसका ज्ञान लोगों के बताने या पुस्तकों से प्राप्त नहीं होगा। कुछ लोग जो जीवन-पथ पर अपने चिह्न छोड़ गए हैं, उनके आधार पर अपनी यात्रा आरम्भ करनी चाहिए। एक बार रास्ते में चलने के बाद अच्छे या बुरे का विचार नहीं करना चाहिए। दृढ़ संकल्प के साथ आगे बढ़ना चाहिए। इस रास्ते पर चलते हुए यह निश्चित नहीं कि कहाँ सुख मिलेंगे और कहाँ दुःख। कौन रास्ते में छोड़ जाएगा और कब तुम्हारी जीवनयात्रा समाप्त हो जाएगी। ये सारी बातें अनिश्चित हैं, परन्तु तू दृढ़ता के साथ आगे बढ़ता चल।
‘पथ की पहचान’ कविता श्री हरिवंश राय ‘बच्चन’ की श्रेष्ठ रचना है। इसमें कवि मनुष्य को सम्बोधित करते हुए कहता है कि हे मनुष्य ! जीवन के मार्ग पर चलने से पहले तू उसकी पहचान कर ले, क्योंकि इसका ज्ञान लोगों के बताने या पुस्तकों से प्राप्त नहीं होगा। कुछ लोग जो जीवन-पथ पर अपने चिह्न छोड़ गए हैं, उनके आधार पर अपनी यात्रा आरम्भ करनी चाहिए। एक बार रास्ते में चलने के बाद अच्छे या बुरे का विचार नहीं करना चाहिए। दृढ़ संकल्प के साथ आगे बढ़ना चाहिए। इस रास्ते पर चलते हुए यह निश्चित नहीं कि कहाँ सुख मिलेंगे और कहाँ दुःख। कौन रास्ते में छोड़ जाएगा और कब तुम्हारी जीवनयात्रा समाप्त हो जाएगी। ये सारी बातें अनिश्चित हैं, परन्तु तू दृढ़ता के साथ आगे बढ़ता चल।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 8 बस चुप भली

Punjab State Board PSEB 8th Class Hindi Book Solutions Chapter 8 बस चुप भली Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 8 Hindi Chapter 8 बस चुप भली

Hindi Guide for Class 8 PSEB बस चुप भली Textbook Questions and Answers

(क) भाषा – बोध

I. शब्दार्थ

निगाह = नज़र।
जुबानदराजी = अधिक बोलने की आदत।
दस्तक = खटखटाना।
जहर उगलना = बुरा-भला कहना।
रामबाण औषधि = अचूक दवा।
नसीहतें = उपदेश।
बयान = वर्णन करना।
चटोरी = स्वाद लेने वाली।
रसना = जीभ।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 8 बस चुप भली

II. इन मुहावरों को अपने वाक्यों में प्रयोग करें:

1. काला अक्षर भैंस बराबर
2. छाती पर मूंग दलना
3. फाँसी का फंदा चूमना
4. कान पकड़ना
5.मैदान में कूद पड़ना
6. राग अलापना
7. नमक खाना
8. अपना-सा मुँह लेकर चले जाना
9. जान के पीछे पड़ना
उत्तर:
1. काला अक्षर भैंस बराबर – आज के युग में काला अक्षर भैंस बराबर व्यक्ति को समाज में सम्मान प्राप्त नहीं होता।
2. छाती पर मूंग दलना – गणेशी का बदमाश पोता न पढ़ता है और न ही कोई काम करता है, बस बूढ़ी दादी की छाती पर मूंग दलता रहता है।
3. फाँसी का फंदा चूमना – भगत सिंह ने देश के लिए खुशी-खुशी फाँसी का फंदा चूम लिया था।
4. कान पकड़ना – मैं तो कान पकड़ता हूँ कि तुम्हारे घर अब कभी नहीं आऊँगा।
5. मैदान में कूद पड़ना – झांसी की रानी अंग्रेजों के व्यवहार से क्रोधित हो कर मैदान में कूद पड़ी थी।
6. राग अलापना – तेरी यहाँ कोई सुनवाई नहीं तो फिर क्यों अपना राग अलाप रहा है।
7. नमक खाना – तुम्हारा बरसों तक नमक खाया है इसलिए यह काम तो मुझे करना ही पड़ेगा।
8. अपना-सा मुँह लेकर चले जाना – अफ़सर ने जब गाँव वालों की बात सुनी ही नहीं तो वे अपना-सा मुँह लेकर चले गए।
9. जान के पीछे पड़ना – ये गुंडे तो तुम्हारी जान के पीछे पड़े हुए हैं इसलिए जल्दी पुलिस की सहायता प्राप्त करो।

(ख) विषय – बोध

I. सही पर (✓) और गलत पर (×) का चिह्न लगायें :

(क) जुबानदराजी बुरी आदत है?
(ख) मौन के बल पर कालिदास का विवाह राजकुमारी से नहीं हुआ था। ( )
(ग) निर्दय जुबान के कारण रहीम अन्तिम दिनों में परेशान हुए थे। ( )
(घ) बिहारी लाल और मुरारी लाल को साहब ने तरक्की दी थी। ( )
(ङ) चुनाव अभियान में लेखक ने खन्ना का पक्ष लिया था। ( )
उत्तर:
सही- क, ग।
गलत- ख, घ, ङ।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 8 बस चुप भली

II. इन प्रश्नों के उत्तर एक या दो वाक्यों में लिखें :

प्रश्न (क)
सब आफ़तों से बचने की रामबाण औषधि क्या है?
उत्तर:
सब आफ़तों से बचने की रामबाण औषधि मौन धारण कर लेना है।

प्रश्न (ख)
न चाहते हुए भी हम क्यों जुबानदराजी करते हैं?
उत्तर:
न चाहते हुए भी मन के भावों के कारण जुबान नियंत्रण में नहीं रहती है और हम जुबानदराजी करते हैं।

प्रश्न (ग)
जुबानदराजी के कारण मनसूर का क्या परिणाम हुआ?
उत्तर:
जुबानदराजी के कारण मनसूर को फांसी के फंदे पर झूलना पड़ा था।

प्रश्न (घ)
अपने ही घर में लेखक को मेहमान क्यों बनना पड़ा?
उत्तर:
लेखक को अपने किसी जान-पहचान वाले के बेटे की शादी में न चाहते हुए भी भागीदार बनने के कारण अपने ही घर में मेहमान बनना पड़ा था।

प्रश्न (ङ)
बिहारी लाल और मुरारी लाल की गवाही से लेखक ने मुक्ति किस युक्ति से ली?
उत्तर:
लेखक को झूठ-मूठ की भयंकर खाँसी का बहाना करने की युक्ति से बिहारी लाल और मुरारी लाल की गवाही से मुक्ति मिली थी।

III. चार या पाँच वाक्यों में उत्तर लिखें:

प्रश्न (क)
एक चुप सौ सुख’ इस तथ्य (सच्चाई) को अपनी युक्तियों से स्पष्ट करें।
उत्तर:
वास्तव में ही ‘एक चुप सौ सुख’ एक सच्चाई है। यदि दो मित्र आपस में किसी भी बात पर झगड़ पड़ें तो उन में से किसी एक का पक्ष नहीं लिया जा सकता। ऐसा करने से उन दो में से एक मित्र का दुश्मन बन जाना निश्चित होता है। लड़ाई-झगड़ा तो घर में भी हो जाता है। चुप रह कर किसी भी पक्ष का साथ न देना समस्या को कम ही करता है और अपने शत्रुओं और विरोधियों की संख्या को भी कम करता है।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 8 बस चुप भली

प्रश्न (ख)
क्या हर स्थिति में चुप रहना चाहिए’ अपने विचार लिखें।
उत्तर:
हर स्थिति में चुप नहीं रहना चाहिए। ऐसा तो केवल वही कर सकता है जो मूर्ख हो या पागल हो। जब कोई अन्याय के रास्ते पर चलता हुआ किसी पर भी अनावश्यक रूप से अत्याचार कर रहा हो तो चुप नहीं रहना चाहिए। देखकर मक्खी नहीं निगली जा सकती। जब हमारे हितों को चोट लग रही हो या किसी पर भी अनर्थ ढाया जा रहा हो तो चुप नहीं रहना चाहिए, सदा चुप रहने वाले को लोग मूर्ख ही मानते हैं और जीवन जीते हुए मूर्ख कदापि नहीं बनना चाहिए। इसके लिए व्यवहार बुद्धि का प्रयोग करना चाहिए।

प्रश्न (ग)
बिहारी लाल और मुरारी लाल के झगड़े से बचने के लिए लेखक ने क्या नाटक किया?
उत्तर:
बिहारी लाल और मुरारी लाल के झगड़े से बचने के लिए लेखक ने अपने दफ़्तर के साहब से भयंकर खांसी का नाटक किया था। वह ज़ोर-जोर से खाँसी करते हुए लुढ़क गया था। उसने अपनी सांस रोक ली थी। उसे डिस्पैंसरी ले जाना पड़ा था।

प्रश्न (घ)
लेखक ने उलझनमयी परिस्थितियों कोर्ट कचहरी, शादी-मंगनी, चुनाव उपचुनाव-आदि से दूर रहने का संकेत क्यों दिया है ?
उत्तर:
जब हम किसी विषय पर चुप हो जाते हैं और किसी भी पक्ष के पक्ष या विपक्ष का साथ नहीं देते तो लोग हमें अपना शस्त्र नहीं बना पाते। वे हम से तब किसी गवाही की उम्मीद नहीं रखते। उन्हें लगता है कि हम उनके किसी काम के नहीं हैं। ऐसी स्थिति में हम कोट-कचहरी, शादी-मंगनी, चुनाव-उपचुनाव आदि चक्करों से बच जाते हैं।

(ग) व्यावहारिक व्याकरण

I. निम्नलिखित शब्दों में से उपसर्ग पृथक् करें :

1. अधिपति, अध्यक्ष, अध्यात्म, अधिराज।
2. अभिप्राय, अभिशाप, अभिलाषा, अभिमान।
3. अपराध, अपमान, अपशब्द, अपवाद।
4. अतिशय, अतिनिर्धन, अत्याचार, अत्यावश्यक।
5. अनुवाद, अनुचर, अनुरूप, अनुकरण।
6. अवगुण, अवनति, अवस्था, अवसर।
7. उपमान, उपवन, उपकार, उपमंत्री।
8. निर्भय, निर्दोष, निर्वाह, नीरोग (निर्)
9. निस्तार, निश्चल, निष्प्राण, निष्प्रभ (निस / निश / निष् । निः)
10. परिचय, परिमाण, परिक्रमा, परिवर्तन।
उत्तर:
1. अधि
2. अभि
3. अप
4. अति
5. अनु
6. अव
7. उप
8. निर्
9. निस / निश / निष् / निः
10. परि।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 8 बस चुप भली

II. समस्तपदों को अलग करें (विग्रह)

जुबान दराजी = ……………….
वाणी-संयम = ……………….
योग-साधना = ……………….
तन-मन = ……………….
शरणागत = ……………….
रसोईघर = ……………….
आपबीती = ……………….
अनपढ़ = ……………….
उत्तर:
जुबान दराजी = जुबान की दराजी
वाणी-संयम = वाणी का संयम
योग-साधना = योग की साधना
तन-मन = तन और मन
शरणागत = शरण में गत
रसोई घर = रसोई के लिए घर
आप बीती = अपने पर बीती
अनपढ़ = नहीं पढ़ा है जो/ न पढ़ा

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Guide बस चुप भली Important Questions and Answers

बहुविकल्पीय प्रश्न निम्नलिखित प्रश्नों के उत्तर सही विकल्प चुनकर लिखें

प्रश्न 1.
किस पर लगाम लगाने से सभी काम शीघ्रता और शांति से हो जाते हैं ?
(क) हाथों पर
(ख) पैरों पर
(ग) जुबान पर
(घ) मन पर।
उत्तर:
जुबान पर।

प्रश्न 2.
जुबानदराजी के कारण किसे फाँसी पर झूलना पड़ा
(क) महमूद को
(ख) मनसूर को
(ग) मुनव्वर को
(घ) मुज़रूह को।
उत्तर:
मनसूर को।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 8 बस चुप भली

प्रश्न 3.
गवाही नहीं देने से मुक्ति कैसे मिलती है ?
(क) बेहोश होकर
(ख) बीमार होकर
(ग) खांसी के दौरे से
(घ) विदेश भाग कर।
उत्तर:
खांसी के दौरे से।

प्रश्न 4.
रहीम के अनुसार अनुचित बात कहने पर जूते किसे पड़ते हैं ?
(क) मुँह को
(ख) खोपड़ी को
(ग) पीठ को
(घ) टांगों को
उत्तर:
खोपड़ी को।

प्रश्न 5.
विधानसभा के चुनाव अभियान का काम संभालने से बचने के लिए लेखक कहाँ चले गए ?
(क) दिल्ली
(ख) शिमला
(ग) अमृतसर
(घ) पटियाला।
उत्तर:
दिल्ली

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 8 बस चुप भली

बस चुप भली Summary

बस चुप भली पाठ का सार

युगों से समझदार लोग सभी प्रकार की मुसीबतों से बचने के लिए एक ही बात कहते आएं हैं कि ‘एक चुप सौ सुख’। जुबान पर लगाम लगाने से सभी काम शीघ्रता और शांति से पूरे हो जाते हैं लेकिन जुबान है कि मुँह में टिकती ही नहीं। जरा-सी बात पर गज भर लंबी हो कर यह बाहर निकल आती है और झगड़े का बड़ा कारण बन जाती है। बुजुर्गों की चुप रहने की नसीहत धरी-की-धरी रह जाती है। चुप रहना आसान नहीं है पर इसके फ़ायदे बहुत हैं। मूर्ख और अनपढ़ कालिदास केवल चुप रहने के कारण सुंदर राजकुमारी का पति बन गया था और वहीं अपने युग का सबसे बड़ा दार्शनिक मन्सूर जोबस हर बात को बोलने के कारण फांसी के फंदे पर लटका दिया गया था। तभी तो रहीम को कहना पड़ा था कि जुबान अच्छी-बुरी सब बातें कह कर स्वयं तो दाँतों के पीछे मुँह में जा छिपती है और जूते बेचारी खोपड़ी को खाने पड़ते हैं। पिछले विधानसभा चुनाव के समय मुहल्ले के दो लोग लेखक के घर पधारे।

वे दोनों चाहते थे कि लेखक महोदय उनके लिए चुनावअभियान का सारा कार्यभार संभाल लें। लेखक ने उन दोनों को किन्हीं विशेष एहसानों के कारण साफ-साफ मना तो करना नहीं था, इसलिए उन्होंने उन्हें एक कागज़ पर लिख कर बताया कि वे मौन व्रत पर थे और अगले दिन बताएंगे कि वे उन दोनों में से किस के लिए काम करेंगे। अगले दिन सुबह-सवेरे वे दिल्ली चले गए और विवाद से बच गए। दफ़्तर में बिहारी लाल और मुरारी लाल ने आपस में जोरदार झगड़ा किया, तोड़-फोड़ भी कर दी। बड़े साहब ने उन दोनों के कहने पर लेखक को गवाह के रूप में बुलाया। संकट से बचने के लिए लेखक ने भयंकर खाँसी के दौरे का नाटक किया। लेखक को तो डिस्पैंसरी भेज दिया गया पर बिहारी-मुरारी दोनों की तरक्की रोक दी गई थी जिसका सारा दोष दोनों ने लेखक पर डाला। एक बार मुहल्ले के कुछ बुजुर्गों ने अपने होनहार पुत्र को विवाह के लिए लड़की पक्ष को दिखाने हेतु लेखक का घर चुन लिया। लेखक चाह कर भी उन्हें ना नहीं कह सका जिसका परिणाम है कि अब उसका मेहमानखाना लड़के-लड़की वालों के आपसी झगड़ों का पंचायत घर बना हुआ है। लेखक का यही मानना है कि कोर्ट-कचहरी, शादी-मंगनी, चुनाव-उपचुनाव, सिफ़ारिश, गवाही, जमानत आदि से दूर ही रहना चाहिए। यदि ऐसा नहीं किया जा सकता तो जुबान अवश्य खोलनी पड़ेगी और जुबान का रस तो निश्चित रूप से दुःखदायी होता ही है।

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

Punjab State Board PSEB 12th Class Religion Book Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 12 Religion Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

Long Answer Type Questions:

Question 1.
Discuss in brief but meaningful the salient features of Purana literature and its importance in Hinduism.
Or
Discuss the importance of Puranas in Hinduism.
Or
Give a brief account of important Puranas.
Or
Discuss in brief but meaningful the subject-matter of Puranas.
Or
Explain how Puranas were written?
Or
What is meant by Puranas? Give a brief account of the various Puranas.
Or
Write in brief about the Puranas.
Or
Give information about famous five Puranas.
Answer:
The Puranas are the ancient texts of the Hindus. The Purana means ancient. They have been written in Sanskrit. No definite period is given for their writing. These are not a creation of single century. They are described in the Atharvaveda, Upanishads and epics. There have been made changes in them from time to time and new chapters were added to them. The Puranas were given their final touch in the Gupta period. Hence the Puranas have been written by several writers.

The Puranas were called the Fifth Veda and the Shudras were given the permission to read them. The total number of Purans are 18. These Puranas have been divided into three parts. There Eire 6 PurEihas in each part and they Eire called Shiva, Vaishnava, and Brahman Pur ana.

These parts are as follows :

1. Shiva Purana :

  • Vayu
  • Linga
  • Skanda
  • Agni
  • Matsya
  • Kurma.

2. Vaishnava Purana :

  • Vishnu
  • Bhagvata
  • Narada
  • Garuda
  • Padma.

3. Brahman Purana :

  • Brahman
  • Brahmand
  • Brahmavaivrata
  • Markandeya
  • Bhavishya and
  • Vamana.

The prevalent Vedic and Non-Vedic religious beliefs, myths and stories are compiled in the Puranas. Myths are those stories that have no proof, but they Eire very popular. Each Purana is divided into five parts. These parts are :

  1. Search: It describes about the creation of the world.
  2. Pratisarga: It gives a description about the development, destruction and recreation of the world.
  3. Vansh: It gives a description of the lineage of the famous kings and Rishis.
  4. Manzanar: It gives a description of the great battles fought on this earth and the important event in each of them.
  5. Vanshanucharita: It gives a description of the kings of great lineage and the feats of the Rishis.

What is worth remembering here is that we do not have the original Puranas with us. What we have with us today as the Puranas, may not necessarily have the. descriptions as per the above divisions. A brief description of the Puranas is as follows :

1. The Brahman Purana: It is also called the Adi Purana. It has 14,000 shlokas in it. Most of it describes the pilgramage places of India. Besides this, it also gives a description of Krishana, Rama, Surya, famous royal families, earth, hell,’ various castes and about Varna Ashrama system.

2. The Padma Purana: This is the biggest Purana. It has almost 55,000 shlokas in it. It describes the Srishti Khand, Bhumi KhEind, Swarga Khand and Pataal Khand. It gives a detailed description of the Vishnu Katha and Rama Katha. Besides these, this Purana also describes about the holy places and fasts. Several stories pertaining to myths Eire Eilso recorded in it.

3. The Vishnu Purana: This Purana has 23,000 shlokas in it.*It says that Vishnu is the supreme god. He alone has created the world and protects it. Famous among the stories given in it are the stories of Prahlad and Dhruva. It also describes the strange things about this world and the people of heaven. It gives a description of several famous lineages. In the fifth and last part, the various miraculous deeds of Krishna have been discussed.

4. The Vayu Purana : This Purana has 11,000 shlokas in it. It describes several stories associated with the glory of Shiva. For this reason, it is also called the Shiva Pursina. It describes several lineages. It has great historical importance because it is based on facts. It also gives the geographical description which is quite useful.

5. The Bhagvata Purana : Most popular among the Puranas associated with Lord Vishnu is the Bhagavata Purana. It gives a description of several stories associated with the life of Lord Krishna. It also says that Lord Buddha and the founder of Sankhya philosophy, Kapil are incarnations of Vishnu. This Purana is not very important from historical point of view.

6. The Narada Purana : This Purana consists of 25,000 shlokas. This Purana is related to the worship of Vishnu. It gives a detailed description of the prevalent ‘ education in ancient India. It does not give a description of the lineages.

7. The Markandeya Purana : There are 900 shlokas in this Purana. It gives a detailed description of the Vedic gods Indra, Surya and Agni etc. It also gives a description of several famous lineages.

8. The Agni Purana : This Purana has 15,400 shlokas. According to a belief, this Purana was narrated to Rishi Vashisht by Agni god himself. This Purana is associated with Shaivism. It throws ample light on several important subjects like war tactics, methods to perform the yajans, astrology, geography, law, grammar, medicine, fasts, donation, marriage etc. Undoubtedly, this Purana is like an encyclopaedia.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

9. The Bhavishya Purana : This Purana has 14,000 shlokas in it. There are several stories related to the gods Brahma, Vishnu, Shiva and Surya. It also describes several ancient royal families and sages. Besides these, it also discusses several rituals which were performed at that time.

10. The Brahmavaivarta Purana : This Purana has 18,000 shlokas in it. This Purana tells Brahman as the creator of this universe. It gives a detailed description of Lord Krishna’s life. It also describes about Radha. In it, Ganesha has been called is an incarnation of Krishna.

11. The Linga Purana : This Purana has 11,000’shlokas in it. This Purana is associated with Shaivism. It describes about the incarnations of Shiva, fasts and holy places. It preaches to worship the linga as a form of Shiva.

12. The Varaha Purana: It has 10,700 shlokas in it. It giyes a detailed description of the worship of Vishnu in the incarnation of Varaha. It also gives a description related to Shiva, Durga and Ganesha.

13. The Skanda Purana : It was a large Purana. It describes 51,000 shlokas in it. This Purana is not available now. Information about it can be gathered from examples cited in the other texts. This Purana mainly describes about the worship of Shiva. Besides this, it gives useful information about the several holy places and temples of India.

14. The Vamana Purana : There are 10,000 shlokas in this Purana. Most of this Purana describes about the worship of gods like Shiva, Vishnu and Ganesha etc. It also describes several mythical stories.

15. The Kurina Purana : There are 18,000 shlokas in this Purana. It describes the worship of the Kurma incarnation of Vishnu. It gives a description of several mythical stories.

16. The Matsya Purana: It has 14,000 shlokas in it. This Purana is a conversation between a matsya (fish) and Manu. When this world was destroyed then this fish saved man. It gives a detailed description of several famous royal families. Besides these, there is a description of several fairs and pilgrimages.

17. The Garura Purana : There are 18,000 shlokas in this Parana. There is a description of the methods involved in the worhship of Vishnu. It gives important information about the yajnas, astrology, grammar, social science, physical education and ghosts and spirits. It gives detailed information about the last rites, sati system and pitra shradhs.

18. The Brahmanda Parana : There are 12,000 shlokas in this Pur ana. This Purana was read by Brahman. It gives a description about several dynasties and pilgramages. Importance of the Pur anas The Puranas present a detailed picture of the ancient Indian culture. The customs and traditions prevalent in Hinduism today are a gift of the Puranas. These Puranas throw ample light on the religious beliefs of the Hindus, the methods of worship of the gods and goddesses, fasts, shradhs, birth, marriage and rites performed at the time of death.

Idol worship and belief in incarnation is also a gift of the Puranas. These Puranas popularized the tradition of worship of forefathers further. People were inspired to donate. The description of the popular dynasties given in the Puranas proved to be quite useful historically.

The description of the pilgramages and temples gives us important infbrmation about the contemporary art. Besides these, the Puranas throw ample light on the social, economic and political condition of ancient India. Undoubtedly, it would be no exaggeration if the Puranas are called the encyclopaedia of Indian culture. Dr. R.C. Hazra has aptly remarked, “The Puranas have played a very important part in the life of the Hindus for more than two thousand years.

They have brought home to the common man the wisdom of the saints of the highest order without creating any discord. The authors of these works took every individual into consideration and made such prescriptions as would benefit him in.his social and religious life.”

Question 2.
Discuss in brief but meaningful the subject matter and importance of Upanishads.
Or
Give a brief account and importance and meaning of Upanishads.

Or
Discuss the contents of Upanishads and their importance.
Or
Explain the subject-matter of Upanishadls.
Or
Write a short note on the main teachings of the Upanishads.
Or
Discuss the main teachings of the Upanishads.
Or
What do you know about the main teachings of the Upanishads?
Or
What do you know about the main doctrines of the Upanishads?
Or
What is meant by Upanishads? Give a brief account of their main features.
Or
Give introduction about the Upanishads.
Or
Write about the m$dn teachings of the Upanishads. Name two earliest Upanishads.
Or
What is meant by Upanishads? Describe any two of them in brief.
Answer:
The Upanishads are considered as the true origin of Indian philosophy. Upanishads are those texts which incorporate in them the spiritual knowledge of the „ world of highest order just as pearls are held together in a string. The lustre o’f these pearls helps to eradicate the inner darkness of a person and, he is illuminated to such an extent that it outshines the light of the even sun. It would be no exaggeration to say that the Upanishads are the prime source of Indian philosophy. The word Upanishad is made from a combination of three words. The word ‘Up’ means near, ‘Ni’ means devotion and ‘Shad’ means to sit. Thus the word Upanishad’ means sitting beside with complete devotion.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

In fact, Upanishad is such knowledge which a guru gives to his students secretly. The Upanishads are also called Vedanta because they are considered to be consequential part of the Vedas. Vedanta means the last knowledge. This means that there is no knowledge beyond or after Upanishads. The Upanishads were composed by different sages between 1000 B.C. and 300 B.C. The total number of all Upanishads is 108. Upanishads like Isha, Kena, Prashna, Mundaka, Taittiriya, Aitareya, Chhandogya, Brihadaranyaka Shvetashvatara, Kaushitaki and Katha are considered the most important. The main teachings of the Upanishads are as follows :

1. Nature of Self : The word Self has been frequently used in the Upanishads because it is considered as the ultimate source of all knowledge. Self is the omnipresent living element. This element forms the basic foundation of all elements. This assumes a living form and resides in the hearts of all people. This is Brahman or the Atman (Absolute). For this reason, the Self is considered as the source of all light. According to the Upanishads, the Self is the only element about which there is no doubt. The Self is the determined strength. It is not transitory. It itself forms the basis of all transitory elements. For this reason, it is unchanging itself.

2. Nature of the Absolute : The word ‘Brahman’ is derived from an element of Sanskrit language called ‘Briha’ which means to grow or to proceed. From philosophical point of view, Brahman is an element which led to the creation of the visible world. Brahman is considered as an epitome of the power of man and nature. He is the master of unlimited powers because he himself is boundless. He is all pervading and the light of all lights. Despite being the basis of all virtues it is called Nirguna. He is the source of complete knowledge. It is impossible to describe his knowledge in words. Undoubtedly, he is the basic cause and foundation of the entire world.

3. Identity of Self and the Absolute : The sages have considered the Self and Brahman as a single entity in the Upanishads. They were considered as one basic element. For this reason, in the Upanishads, the words Self and the Absolute are used interchangeably at- several places. The distinction is only in words but not in meaning or element. There is only one primary element. He is sometimes called Self and sometimes called the Absolute. Just as a river joins the sea, so does the Self sublime with the Parmatman. Because the Self and the Absolute are one, therefore they cannot be differentiated. In brief, the Upanishadic philosophy looks like an ocean in a drop.

4. Creation of the World : There are several instances of the description of the creation of the world in the Upanishads. It tells that Brahman (the Absolute) created the world. Prior to the creation of the world, Brahman was present in its own Self. Then Brahman decided to express Himself in various forms. In this manner, began the creation of the world.

5. Belief in Karma Theory : The Upanishads believed in the Karma Theory. According to this, each person had to pay for his deeds (Karmas). The fruits of the deeds of the previous birth would have to be borne during the present birth. The fruits of the deeds of this birth would be borne in the next birth. The joys and sufferings of our lives depend upon our own deeds. Hence we should always indulge in good deeds and keep a distance from evil deeds. It is due to one’s ill deeds that a man gets separated from the Parmatman and continues to be a part of the vicious circle of transmigration.

6. Moral Virtues : The Upanishads have greatly emphasised on moral virtues. It is only when one adopts the moral virtues then he can swim across the ocean of this life. These virtues are :

  • Always speak the truth.
  • Love all beings.
  • Think of others’ misery as one’s own.
  • Keep distance from pride, greed and evil thinking,
  • Do not indulge in stealing or robbing,
  • Obey the tenets of religion.
  • Do not show laxity towards the study of the Vedas, education, deities and forefathers,
  • Be sincere towards social welfare,
  • Respect your guru.

7. Maya : The Upanishads have thrown ample light on the principle of Maya. The world and its elements have been referred to as Maya. Ignorant men run after the attractive elements of this world. To acquire them, they do not hesitate to use even the worst meAnswer:Maya veils one’s intelligence and renders man to be trapped in the cycle of transmigration. An intelligent man understands the mystery of Maya and so does not fall a prey to this vicious Maya. Only such persons attain salvation (Moksha).

8. Moksha : The attainment of Moksha is the prime objective of a man’s life. Through Karma, a man is subjected to the sufferings of transmigration. The Atman inside the body is the partner to all joys and sufferings. Till the time, the Atman is trapped in the body, it cannot free itself of joys and sufferings. Ignorance is the prime cause of all bonds of man. When this ignorance is destroyed, man is freed from all bonds and he attains salvation.

Moksha is the last step of ladder of man’s knowledge upon reaching there, he achieves all. Nothing supersedes the joy of attaining Moksha. According to the Upanishads, Moksha can be attained only through knowledge. The famous historian Dr. S.N. Sen has aptly remarked, “The Upanishads are rich in deep philosophical content and are the bed¬rock on which all the latter philosophical development rests.”

Question 3.
Explain the meaning and nature of Self and the Absolute.
Or
What is the relationship between Self and the Absolute? Explain.
Answer:
A detailed information in context of the Self and Brahman has been given in the Upanishads. What is the Self? What is meant by Brahman? What is the form of these two and what is the relationship between these two, a brief description in this context is given as follows :

(A) Nature of Self
The word Self has been used quite often in the Upanishads because they are considered to be a storehouse of complete knowledge. Self is the omnipresent living element. This element is the basic foundation of all elements (both materialistic and non-materialistic). It takes the form of a living being and resides in all hearts. It is Brahman or the Absolute. For this reason, Self is called the flame of all flames. The form of Self has been described in the Upanishads in the following manner :

1. Self is Certain Being: According to the Upanishads, the Self is the only thing which cannot be put to doubt. Self is a certain being. It does not need to be proved because it is self evident. It is considered to be a basis of all materialistic and non- materialistic elements. No experience is without the Self being involved in it, but it does not experience. It is the witness to all experiences.

2. Self is Permanent: Self is permanent. It is not transitory. It is the basis of all temporary things. Hence, it cannot be changed. It is beyond all psychological actions
and hence it is not affected by worldly changes. In fact, it is the creator of all changes but lives in its past. Hence one cannot deny the permanence of Self.

3. The Doctrine of Five Layers : To understand the form of Self, the Taittiriya Upanishad gives the Doctrine of the Five Layers. These five layers are :

  • Annamayi Kosh : It is a non-living and lifeless element. It comes at a materialistic level.
  • Pranmayi Kosh : It comes at a living level. It includes all flora and fauna.
  • Manomayi Kosh : It comes at a stage of consciousness. It is the objective of life.
  • Vigyanmayi Kosh : It is at a level of self consciouness. In it consciousness develops logical intellect.
  • Anandmayi Kosh : It is the true level of the Self. It destroys the spirit of diversity and differentiation.

The first four layers become a part of this pleasure (Anand) which is the last stage of their development. Hence the Doctrine of Five Layers proves that the Self is pure, living form of pleasure.

4. The Four Stages : The Mandukya Upanishad tries to explain the four stages of Self on the basis of consciousness. These four stages are :

  • The Stage of Wakefulness : In this stage the heart experiences pleasure from things of the world with the help of his senses.
  • The Stage of Dreams : In this stage consciousness presents several pictures (reflections) in itself.
  • The Stage of beep Sleep : It is the stage of deep sleep. The pleasure experienced in this stage is not real.
  • The Turiya Stage : It is a religious state. All ignorance gets destroyed here. The state of pleasure that the Self attains at this stage is indescribable.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

(B) Nature of the Absolute:

The word ‘Brahman’ is derived from an element ‘Briha’ in Sanskrit language which means to grow, increase and sprout. It can thus give a philosophical conclusion that Brahman is that element that has created this visual world. Brahman is considered-: to be a form of a person and nature is considered to be a form of power. His powers are unlimited because he Himself is without boundation. He is considered to be omnipotent and the source of all fight.

He is Nirguna (Attributeless) despite being the basis of all forms. He is the storehouse of all knowledge. It is impossible to describe his knowledge in words. Undoubtedly, He is the root cause and basis of the entire universe. A brief description of the form of the Absolute is as follows :

1. Absolute is Qualified Essence: The Upanishads have referred to the sages as the form of the Absolute at several places. The Mundaka Upanishad talks about the form of the Absolute as being present everywhere south-north, west-east, above the sky and below the earth. The Absolute is the universe. Brihadaranyaka Upanishad states that initially there was the Absolute alone but when he attained form, it became omnipresent.

The Chhandogya Upanishad says that the Brahman reaches everyone through all actions, all desires, all fragrances and all tastes. In short, it implies that Absolute is all in one.

2. Absolute is Attributeless Essence : The Upanishads refer to the Absolute as the attributeless essence. It has no form, colour, shape etc. For this reason it can neither be seen nor can it be understood. The Mundaka Upanishad says that the Brahman is neither visible, nor receivable and without clan, eyes, ears, hands and feet etc. Shankar says that the Brahman is the cause of all the universe but it cannot be converted into it. It is the basis of all changes. Since the Absolute is nondescriptive, it has been described using the words ‘Neti, Neti’ (no end, no end).

3. Absolute is the Cause of World : The Upanishads call the Absolute as the cause of the world. According to the Taittiriya Upanishad, it is Brahman which leads to the creation of all things and because of which they continue to be in existence and in the end they become a part of it. The Chhandogya Upanishad calls the Absolute as ‘Tajlan’ which means that which originates from the Absolute, lives with the help of its support and in the end becomes an inseparable part of it. It implies that the Absolute gave an expression to this world and its origin and end is caused by the Absolute.

4. Absolute is the Source of Light: The Upanishads consider the Absolute as the source of light. The sun, moon, stars etc. give light as parts of the light of the Absolute. The light of the Absolute should not be considered to be a form of the materialistic light because the materialistic light can be seen with the eyes but the light of the Absolute can be seen only through the power of Yoga. The spiritual light of the Absolute is present in all the things of this worl’d.

5. Absolute is Existence : The Absolute is considered to be of existence according to the Upanishads. In philosophy, Absolute means existence. The Absolute is the basis of all existence. Wherever there is existence, it is because of the Absolute. The Absolute is not dependent on anything for its existence but it is considered to be the foundation of the existence of all creatures and elements. Consequently, the Absolute is considered to be the form of all truth.

6. Absolute is Bliss : The Absolute is called a bliss in the Upanishads. What is worth remembering here is that this bliss is not like the other pleasures of the world. It is limitless and endless like the sea of pleasure. It is due to the bliss of the Absolute that all creatures are bom in this universe. It is the cause of life of all creatures. Each creation experiences this pleasure on the basis of one’s potential. In the end, all the creatures get immersed in this pleasure. There is no end to this pleasure of the Absolute because it is the form of complete bliss.

Identity of Self and the Absolute:

The sages in the Upanishads have made no distinction between the Self and the Absolute. They considered it as one basic element. For this reason, they often use the terms Self and the Absolute interchangeably. The distinction is merely that of words but there is no distinction of meaning or element. The basic element of this world is only one. It is sometimes called Self and sometimes called the Absolute. Just as a river meets the sea and becomes a part of it, similarly the Self becomes a part of the Absolute. Because the form of Self and the Absolute is one, hence, they cannot be distinguished. In brief, looking for the ocean in one drop or one drop in the ocean is what the Upanishadic philosophy is all about.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

Question 4.
Give a brief account of the main teachings of Bhagvadgita.
Or
Explain the basic teachings of Bhagvadgita.
Or
Discuss in detail the Karamayoga.
Answer:
The Bhagvadgita is a part of the Mahabharata. It is more popularly known by the name Gita. There are 18 chapters and 700 shlokas (verses) in it. The sermon of Gita was given by Lord Krishna to Aijuna before the battle of Mahabharata began. The ideology imparted by Gita was usually beyond the comprehension of the common man. The ideas of Gita have a magical impact on the common people. It is for this reason, that the Gita is dear to all the Hindus even today. Ramanuja (1017—1137) wrote a commentary on Bhagvadgita and interpreted its teachings.

It has been translated into many languages of the world. Its most popular English translation have been done by Edwin Arnold under the title, The Song Celestial. A brief description of the main teachings of the Gita is as follows :

1. God : The Gita calls the Parmatman (God) as the creator of all world. He is one. He is omnipotent and present in all creatures and objects. He is the creator, preserver and destroyer of all creatures. God is the basis of all knowledge, truth, joy, sorrow, violence, non-violence, courage, happiness, fame and disrespect etc. The tenth chapter of the Gita says, “I am the initiator of everything. Everything is borne out of me. Knowing this, the intelligent men with full devotion worship me.” God is immortal. He is free from the bonds of birth and death. He is the greatest of all.

2. Atman : According to the Gita, the body is not the Atman (soul). The circle of birth and death is related to the body and not the Atman. The Soul is the indestructible element. The water, wind, weapons etc. have no impact on the Atman. Neither does it bom, nor does it die. Just as a man removes his old and tattered clothes to wear new ones, similarly the Atman discards old bodies to enter into new ones.

3. Karamayoga : Karamayoga is a famous principle of the Gita. No creature can spend a single moment without Karma. A person who is able to control his senses and work selflessly is called Karamayogi and those persons who fall a victim to their senses and work to show off are called hypocrite. Except Karamayogi (Karma which does not desire of any fruits), the rest are all full of bonds. Hence, the Gita inspires a man to be a Karamayogi. According to the Gita, every Karma bears fruit which has to be borne by the person. It is never possible that a person performs an action and escapes its fruit. It is an inevitable principle. The fruits of one’s deeds lead one into the vicious circle of transmigration.

He bears the sufferings of fruit of the deeds of the previous birth and through new deeds, gathers the fruits of this birth to move on to the next birth. As a consequence of his deeds, man attains several stages of life, the highest being the Parampad which is his highest goal. Only through Karamayoga man can attain Parampad.

4. Bhaktiyoga : Bhaktiyoga is counted among the three main paths of the Gita. Bhakti is of several types :

  • Prapti Bhakti : It is a kind of bhakti in which the devotee comes with a pious heart in the shelter of God and gets detached from the materialistic elements,
  • Swarth Bhakti : Most of the bhakti in this world is purposeful. The reason for this is that some people resort to bhakti after they are hassled by troubles and they want to get rid of them,
  • Jnana Bhakti: Such bhagats deeply study the Shastras to fulfil their desire of knowledge and by God’s grace are able to attain true knowledge,
  • Nirguna Bhakti : This is a kind of bhakti in which God is considered omnipresent in all forms and thus he serves all the creatures.
  • Saguna Bhakti : In this kind of bhakti, the devotee with a pure heart pays devotion to the idol of his god.
  • Kirtan Bhakti : In this bhakti, the devotee constantly indulges in Kirtan in the name of God.
  • Shravana Bhakti : This type of bhakti is for the less educated. For this reason, they cannot deeply study the Shastras. Consequently, they listen to the sermons of Shastras from the others and tread on the path of bhakti. All these forms of bhakti are considered as a source of Mukti (salvation).

5. Jnanayoga : According to the Bhagvadgita, the fire of knowledge reduces all the bonds of Karma to ashes. For this reason, there is no purer a thing than knowledge in this world. This knowledge is not limited to the knowledge of ordinary elements. It actually means pure knowledge of the Soul. This is called Jnanayoga. Of Karmayoga, Bhaktiyoga and Jnanayoga, Jnanayoga receives prominence because without the knowledge of the Soul, a man can neither be a true Karamayogi nor can he be a true devotee.

After attaining human form, the creature who is not able to attain the knowledge of the Soul can never attain freedom from the bondage of cycle of Karma. Knowledge is the best way to attain salvation because knowledge sets the seed of Karma on fire and a burnt seed cannot give rebirth to a plant.

Question 5.
What do you know about the three paths shown in the Bhagwadgita for the benefit of mankind?
Or
Which are the three Yogas mentioned in the Bhagvadgita? Discuss.
Or
How many Yogas are referred to in the Bhagvadgita? Discuss in detail.
Or
Which are three Yogas mentioned in the Bhagvadgita? Discuss Bhaktiyoga.
Answer:
The Bhagvadgita or the Gita is one of the sacred texts of the Hindus. It gives a simple solution in clear words to all the problems of human life. The Gita does not suggest any one way of life for the attainment of salvation. It says that if every man’s behaviour is different from the other, then there ought to be different ways of reaching one’s ultimate goal. There are three ways of doing this Karamayoga, Bhaktiyoga and Jnanayoga. A man chooses his own path of life according to his nature and interest.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

1. Karamayoga : Karamayoga is a famous principle of the Gita. No creature can spend a single moment without Karma. A person who is able to control his senses and work selflessly is called Karamayogi and those persons who fall a victim to their senses and work to show off are called hypocrite. Except Karamayogi (Karma which does not desire of any fruits), the rest are all full of bonds. Hence, the Gita inspires a man to be a Karamayogi. According to the Gita, every Karma bears fruit which has to be borne by the person. It is never possible that a person performs an action and escapes its fruit. It is an inevitable principle. The fruits of one’s deeds lead one into the vicious circle of transmigration.

He bears the sufferings of fruit of the deeds of the previous birth and through new deeds, gathers the fruits of this birth to move on to the next birth. As a consequence of his deeds, man attains several stages of life, the highest being the Parampad which is his highest goal. Only through Karamayoga man can attain Parampad.

2. Bhaktiyoga : Bhaktiyoga is counted among the three main paths of the Gita. Bhakti is of several types :

  • Prapti Bhakti : It is a kind of bhakti in which the devotee comes with a pious heart in the shelter of God and gets detached from the materialistic elements,
  • Swarth Bhakti : Most of the bhakti in this world is purposeful. The reason for this is that some people resort to bhakti after they are hassled by troubles and they want to get rid of them,
  • Jnana Bhakti: Such bhagats deeply study the Shastras to fulfil their desire of knowledge and by God’s grace are able to attain true knowledge,
  • Nirguna Bhakti : This is a kind of bhakti in which God is considered omnipresent in all forms and thus he serves all the creatures.
  • Saguna Bhakti : In this kind of bhakti, the devotee with a pure heart pays devotion to the idol of his god.
  • Kirtan Bhakti : In this bhakti, the devotee constantly indulges in Kirtan in the name of God.
  • Shravana Bhakti : This type of bhakti is for the less educated. For this reason, they cannot deeply study the Shastras. Consequently, they listen to the sermons of Shastras from the others and tread on the path of bhakti. All these forms of bhakti are considered as a source of Mukti (salvation).

3. Jnanayoga : According to the Bhagvadgita, the fire of knowledge reduces all the bonds of Karma to ashes. For this reason, there is no purer a thing than knowledge in this world. This knowledge is not limited to the knowledge of ordinary elements. It actually means pure knowledge of the Soul. This is called Jnanayoga. Of Karmayoga, Bhaktiyoga and Jnanayoga, Jnanayoga receives prominence because without the knowledge of the Soul, a man can neither be a true Karamayogi nor can he be a true devotee.

After attaining human form, the creature who is not able to attain the knowledge of the Soul can never attain freedom from the bondage of cycle of Karma. Knowledge is the best way to attain salvation because knowledge sets the seed of Karma on fire and a burnt seed cannot give rebirth to a plant.

Question 6.
What do you know about Nishkama Karma of Bhagvadgita?
Answer:

Karamayoga : Karamayoga is a famous principle of the Gita. No creature can spend a single moment without Karma. A person who is able to control his senses and work selflessly is called Karamayogi and those persons who fall a victim to their senses and work to show off are called hypocrite. Except Karamayogi (Karma which does not desire of any fruits), the rest are all full of bonds. Hence, the Gita inspires a man to be a Karamayogi. According to the Gita, every Karma bears fruit which has to be borne by the person. It is never possible that a person performs an action and escapes its fruit. It is an inevitable principle. The fruits of one’s deeds lead one into the vicious circle of transmigration.

He bears the sufferings of fruit of the deeds of the previous birth and through new deeds, gathers the fruits of this birth to move on to the next birth. As a consequence of his deeds, man attains several stages of life, the highest being the Parampad which is his highest goal. Only through Karamayoga man can attain Parampad.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

Question 7.
Who gave the lesson contained in the Bhagvadgita and to whom? Of the three Yogas in the Gita, write about the Bhakti Yoga.
Answer:
The preachings given in the Bhagvadgita were given by Lord Krishna to Aijuna.

Bhaktiyoga : Bhaktiyoga is counted among the three main paths of the Gita. Bhakti is of several types :

  • Prapti Bhakti : It is a kind of bhakti in which the devotee comes with a pious heart in the shelter of God and gets detached from the materialistic elements,
  • Swarth Bhakti : Most of the bhakti in this world is purposeful. The reason for this is that some people resort to bhakti after they are hassled by troubles and they want to get rid of them,
  • Jnana Bhakti: Such bhagats deeply study the Shastras to fulfil their desire of knowledge and by God’s grace are able to attain true knowledge,
  • Nirguna Bhakti : This is a kind of bhakti in which God is considered omnipresent in all forms and thus he serves all the creatures.
  • Saguna Bhakti : In this kind of bhakti, the devotee with a pure heart pays devotion to the idol of his god.
  • Kirtan Bhakti : In this bhakti, the devotee constantly indulges in Kirtan in the name of God.
  • Shravana Bhakti : This type of bhakti is for the less educated. For this reason, they cannot deeply study the Shastras. Consequently, they listen to the sermons of Shastras from the others and tread on the path of bhakti. All these forms of bhakti are considered as a source of Mukti (salvation).

Question 8.
What do you mean by Dharma Shastras? Write a note on the main Dharma Shastras.
Or
Which subjects have been touched in Dharma Shastras? Explain.
Or
What is Dharma Shastra? Explain any one of the Dharma Shastra.
Or
What is Shastra? Give brief description of any Hindu Scripture (Shastra).
Or
Write a brief note on Hindu Scriptures (Shastras).
Or
Describe the main features of Shastras.
Or
Explain the importance of Dharma Shastras.
Or
Describe Dharma Shastras.
Answer:
The Dharma Shastras Eire ancient texts of the Hindus. These are also called Smritis. Of these Dharma Shastras, the most famous are Manu’s Dharma Shastra or Manu Smriti. Besides this, the Smritis composed by Yajnavalkaya, Vishnu and Narda are also important. The historians disagree on the period of the composition of the Dharma Shastras. The common view is that they were created between 1st B.C. and Ith B.C. These Dharma Shastras are composed in Sanskrit. In these, the Vishnu Sihriti is composed in prose whereas the rest of the three Dharma Shastras are written in the form of a poem.

These Dharma Shastras render light on the religious, social, political and economic regulations of ancient India explicitly. Consequently, these Dharma Shastras are a valuable source for us to know about the condition of the people of that time. A brief description of the main Dharma Shastras is as follows :

1. Manu Smriti : Manu Smriti is also known by the name Manu Samhita. It was composed by Manu. Manu is considered as the world’s first law giver. In his compositions, he has given important information about the origin of Dharma and its sources. It clearly defines the roles of the Brahmans, Kshatriyas, Vaishyas and Shudras. The Brahmanas occupied the highest position in society whereas the Shudras were considered the lowest. In it, human life is divided into four ashramas i.e. Brahmacharya, Grihastha, Vanaprastha and Sanyasa and the associated responsibilities and importance is also described in it.

In it, Manu has also described the rules that the kings should follow. According to this, the king should appoint a Council of Ministers to run the administration of the state. The king should least interfere in the local administration. Manu believed that we should respect and serve our parents, teachers and elders.

If they are angry with usr we should not lose our temper. Because we can never repay them for what they have done for us. A person who disrespects them should be fined with 100 pana. According to Manu, women should not be given the right to study the Vedas or the right to property. Their ideas should never be trusted. They should not be given freedom. He was in favour of early marriage. He opposed widow remarriage and Niyoga practices.

According to Manu, people should lead a simple and pious life. According to him, wicked and evil doers have to face several difficulties in hell. He was strictly against gambling. According to him, the government should fix the prices of goods. Besides these subjects, Manu has also given information about Yoga, Meditation, Transmigration and Moksha in his composition.

2. Yajnavalkya Smriti : Though Yajnavalkya Smriti is brief as compared to Manu Smriti but it is important in several aspects. The description in it is bound by principles and the language is lucid. It is considered to be composed between 100 B.C. and 300 B.C. Yajnavalkya Smriti is divided into three chapters. The first chapter deals with the values right from conception to marriage, the duties of a wife, the rights and duties of the four Vamas, the rules of charity, the rules for observing shradhas and the fruits of observing them, the appropriate qualities of a ruler and his ministers, judicial system and the penance for criminals and the tax system explicitly.

The second chapter gives the difference between Dharma Shastra and Artha Shastra. Rights to property, the rules relating to slavery, gambling, theft, rape, border disputes . are given in great details. The third chapter renders light on the last rites, period of sorrow, means of attaining purity, Atman, path to Moksha, evil doers, yogis, means to attain knowledge of the Atman, hell, objectives of remorse, killing of creatures etc.

The Yajnavalkya Smriti and Manu Smriti differ on certain issues. Manu on one hand has allowed a Brahmana to marry the daughter of a Shudra, on the other hand Yajnavalkya opposed it. Manu has criticised Niyoga whereas Yajnavalkya was in favour of it. Manu believed that the widows should have no right over property whereas Yajnavalkya was completely in favour of it. Manu was strictly against gambling whereas Yajnavalkya did not consider it bad. He was in favour of bringing it under the control of the government to obtain revenue. Yajnavalkya has provided important and useful information about biology and medical science in his Smriti.

3. Vishnu Smriti : This Smriti was composed between 100 A.D. and 300 A.D. It was written in the form of prose. In it some shlokas have been taken from Manu and Yajnavalkya’s Smritis. In Vishnu Smriti, the Aryan region has been described more explicitly than Manu Smriti. It covers almost the whole of India. It proves that during the period when Vishnu Smriti was composed, the Aryans had spread in the whole of India. The rulers were the focus of administration.

To expand their empires and protect their subjects was their prime duty. A Council of Ministers was appointed to help the king to run the administration efficiently, The ministers were appointed primarily on the basis of their abilities and loyalty towards the state. The smallest unit of administration was called Gram (village). To give fair justice to the subjects was the prime responsibility of the ruler. Vishnu Smriti gives a detailed description of the types of crimes and the punishments awarded for them.

The Manu Smriti describes that due to their highest position in society there should be no tax imposed on the Brahmans but the Vishnu Smriti favoured it. Vishnu Smriti was against gambling and considered it as a blot on society. It believed in the Varna system and Ashrama system prevalent in society. The Shudras too could become ascetics whereas according to the Manu Smriti they could not attain Sanyasa. During this period, the situation of women worsened.

This can be guaged from the fact that the Sati system began during this period. Vishnu Smriti emphasises on the fact that people should lead simple and pious life. They should not even speak to the crooked people. Vishnu Smriti also describes the coins namely yava, masha, swama, nishak, kishnal etc. It proves that trade at that time was not only conducted through the barter system but also by coins.

4. Narda Smriti : This Smriti was composed between 100. A.D. and 400 A.D. This Smriti has some shlokas from the Manu Smriti but it has its own qualities. The king appointed spies to keep him informed of the incidents of the kingdom. Kul, Shreni and Gana were institutions for social welfare. These institutions made their own policies and rules. The king interfered less in the internal affairs of these institutions. The Narda Smriti gives a detailed account of the judicial process of the state. The king was considered as the supreme justice of the state. His decisions were final.

If a thief was not caught, the king had to give an amount equivalent to the value of things lost from his treasury. Anyone who sheltered the thief or bought the stolen goods was considered equally guilty and deserved a punishment. Different punishments were awarded for different crimes. To be proved innocent, one had to go through seven tests which have been described in it.

Narda was in favour of bringing gambling under government control so that the government could earn some income from it. He was not in favour of a widow being given the property of her husband. He supported widow-remarriage and Niyoga traditions. He described the 15 kinds of slaves prevalent in society. Their duty was to serve the main three castes. They had no right to own property.

There was a system of partnership in business and the profit or loss was to be distributed proportionately among the partners. Narda has described the coins called dinar, pana and swama. He laid down some rules for the learning of students and artisAnswer:They had to go to the workshops of their masters to learn work. They could not leave their masters before the prescribed period of learning or else they were heavily penalised.

It is clear from the above mentioned description that the Dharma Shastras render great light on the various laws and traditions and customs. They are very important from historical point of view. Dr. R.C. Majumdar has aptly remarked, “The Dharma Shastras, also called Smritis, have played a very important part in Hindu life during the last two thousand years. Although the Vedas are regarded as the ultimate sources of dharma, in practice it is the Smriti works to which the Hindus all over India turn for the real exposition of religious duties and usages. They are also regarded as the only authentic sources of Hindu law and social customs.”

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

Question 9.
What is meant by Manu Smriti? What subjects have been discussed in it?
Or
What do you know about Manu Smriti? Explain.
Answer:
The Manu Smriti is counted^irst amongst the few in the Dharma Shastras. It is also called the Manava Dharma Shastra. It was composed between 200 B.G. and 200 A.D. There are 27,000 shlokas in it and there are 12 chapters in it. It is written in Sanskrit in poem form. Manu is considered to be the first law giver to the world. In his creation, Manu has thrown ample light on the religious, social, political and economic regulations of India, during the contemporary era. A brief description of these regulations is as given below :

1. Four Sources of Dharma : The biggest contribution of Manu towards Indian heritage is his information about the four sources of Dharma. According to him, Vedas are the first source of Dharma. They give the basic element to all the religions of the world. The second source is Smriti. Smriti implies all those things that are written on the basis of one’s memory power. Smriti is different from Shruti. Shruti includes those things which are directly heard from the Absolute.

Dharma Shastras come under Smriti and the Vedas come under Shruti. A person who obeys the laws given in the Shruti and Smriti, attains fame in one’s lifetime and becomes the recepient of extreme pleasure in the next birth. The third source is the recognised customs and traditions but they should be based on good behaviour. The fourth source is that which is followded by the Self but that too should be based on good behaviour.

2. Administrative Laws : The Manu Smriti renders a great significance to the role of the king. He was the chief of the state. He was considered to be a form of God. His main duty was to protect Dharma and his subjects. It was essential for his subjects to follow his orders. The king was absolute. He used to form a Council of Ministers comprising 7 or 8 ministers with the objective of running the administration properly. Mukhyamatya was the head of this council and he was usually a Brahmana.

It explicitly describes the capabilities of the ministers and their duties, rules of battle, taxes imposed by the king over his subjects. Manu was not in favour of imposing taxes on the Brahmanas. Even the handicapped were not taxed. For administrative convenience, every kingdom was divided into several administrative units. The smallest administrative unit was Gram (village) which was headed by the Gramini. The king hardly interfered in the local administration.

3. Judicial Administration : Manu contributed commendably towards the field of law. He was the first person who distinguished between the civil and criminal laws. He considered it to be the first duty of the king to give fair justice. The ruler established several courts in his kingdom. The Kul, Shreni and Gana were also given the right to establish their own courts. If not satisfied by the decision of the court, any appellant could plead before the ruler. Manu has described 18 types of crimes like default in repayment of loan, breach of trust, breaking one’s promise, stealth, robbery, defamation, succession relation, extra marital affairs, non-payment of dues, border disputes etc.

Different punishments have been fixed for different crimes. Manu was not in favour of awarding death sentence to the Brahmanas. To make the criminals commit their crimes, they were even made to go through a fire test or a water test. In brief, there was no branch of the modem law system that remained untouched by Manu.

4. Varna System : Manu was in favour of the*prevalent Varna system. According to him, the Brahmanas were bom out of the mouth of the Absolute, the Kshatryias emerged from his arms, the Vaishyas from the stomach and the Shudras from his feet. The Brahmanas had the highest position in society. Their main work was to study the Vedas and help others to study them, to perform yajnas for the benefit of others, giving and taking donations, to act as the judge and the chief advisor of the ruler. They were expected to lead a pious and simple life. The main work of the Kshatriyas was to protect people.

Besides this they had been asked to study the Vedas, perform yajnas and give gifts. The primary works of a Vaishya were trade- commerce, agriculture and cattle rearing. They too could study the Vedas. The work of the Shudras was to serve the above mentioned three castes selflessly. They were not allowed to study the Vedas.

5. The Four Ashramas : Considering human life span to be approximately of 100 years, Manu has divided it into 4 Ashramas of 25 years each. They were Brahmacharya Ashrama, Grihastha ashrama, Vanaprastha Ashrama and Sanyasa Ashrama. All these Ashramas were fixed for the above mentioned three castes. The first ashrma was Brahmacharya. In it a child attained knowledge from the age of 5 years to the age of 25 years. Grihastha Ashrama was from 25 to 50 years. In it man marries in order to
have children. He took complete responsibility of their rearing.

It was esssential for every family to have a son. Vanaprastha Asharma was from 50 to 75 years. In it a man left his home and went to the forest to lead the life of an ascetic. The fourth and the last ashrama was Sanyasa. It was from 75 to 100 years. In it a man lived like a Sanyasi and tried to attain salvation.

6. Views about Women: Manu was not in favour of giving independence to women. He was of the view that a woman should be taken care of by her father when unmarried, by her husband when married and by her sons if her husband dies. He said that women put men on the wrong path. He was not in favour of believing what women said. Manu had favoured child marriage. He said that women should get married between the age of 8 to 12 years. Manu opposed widow remarriage and the system of Niyoga.

According to Niyoga system, a widow could marry her brother-in-law to produce a son. Manu was not in favour of giving property rights to women. She could only obtain ‘Istree Dhan’ which she got with herself as dowry. Despite all the restrictions that were placed on women, Manu respected women greatly in the form of a housewife. He said, “God resides where women are respected, and if women are not respected, religious rites are futile”.

7. Some Other Views : Manu has advised people to lead a holy and pious life. He said that an evil person always lives in suffering. He considered liars as the greatest thieves. Such evil doers go straight to hell. He said that parents, teachers and elders should always be respected. Whoever does not do so, should be punished. Manu has also thrown light on the rules pertaining to commercial trade. In the words of A.A. MacDonell,“No work has enjoyed so great a reputation and authority, throughout India for centuries as the Manava Dharmashastra, also called the Manu Smriti.”

Question 10.
Write short notes on any two of the following :

  1. Puranas
  2. Upanishads
  3. Shastras.

Answer:
The Puranas are the ancient texts of the Hindus. The Purana means ancient. They have been written in Sanskrit. No definite period is given for their writing. These are not a creation of single century. They are described in the Atharvaveda, Upanishads and epics. There have been made changes in them from time to time and new chapters were added to them. The Puranas were given their final touch in the Gupta period. Hence the Puranas have been written by several writers.

The Puranas were called the Fifth Veda and the Shudras were given the permission to read them. The total number of Purans are 18. These Puranas have been divided into three parts. There Eire 6 PurEihas in each part and they Eire called Shiva, Vaishnava, and Brahman Pur ana.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

These parts are as follows :

1. Shiva Purana :

  • Vayu
  • Linga
  • Skanda
  • Agni
  • Matsya
  • Kurma.

2. Vaishnava Purana :

  • Vishnu
  • Bhagvata
  • Narada
  • Garuda
  • Padma.

3. Brahman Purana :

  • Brahman
  • Brahmand
  • Brahmavaivrata
  • Markandeya
  • Bhavishya and
  • Vamana.

The prevalent Vedic and Non-Vedic religious beliefs, myths and stories are compiled in the Puranas. Myths are those stories that have no proof, but they Eire very popular. Each Purana is divided into five parts. These parts are :

  1. Search: It describes about the creation of the world.
  2. Pratisarga: It gives a description about the development, destruction and recreation of the world.
  3. Vansh: It gives a description of the lineage of the famous kings and Rishis.
  4. Manzanar: It gives a description of the great battles fought on this earth and the important event in each of them.
  5. Vanshanucharita: It gives a description of the kings of great lineage and the feats of the Rishis.

What is worth remembering here is that we do not have the original Puranas with us. What we have with us today as the Puranas, may not necessarily have the. descriptions as per the above divisions. A brief description of the Puranas is as follows :

1. The Brahman Purana: It is also called the Adi Purana. It has 14,000 shlokas in it. Most of it describes the pilgramage places of India. Besides this, it also gives a description of Krishana, Rama, Surya, famous royal families, earth, hell,’ various castes and about Varna Ashrama system.

2. The Padma Purana: This is the biggest Purana. It has almost 55,000 shlokas in it. It describes the Srishti Khand, Bhumi KhEind, Swarga Khand and Pataal Khand. It gives a detailed description of the Vishnu Katha and Rama Katha. Besides these, this Purana also describes about the holy places and fasts. Several stories pertaining to myths Eire Eilso recorded in it.

3. The Vishnu Purana: This Purana has 23,000 shlokas in it.*It says that Vishnu is the supreme god. He alone has created the world and protects it. Famous among the stories given in it are the stories of Prahlad and Dhruva. It also describes the strange things about this world and the people of heaven. It gives a description of several famous lineages. In the fifth and last part, the various miraculous deeds of Krishna have been discussed.

4. The Vayu Purana : This Purana has 11,000 shlokas in it. It describes several stories associated with the glory of Shiva. For this reason, it is also called the Shiva Pursina. It describes several lineages. It has great historical importance because it is based on facts. It also gives the geographical description which is quite useful.

5. The Bhagvata Purana : Most popular among the Puranas associated with Lord Vishnu is the Bhagavata Purana. It gives a description of several stories associated with the life of Lord Krishna. It also says that Lord Buddha and the founder of Sankhya philosophy, Kapil are incarnations of Vishnu. This Purana is not very important from historical point of view.

6. The Narada Purana : This Purana consists of 25,000 shlokas. This Purana is related to the worship of Vishnu. It gives a detailed description of the prevalent education in ancient India. It does not give a description of the lineages.

7. The Markandeya Purana : There are 900 shlokas in this Purana. It gives a detailed description of the Vedic gods Indra, Surya and Agni etc. It also gives a description of several famous lineages.

8. The Agni Purana : This Purana has 15,400 shlokas. According to a belief, this Purana was narrated to Rishi Vashisht by Agni god himself. This Purana is associated with Shaivism. It throws ample light on several important subjects like war tactics, methods to perform the yajans, astrology, geography, law, grammar, medicine, fasts, donation, marriage etc. Undoubtedly, this Purana is like an encyclopaedia.

9. The Bhavishya Purana : This Purana has 14,000 shlokas in it. There are several stories related to the gods Brahma, Vishnu, Shiva and Surya. It also describes several ancient royal families and sages. Besides these, it also discusses several rituals which were performed at that time.

10. The Brahmavaivarta Purana : This Purana has 18,000 shlokas in it. This Purana tells Brahman as the creator of this universe. It gives a detailed description of Lord Krishna’s life. It also describes about Radha. In it, Ganesha has been called is an incarnation of Krishna.

11. The Linga Purana : This Purana has 11,000’shlokas in it. This Purana is associated with Shaivism. It describes about the incarnations of Shiva, fasts and holy places. It preaches to worship the linga as a form of Shiva.

12. The Varaha Purana: It has 10,700 shlokas in it. It giyes a detailed description of the worship of Vishnu in the incarnation of Varaha. It also gives a description related to Shiva, Durga and Ganesha.

13. The Skanda Purana : It was a large Purana. It describes 51,000 shlokas in it. This Purana is not available now. Information about it can be gathered from examples cited in the other texts. This Purana mainly describes about the worship of Shiva. Besides this, it gives useful information about the several holy places and temples of India.

14. The Vamana Purana : There are 10,000 shlokas in this Purana. Most of this Purana describes about the worship of gods like Shiva, Vishnu and Ganesha etc. It also describes several mythical stories.

15. The Kurina Purana : There are 18,000 shlokas in this Purana. It describes the worship of the Kurma incarnation of Vishnu. It gives a description of several mythical stories.

16. The Matsya Purana: It has 14,000 shlokas in it. This Purana is a conversation between a matsya (fish) and Manu. When this world was destroyed then this fish saved man. It gives a detailed description of several famous royal families. Besides these, there is a description of several fairs and pilgrimages.

17. The Garura Purana : There are 18,000 shlokas in this Parana. There is a description of the methods involved in the worhship of Vishnu. It gives important information about the yajnas, astrology, grammar, social science, physical education and ghosts and spirits. It gives detailed information about the last rites, sati system and pitra shradhs.

18. The Brahmanda Parana : There are 12,000 shlokas in this Pur ana. This Purana was read by Brahman. It gives a description about several dynasties and pilgramages. Importance of the Pur anas The Puranas present a detailed picture of the ancient Indian culture. The customs and traditions prevalent in Hinduism today are a gift of the Puranas. These Puranas throw ample light on the religious beliefs of the Hindus, the methods of worship of the gods and goddesses, fasts, shradhs, birth, marriage and rites performed at the time of death.

Idol worship and belief in incarnation is also a gift of the Puranas. These Puranas popularized the tradition of worship of forefathers further. People were inspired to donate. The description of the popular dynasties given in the Puranas proved to be quite useful historically.

The description of the pilgramages and temples gives us important infbrmation about the contemporary art. Besides these, the Puranas throw ample light on the social, economic and political condition of ancient India. Undoubtedly, it would be no exaggeration if the Puranas are called the encyclopaedia of Indian culture. Dr. R.C. Hazra has aptly remarked, “The Puranas have played a very important part in the life of the Hindus for more than two thousand years.

They have brought home to the common man the wisdom of the saints of the highest order without creating any discord. The authors of these works took every individual into consideration and made such prescriptions as would benefit him in.his social and religious life.”

The Upanishads are considered as the true origin of Indian philosophy. Upanishads are those texts which incorporate in them the spiritual knowledge of the „ world of highest order just as pearls are held together in a string. The lustre o’f these pearls helps to eradicate the inner darkness of a person and, he is illuminated to such an extent that it outshines the light of the even sun. It would be no exaggeration to say that the Upanishads are the prime source of Indian philosophy. The word Upanishad is made from a combination of three words. The word ‘Up’ means near, ‘Ni’ means devotion and ‘Shad’ means to sit. Thus the word Upanishad’ means sitting beside with complete devotion.

In fact, Upanishad is such knowledge which a guru gives to his students secretly. The Upanishads are also called Vedanta because they are considered to be consequential part of the Vedas. Vedanta means the last knowledge. This means that there is no knowledge beyond or after Upanishads. The Upanishads were composed by different sages between 1000 B.C. and 300 B.C. The total number of all Upanishads is 108. Upanishads like Isha, Kena, Prashna, Mundaka, Taittiriya, Aitareya, Chhandogya, Brihadaranyaka Shvetashvatara, Kaushitaki and Katha are considered the most important. The main teachings of the Upanishads are as follows :

1. Nature of Self : The word Self has been frequently used in the Upanishads because it is considered as the ultimate source of all knowledge. Self is the omnipresent living element. This element forms the basic foundation of all elements. This assumes a living form and resides in the hearts of all people. This is Brahman or the Atman (Absolute). For this reason, the Self is considered as the source of all light. According to the Upanishads, the Self is the only element about which there is no doubt. The Self is the determined strength. It is not transitory. It itself forms the basis of all transitory elements. For this reason, it is unchanging itself.

2. Nature of the Absolute : The word ‘Brahman’ is derived from an element of Sanskrit language called ‘Briha’ which means to grow or to proceed. From philosophical point of view, Brahman is an element which led to the creation of the visible world. Brahman is considered as an epitome of the power of man and nature. He is the master of unlimited powers because he himself is boundless. He is all pervading and the light of all lights. Despite being the basis of all virtues it is called Nirguna. He is the source of complete knowledge. It is impossible to describe his knowledge in words. Undoubtedly, he is the basic cause and foundation of the entire world.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

3. Identity of Self and the Absolute : The sages have considered the Self and Brahman as a single entity in the Upanishads. They were considered as one basic element. For this reason, in the Upanishads, the words Self and the Absolute are used interchangeably at- several places. The distinction is only in words but not in meaning or element. There is only one primary element. He is sometimes called Self and sometimes called the Absolute. Just as a river joins the sea, so does the Self sublime with the Parmatman. Because the Self and the Absolute are one, therefore they cannot be differentiated. In brief, the Upanishadic philosophy looks like an ocean in a drop.

4. Creation of the World : There are several instances of the description of the creation of the world in the Upanishads. It tells that Brahman (the Absolute) created the world. Prior to the creation of the world, Brahman was present in its own Self. Then Brahman decided to express Himself in various forms. In this manner, began the creation of the world.

5. Belief in Karma Theory : The Upanishads believed in the Karma Theory. According to this, each person had to pay for his deeds (Karmas). The fruits of the deeds of the previous birth would have to be borne during the present birth. The fruits of the deeds of this birth would be borne in the next birth. The joys and sufferings of our lives depend upon our own deeds. Hence we should always indulge in good deeds and keep a distance from evil deeds. It is due to one’s ill deeds that a man gets separated from the Parmatman and continues to be a part of the vicious circle of transmigration.

6. Moral Virtues : The Upanishads have greatly emphasised on moral virtues. It is only when one adopts the moral virtues then he can swim across the ocean of this life. These virtues are :

  • Always speak the truth.
  • Love all beings.
  • Think of others’ misery as one’s own.
  • Keep distance from pride, greed and evil thinking,
  • Do not indulge in stealing or robbing,
  • Obey the tenets of religion.
  • Do not show laxity towards the study of the Vedas, education, deities and forefathers,
  • Be sincere towards social welfare,
  • Respect your guru.

7. Maya : The Upanishads have thrown ample light on the principle of Maya. The world and its elements have been referred to as Maya. Ignorant men run after the attractive elements of this world. To acquire them, they do not hesitate to use even the worst meAnswer:Maya veils one’s intelligence and renders man to be trapped in the cycle of transmigration. An intelligent man understands the mystery of Maya and so does not fall a prey to this vicious Maya. Only such persons attain salvation (Moksha).

8. Moksha : The attainment of Moksha is the prime objective of a man’s life. Through Karma, a man is subjected to the sufferings of transmigration. The Atman inside the body is the partner to all joys and sufferings. Till the time, the Atman is trapped in the body, it cannot free itself of joys and sufferings. Ignorance is the prime cause of all bonds of man. When this ignorance is destroyed, man is freed from all bonds and he attains salvation.

Moksha is the last step of ladder of man’s knowledge upon reaching there, he achieves all. Nothing supersedes the joy of attaining Moksha. According to the Upanishads, Moksha can be attained only through knowledge. The famous historian Dr. S.N. Sen has aptly remarked, “The Upanishads are rich in deep philosophical content and are the bed¬rock on which all the latter philosophical development rests.”

The Dharma Shastras Eire ancient texts of the Hindus. These are also called Smritis. Of these Dharma Shastras, the most famous are Manu’s Dharma Shastra or Manu Smriti. Besides this, the Smritis composed by Yajnavalkaya, Vishnu and Narda are also important. The historians disagree on the period of the composition of the Dharma Shastras. The common view is that they were created between 1st B.C. and Ith B.C. These Dharma Shastras are composed in Sanskrit. In these, the Vishnu Sihriti is composed in prose whereas the rest of the three Dharma Shastras are written in the form of a poem.

These Dharma Shastras render light on the religious, social, political and economic regulations of ancient India explicitly. Consequently, these Dharma Shastras are a valuable source for us to know about the condition of the people of that time. A brief description of the main Dharma Shastras is as follows :

1. Manu Smriti : Manu Smriti is also known by the name Manu Samhita. It was composed by Manu. Manu is considered as the world’s first law giver. In his compositions, he has given important information about the origin of Dharma and its sources. It clearly defines the roles of the Brahmans, Kshatriyas, Vaishyas and Shudras. The Brahmanas occupied the highest position in society whereas the Shudras were considered the lowest. In it, human life is divided into four ashramas i.e. Brahmacharya, Grihastha, Vanaprastha and Sanyasa and the associated responsibilities and importance is also described in it.

In it, Manu has also described the rules that the kings should follow. According to this, the king should appoint a Council of Ministers to run the administration of the state. The king should least interfere in the local administration. Manu believed that we should respect and serve our parents, teachers and elders.

If they are angry with usr we should not lose our temper. Because we can never repay them for what they have done for us. A person who disrespects them should be fined with 100 pana. According to Manu, women should not be given the right to study the Vedas or the right to property. Their ideas should never be trusted. They should not be given freedom. He was in favour of early marriage. He opposed widow remarriage and Niyoga practices.

According to Manu, people should lead a simple and pious life. According to him, wicked and evil doers have to face several difficulties in hell. He was strictly against gambling. According to him, the government should fix the prices of goods. Besides these subjects, Manu has also given information about Yoga, Meditation, Transmigration and Moksha in his composition.

2. Yajnavalkya Smriti : Though Yajnavalkya Smriti is brief as compared to Manu Smriti but it is important in several aspects. The description in it is bound by principles and the language is lucid. It is considered to be composed between 100 B.C. and 300 B.C. Yajnavalkya Smriti is divided into three chapters. The first chapter deals with the values right from conception to marriage, the duties of a wife, the rights and duties of the four Vamas, the rules of charity, the rules for observing shradhas and the fruits of observing them, the appropriate qualities of a ruler and his ministers, judicial system and the penance for criminals and the tax system explicitly.

The second chapter gives the difference between Dharma Shastra and Artha Shastra. Rights to property, the rules relating to slavery, gambling, theft, rape, border disputes . are given in great details. The third chapter renders light on the last rites, period of sorrow, means of attaining purity, Atman, path to Moksha, evil doers, yogis, means to attain knowledge of the Atman, hell, objectives of remorse, killing of creatures etc.

The Yajnavalkya Smriti and Manu Smriti differ on certain issues. Manu on one hand has allowed a Brahmana to marry the daughter of a Shudra, on the other hand Yajnavalkya opposed it. Manu has criticised Niyoga whereas Yajnavalkya was in favour of it. Manu believed that the widows should have no right over property whereas Yajnavalkya was completely in favour of it. Manu was strictly against gambling whereas Yajnavalkya did not consider it bad. He was in favour of bringing it under the control of the government to obtain revenue. Yajnavalkya has provided important and useful information about biology and medical science in his Smriti.

3. Vishnu Smriti : This Smriti was composed between 100 A.D. and 300 A.D. It was written in the form of prose. In it some shlokas have been taken from Manu and Yajnavalkya’s Smritis. In Vishnu Smriti, the Aryan region has been described more explicitly than Manu Smriti. It covers almost the whole of India. It proves that during the period when Vishnu Smriti was composed, the Aryans had spread in the whole of India. The rulers were the focus of administration.

To expand their empires and protect their subjects was their prime duty. A Council of Ministers was appointed to help the king to run the administration efficiently, The ministers were appointed primarily on the basis of their abilities and loyalty towards the state. The smallest unit of administration was called Gram (village). To give fair justice to the subjects was the prime responsibility of the ruler. Vishnu Smriti gives a detailed description of the types of crimes and the punishments awarded for them.

The Manu Smriti describes that due to their highest position in society there should be no tax imposed on the Brahmans but the Vishnu Smriti favoured it. Vishnu Smriti was against gambling and considered it as a blot on society. It believed in the Varna system and Ashrama system prevalent in society. The Shudras too could become ascetics whereas according to the Manu Smriti they could not attain Sanyasa. During this period, the situation of women worsened.

This can be guaged from the fact that the Sati system began during this period. Vishnu Smriti emphasises on the fact that people should lead simple and pious life. They should not even speak to the crooked people. Vishnu Smriti also describes the coins namely yava, masha, swama, nishak, kishnal etc. It proves that trade at that time was not only conducted through the barter system but also by coins.

4. Narda Smriti : This Smriti was composed between 100. A.D. and 400 A.D. This Smriti has some shlokas from the Manu Smriti but it has its own qualities. The king appointed spies to keep him informed of the incidents of the kingdom. Kul, Shreni and Gana were institutions for social welfare. These institutions made their own policies and rules. The king interfered less in the internal affairs of these institutions. The Narda Smriti gives a detailed account of the judicial process of the state. The king was considered as the supreme justice of the state. His decisions were final.

If a thief was not caught, the king had to give an amount equivalent to the value of things lost from his treasury. Anyone who sheltered the thief or bought the stolen goods was considered equally guilty and deserved a punishment. Different punishments were awarded for different crimes. To be proved innocent, one had to go through seven tests which have been described in it.

Narda was in favour of bringing gambling under government control so that the government could earn some income from it. He was not in favour of a widow being given the property of her husband. He supported widow-remarriage and Niyoga traditions. He described the 15 kinds of slaves prevalent in society. Their duty was to serve the main three castes. They had no right to own property.

There was a system of partnership in business and the profit or loss was to be distributed proportionately among the partners. Narda has described the coins called dinar, pana and swama. He laid down some rules for the learning of students and artisAnswer:They had to go to the workshops of their masters to learn work. They could not leave their masters before the prescribed period of learning or else they were heavily penalised.

It is clear from the above mentioned description that the Dharma Shastras render great light on the various laws and traditions and customs. They are very important from historical point of view. Dr. R.C. Majumdar has aptly remarked, “The Dharma Shastras, also called Smritis, have played a very important part in Hindu life during the last two thousand years. Although the Vedas are regarded as the ultimate sources of dharma, in practice it is the Smriti works to which the Hindus all over India turn for the real exposition of religious duties and usages. They are also regarded as the only authentic sources of Hindu law and social customs.”

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

Short Answer Type Questions (Type 1):

Question 1.
Describe the salient features of Puranas Literature in brief but meaningful.
Or
What is meant by Puranas?
Answer:
The Puranas are the ancient texts of the Hindus. The Purana means ancient, ’hey have been written in Sanskrit. There have been made changes in them from me to time and new chapters were added to them. Hence the Puranas have been itten by several writers. The Puranas were called the Fifth Veda and the Shudras re given the permission to read them. The total number of Purans are 18. These Puranas have been divided into three parts. There are six Puranas in each part and they are called Shiva, Vaishnava and Brahman Purana.

Question 2.
What is discussed in the Puranas?
Answer:
The prevalent Vedic and Non-Vedic religious beliefs, myths and stories are compiled in the Puranas. Each Purana is divided into five parts. These parts are :

  • Sarga : It describes about the creation of the world.
  • Pratisarga : It gives a description about the development, destruction and recreation of the world.
  • Vansh : It gives a description of the lineage of the famous kings and Rishis.
  • Manvantar : It gives a description of the great battles fought on this earth and the important event in each of them.
  • Vanshanucharita : It gives a description of the kings of great lineage and the feats of the Rishis.

Question 3.
Describe in brief but meaningfully the two popular Puranas.
Answer:

  • The Brahman furana : It is also called the Adi Purana. It has 14,000 shlokas in it. Most of it describes the pilgrimage places of India. Besides this, it also gives a description of Krishna, Rama, Surya, famous royal families, earth, hell, various castes, Varna Ashrama system and about Shradhs.
  • The Padma Purana : This is the biggest Purana. It has almost 55,000 shlokas in it. It describes the Srishti Khand, Bhumi Khand, Swarga Khand and Pataal Khand. It gives a detailed description of the Vishnu Katha and Rama Katha. Besides these, this Purana also describes about the holy places and fasts.

Question 4.
Describe the importance of Puranas Literature.
Answer:
The Puranas present a detailed picture of the ancient Indian culture. The customs and traditions prevalent in Hinduism today are a gift of the Puranas. These Puranas throw ample light on the religious beliefs of the Hindus, the methods of worship of the gods and goddesses, fasts, shradhas, birth, marriage and rites performed at the time of death. Idol worship and belief in incarnation is also a gift of the Puranas. These Puranas popularized the tradition of worship of forefathers further. People were inspired to donate. The description of the popular dynasties given in the Puranas proved to be quite useful historically.

Question 5.
What do you mean by the Upanishads?
Answer:
The Upanishads are those texts which describe knowledge. They are 108 in number and they were composed by different hermits between 550 B.C. to 100 B.C. These throw light on the indepth spiritual subjects. These try to tell what soul is and what is its relation to the Supreme Soul. They have tried to solve severa mysteries pertaining to life and death.

Question 6.
What is the nature of Self and Absolute according to the Upanishads?
Answer:

  • Nature of Self: The word Self has been frequently used in the Upanisha because it is considered as the ultimate source of all knowledge. Self is the omniorese living element. This element forms the basic foundation of all elements. This assumes a living form and resides in the hearts of all people.
  • Nature of the Absolute : The word ‘Brahman’ is derived from an element of Sanskrit language called ‘Briha’ which means to grow or to proceed. From philosophical point of view, Brahman is an element which led to the creation of the visible world. Brahman is considered as an epitome of the power of man and nature. He is the master of unlimited powers because he himself is boundless. He is all pervading and the light of all lights.

Question 7.
According to Upanishads ‘Brahma’ is formless. Elucidate.
Or
According to Upanishads Brahma is the creator of Universe. Discuss.
Answer:
Brahman is considered as an epitome of the power of man and nature. He is the master of unlimited powers because he himself is boundless. He is all pervading and the light of all lights. Despite being the basis of all virtues it is called Nirguna. He is the source of complete knowledge. It is impossible to describe his knowledge in words. Undoubtedly, he is the basic cause and foundation of the entire world.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

Question 8.
What is meant by Moksha according to the Upanishads?
Answer:
According to the Upanishads, the attainment of Moksha is the prime objective of a man’s life. Through Karma, a man is subjected to the sufferings of transmigration. The Atman inside the body is the partner to all joys and” sufferings. Till the time, the Atman is trapped in the body, it cannot free itself of joys and sufferings. Ignorance is the prime cause of all bonds of man. When this ignorance is destroyed, man is freed from all bonds and he attains salvation. –

Question 9.
Write a short note on Bhagvadgita.
Answer:
The Bhagvadgita is one of the sacred texts of the Hindus. The Bhagvadgita is a part of the Mahabharata. It is more popularly known by the name Gita. There are 18 chapters and 700 shlokas in it. The sermon of Gita was given by Lord Krishna to Arjuna before the battle of Mahabharata began. The ideas of Gita have a magical impact on the common people. It is for this reason, that the Gita is dear to all the Hindus even today. It gives a simple solution in clear words to all the problems of human life.

Question 10.
Write a short note on the Karmayoga.
Answer:
Karamyoga is a famous principle of the Gita. No creature can spend a single moment without Karma. A person who is able to control his senses and works selflessly is called Karamayogi and those persons who fall a victim to their senses and works to show off are called hypocrite. Except Karamayoga (Karma which does not desire of my fruits), the rest are all full of bonds. Hence, the Gita inspires a man to be a laramayogi. Acce ding to the Gita, every Karma bears fruit which has to be borne by e person. It is never possible that a person performs an action and escapes its fruit.

Question 11.
What do you mean by Jnanayoga?
Answer:
According to the Bhagvadgita, the fire of knowledge reduces all the bonds of Karma to ashes. For this reason, there is no purer a thing than knowledge in this world. This knowledge is not limited to the knowledge of ordinary elements. It actually means pure knowledge of the Soul. This is called Jnanayoga. Knowledge is the best way to attain salvation because knowledge sets the seed of Karma on fire and a burnt seed cannot give rebirth to a plant.

Question 12.
What are the Dharma Shastras?
Answer:
The Dharma Shastras are ancient texts of the Hindus. Of these Dharma Shastras, the most famous are Manu’s Dharma Shastra or Manu Smriti. Besides this, the Smritis composed by Yajnavalkaya, Vishnu and Narda are also important. These Dharma Shastras are composed in Sanskrit.

Short Answer Type Questions (Type-2):

Question 1.
Describe the salient features of Puranas Literature in brief but meaningful.
Or
What is meant by Puranas?
Answer:
The Puranas are the ancient texts of the Hindus. The Pur ana means ancient. They have been written in Sanskrit. No definite period is given for their writing. These are not a creation of any single century. They are described in the Atharvaveda, Upanishads and epics. There have been made changes in them from time to time and new chapters were added to them. The Puranas were given their final touch in the Gupta period. Hence the Puranas have been written by several writers. The Puranas were called the Fifth Veda and the Shudras were given the permission to read them. The total number of Purans are 18. These Puranas have been divided into three parts. There are six Puranas in each part and they are called Shiva, Vaishnava and Brahman Purana.

These parts are as follows :

(1) Shiva Purana :

  • Vayu
  • Linga
  • Skanda
  • Agni
  • Matsya
  • Kurina.

(2) Vaishnava Purana :

  • Vishnu
  • Bhagvata
  • Narada
  • Garura
  • Padma.

(3) Brahman Purana :

  • Brahman
  • Brahmand
  • Brahmavaivrata
  • Markandeya
  • Bhavishya
  • Vamana.

Question 2.
What is discussed in the Puranas?
Answer:
The prevalent Vedic and Non-Vedic religious beliefs, myths and stories are compiled in the Puranas. Myths are those stories of which there is no proof, but they are very popular. Each Purana is divided into five parts. These parts are :

  • Sarga : It describes’ about the creation of the world.
  • Pratisarga : It gives a description about the development, destruction and recreation of the world.
  • Vansh : It gives a description of the lineage of the famous kings and Rishis.
  • Manvantar : It gives a description of the great battles fought on this earth and the important event in each of them.
  • Vanshanucharita : It gives a description of the kings of great lineage and the feats of the Rishis.

What is worth remembering here is that we do not have the original Puranas with us. What we have with us today as the Puranas, may not necessarily have the descriptions as per the above divisions.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

Question 3.
Give a brief account of any five Puranas.
Answer:
(1) The Brahman Purana : It is also called the Adi Purana. It has 14,000 shlokas in it. Most of it describes the pilgrimage places of India. Besides this, it also gives a description of Krishna, Rama, Surya, famous royal families, earth, hell, various castes, Varna Ashrama system and about Shradhs.

(2) The Padma Purana : This is the biggest Purana. It has almost 55,000 shlokas in it. It describes the Srishti Khand, Bhumi Khand, Swarga Khand and Pataal Khand. It gives a detailed description of the Vishnu Katha and Rama Katha. Besides these, this Purana also describes about the holy places and fasts.

(3) The Vishnu Purana : This Purana has 23,000 shlokas in it. It says that Vishnu is the supreme god. He alone has created the world and protects it. It also describes the strange things about this world and the people of heaven. It gives a description of several famous lineages.

(4) The Vayu Purana : This Purana has 11,000 shlokas in it. It describes several stories associated with the glory of Shiva. For this reason, it is also called the Shiva Purana. It describes several lineages. It has great historical importance.

(5) The Bhagvata Purana : Most popular among the Puranas associated with Lord Vishnu is the Bhagavata Purana. It gives a description of several stories associated with the life of Lord Krishna.

Question 4.
Describe the importance of Puranas Literature.
Or
What are the main features of Puranas literature?
Or
Puranas are very important in Hinduisim. Discuss.
Answer:
The Puranas present a detailed picture of the ancient Indian culture. The customs and traditions prevalent in Hinduism today are a gift of the Puranas. These Puranas throw ample light on the religious beliefs of the Hindus, the methods of worship of the gods and goddesses, fasts, shradhas, birth, marriage and rites performed at the time of death. Idol worship and belief in incarnation is also a gift of the Puranas. These Puranas popularized the tradition of worship of forefathers further. People were inspired to donate.

The description of the popular dynasties given in the Purana?’ proved to be quite useful historically. The description of the pilgrimages and temples gives us important information about the contemporary art. Besides these, the Puranas throw ample light on the social, economic and political condition of ancient India. Undoubtedly, it would be no exaggeration if the Puranas are called the encyclopaedia of Indian culture.

Question 5.
What do you mean by the Upanishads?
Or
Describe the name of five Upanishads and their importance.
Or
Give informations about Upanishads literature.
Answer:
The Upanishads are those texts which describe knowledge. Since they are the last part of the Vedas, they are also called the Vedanta. They are 108 in number and they were composed by different hermits between 1000-500 B.C. These throw light on the indepth spiritual subjects. These try to tell what soul is and what is its relation to the Supreme Soul. They have tried to solve several mysteries pertaining to life and death. They throw ample light on subjects like Karma, Moksha, Maya and Transmigration. Dr. S.R. Goyal has rightly said, “The Upanishadic philosophy is rightly regarded as the source of all Indian Philosophy.”

Question 6.
What is the nature of Self and Absolute according to the Upanishads?
Answer:
1. Nature of Self: The word Self has been frequently used in the Upanishads because it is considered as the ultimate source of all knowledge. Self is the omnipresent living element. This element forms the basic foundation of all elements. This assumes a living form and resides in the hearts of all people. This is Brahman or the Parmatman
Or
According to Upanishads Brahma is the creator of Universe. Discuss.
Answer:
The word ‘Brahman’ is derived from an element of Sanskrit language called ‘Briha’ which means to grow or to proceed. From philosophical point of view, Brahman is an element which led to the creation of the visible world. Brahman is considered as an epitome of the power of man and nature. He is the master of unlimited powers because he himself is boufidless. He is all pervading and the light of all lights. Despite being the basis of all virtues it is called Nirguna. He is the source of complete knowledge. It is impossible to describe his knowledge in words. Undoubtedly, he is the basic Cause and foundation of the entire world.

Question 8.
What do you know about the Doctrine of Five Layers?
Answer:
To understand the form of Self, the Taittiriya Upanishad gives the Doctrine of the Five Layers. These five layers are :

  1. Annamayi Kosh : It is a non-living and lifeless element. It comes at a materialistic level.
  2. Pranmayi Kosh : It comes at a living level. It includes all flora and fauna.
  3. Manomayi Kosh : It comes at a stage of consciousness. It is the objective of life.
  4. Vigyanmayi Kosh : It is at a level of self consciousness. In it consciousness develops logical intellect.
  5. Anandmayi Kosh : It is the true level of the Self. It destroys the spirit of diversity and differentiation.

The first four layers become a part of this pleasure (Anand) which is the last stage of their development. Hence the Doctrine of Five Layers proves that the Self is pure, living form of pleasure.

Question 9.
What is meant by Moksha according to the Upanishads?
Answer:
According to the Upanishads, the attainment of Moksha is the prime objective of a man’s life. Through Karma, a man is subjected to the sufferings of transmigration. The Atman inside the body is the partner to all joys and sufferings. Till the time, the Atman is trapped in the body, it cannot free itself of joys and sufferings. Ignorance is the prime cause of all bonds of man. When this ignorance is destroyed, man is freed from all bonds and he attains salvation. Moksha is the last step of ladder of man’s knowledge. Upon reaching there he achieves all. Nothing supersedes the joy of attaining Moksha. According to the Upanishads, Moksha can be attained only through knowledge.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

Question 10.
Write a short note on Bhagvadgita.
Answer:
The Bhagvadgita is one of the sacred texts of the Hindus. The Bhagvadgita is a part of the Mahabharata. It is more poularly known by the name Gita. There are 18 chapters and 700 shlokas in it.

The sermon of Gita was given by Lord Krishna to Arjuna before the battle of Mahabharata began. The ideology imparted by Gita was usually beyond the comprehension of the common man. The ideas of Gita have a magical impact on the common people. It is for this reason, that the Gita is dear to all the Hindus even today. It gives a simple solution in clear words to all the problems of human life. The Gita does not suggest any one way of life for the attainment of salvation.

It says that if every man’s behaviour is different from the other, then there ought to be different ways of reaching one’s ultimate goal. There are three ways of doing this : Karamayoga, Bhaktiyoga and Jnanayoga. A man chooses his own path of life according to this nature and interest.

Question 11.
Write a short note on the Karmayoga.
Answer:
Karamyoga is a famous principle of the Gita. No creature can spend a single moment without Karma. A person who is able to control his senses and works selflessly is called Karamayogi and those persons who fall a victim to their senses and works to show off are called hypocrite. Except Karamayoga .(Karma which does not desire if any fruits), the rest are all, full of bonds. Hence, the Gita inspires a man to be ,a Karamayogi. According to the Gita, every Karma bears fruit which has to be borne by the person. It is never possible that a person performs an action and escapes its fruit.

It is an inevitable principle. The fruits of one’s deeds lead one into the vicious circle of transmigration. He bears the sufferings of fruit of the deeds of the previous birth and through new deeds, gathers the fruits of this birth to move on to the next birth. As a consequence of his deeds, man attains several stages of life, the highest being the Parampad which is his highest goal. Only the Karamyoga can help man attain Parampad.

Question 12.
Give a brief account of the Bhaktiyoga.
Answer:
Bhaktiyoga is counted among the three main paths of the Gita. Bhakti is of several types :

(1) Prapti Bhakti : It is a kind of bhakti in which the devotee comes with a pious heart in the shelter of God and gets detached from the materialistic elements,

(2) Swarth Bhakti : Most of the bhakti in this world is purposeful. The reason for this is that some people resort to bhakti after they are hassled by troubles and they want to get rid of them.

(3) Jnana Bhakti: Such bhagats deeply study the Shastras to fulfil their desire of knowledge and by God’s grace are able to attain true knowledge.

(4) Nirguna Bhakti: This is a kind of bhakti in which God is considered omnipresent in all forms and thus. He serves all the creatures,

(5) Saguna Bhakti: In this kind of bhakti, the devotee with a pure heart pays devotion to the idol of his god.

(6) Kirtan Bhakti : In this bhakti, the devotee constantly indulges in Kirtan in the name of God.

(7) Shravana Bhakti: This type of bhakti is for the less educated. For this reason, they cannot deeply study the Shastras. Consequently, they listen to the sermons of Shastras from the others and tread on the path of bhakti. All these forms of bhakti are considered as a source of Mukti (salvation).

Question 13.
What do you mean by Jnanayoga?
Answer:
According to the Bhagvadgita, the fire of knowledge reduces all the bonds of Karma to ashes. For this reason, there is no purer a thing than knowledge in this world. This knowledge is not limited to the knowledge of ordinary elements. It actually means pure knowledge of the Soul. This is called Jnanayoga. Of Karmayoga, Bhaktiyoga and Jnanayoga, Jnanayoga receives prominence because without the knowledge of the Soul, a man can neither be a true Karamayogi nor can he be a true devotee.

After attaining human form, the creature who is not able to attain the knowledge of the Soul can never attain freedom from the bondage of cycle of Karma. Knowledge is the best way to attain salvation because knowledge sets the seed of Karma on fire and a burnt seed cannot give rebirth to a plant.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

Question 14.
Describe in brief but meaningful the salient features of Dharma Shastras.
Or
What are the Dharma Shastras?
Or
Describe Dharma Shastras.
Or
Describe the importance of Shastra literature.
Answer:
The Dharma Shastras are ancient texts of the Hindus. These are also called Smritis. Of these Dharma Shastras, the most famous are Manu’s Dharma Shastra or Manu Smriti. Besides this, the Smritis composed by Yajnavalkaya, Vishnu and Narda are also important. The historians disagree on the period of the composition of the Dharma Shastras. The common view is that they were created between 1st B.C. and 5th B.C. These Dharma Shastras are composed in Sanskrit.

In these, the Vishnu Smriti is composed in prose whereas the rest of the three Dharma Shastras are written in the form of a poem. These Dharma Shastras render light on the religious, social, political and economic regulations of ancient India explicitly. Consequently, these Dharma Shastras are a valuable source for us to know about the condition of the people of that time.

Question 15.
Write a short note on the Manu Smriti.
Or
Give information about Manu Smriti.
Answer:
Manu Smriti is also known by the name Manu Samhita. It was composed by Manu. Manu is considered as the world’s first law giver. In his compositions, he has given important information about the origin of Dharma and its sources. It clearly defines the roles of the Brahmanas, Kshatriyas, Vaishyas and Shudras. The Brahmanas occupied the highest position in society whereas the Shudras were considered the lowest. In it, human life is divided into four ashramas i.e. Brahmacharya, Grihastha, Vanaprastha and Sanyasa and the associated responsibilities and importance is also described in it.

In it, Manu has also described the rules that the kings should follow. According to this, the king should appoint a Council of Ministers to run the administration of the state. The king should least interfere in the local administration. Manu believed that we should respect and serve our parents, teachers and elders. If they are angry with us, we should not lose our temper. Because we can never repay them for what they have done for us. According to Manu, women should not be given the right to study the Vadas or the right to property.

Question 16.
What do you mean by the Four Ashramas?
Answer:
Considering human life span to be approximately 100 years, Manu has divided it into four Ashramas of 25 years each. They were Brahmacharya Ashrama, Grihastha ashrama, Vanaprastha Ashrama and Sanyasa Ashrama. All these Ashramas were fixed for the above mentioned three castes. The first ashrma was Brahmacharya. In it a child attained knowledge from the age of 5 years to the age of 25 years. Grihastha Ashrama was from 25 to 50 years.

In it man indulged in marriage to produce children. He took complete responsibility of their rearing. It was essential for every family to have a son. Vanaprastha Asharma was from 50 to 75 years. In it a man left his home and went to the forest to lead the life of an ascetic. The fourth and the last ashrama was Sanyasa. It was from 75 to 100 years. In it a man lived like a Sanyasi and tried to attain salvation.

Question 17.
What views are given about women in’Manu Smriti?
Answer:
Manu was not in favour of giving independence to women. He was of the view that a woman should be taken care of by her father when unmarried, by her husband when married and by her sons once her husband dies. ‘He said that women put men on the wrong path. He was not in favour of believing what women said. Manu had favoured child marriage. He said that women should get married between the age 8 to 12 years. Manu opposed widow remarriage and the system of Niyoga. According to Niyoga system, a widow could marry her brother-in-law to produce a son.

Manu was not in favour of giving property rights to women. She could only obtain Tstree Dhan’ which she got with herself as dowry. Despite all the restrictions that were placed on women, Manu respected women greatly in the form of a housewife. He said, “God resides where women are respected, where women are not respected, religious rites are futile”.

Question 18.
What do you know about Yajnavalkya Smriti?
Answer:
Though Yajnavalkya Smriti is brief as compared to Manu Smriti but it is important in several aspects. The description in it is bound by principal and the language is lucid. It is considered to be composed between 100 B.C. and 300 B.C. Yajnavalkya Smriti is divided into three chapters. The first chapter deals with the values right from conception to marriage, the duties of a wife, the rights and duties of the four Varnas, the rules of charity, the rules for observing shradhas and the fruits of observing them, the appropriate qualities of a ruler and his ministers, judicial system and the penance for criminals and the tax system explicitly.

The second chapter gives the difference between Dharma Shastra and Artha Shastra, rights to property, the rules relating slavery, gambling, theft, rape, border disputes in great details. The third chapter renders light on the last rites, period of sorrow, means of attaining purity, Soul, path to Moksha, evil doers, yogis, means to attain knowledge of the Soul, hell, objectives of remorse, killing of creatures etc.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

Question 19.
Write a short note on the Vishnu Smriti.
Answer:
The Vishnu Smriti was composed between 100 A.D. and 300 A.D. It was written in the form of prose. In it some shalokas have been taken from Manu and Yajnavalkya’s Smritis. In Vishnu Smriti, the Aryan region has been described more explicitly than Manu Smriti. It covers almost the whole of India. It proves that during the period when Vishnu Smriti was composed, the Aryans had spread in the whole of India. The rulers were the focus of administration. To expand their empires and to protect their subjects was their prime duty. A Council of Ministers were appointed to help the king to run the administration efficiently. The ministers were appointed primarily on the basis of their abilities and loyalty towards the state.

The smallest unit of administration was called Gram (village). To give fair justice to the subjects was a prime responsibility of the ruler. Vishnu Smriti gives a detailed description of the types of crimes and the punishments awarded for them. Vishnu Smriti was against gambling and considered it as a blot on society. It believed in the Varna system and Ashrama system prevalent in sociey. During this period, the situation of women worsened. This can be guaged from the fact that the Sati system began during this period.

Question 20.
What do you know about the Narda Smriti?
Answer:
This Smriti was composed between 100 A.D„,and 400 A.D. This Smriti has some shlokas from the Manu Smriti but it has its own qualities. The king appointed spies to keep him informed of the incidents of the kingdom. Kul, Shreni and Gana were institutions for social welfare. These institutions made their own policies and rules. The king interfered less in the internal affairs of these institutions. The Narda Smriti gives a detailed account of the judicial process of the state. The king was considered as the supreme justice of the state. His decisions were final.

If a thief was not caught, the king had to give an amount equivalent to the value of things lost from his treasury. Anyone who sheltered the thief or bought the stolen goods was considered equally guilty and deserved a punishment. Different punishments were awarded for different crimes. To be proved innocent, one had to go through seven tests which have been described in it. Narda was in favour of bringing gambling under government control so that the government could earn some income from it. He was not in favour of a widow being given the property of her husband. He supported widow-remarriage and Niyoga traditions. He described the 15 kinds of slaves prevalent in society.

Answer in One Word to One Sentence:

Question 1.
What is meant by the Puranas?
Answer:
The Puranas mean ancient/the oldest.

Question 2.
In which language were the Puranas written?
Answer:
Sanskrit.

Question 3.
Which is known as the fifth Veda?
Answer:
Puranas.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

Question 4.
How many Puranas are there?
Or
Give the total number of Puranas.
Answer:
18.

Question 5.
In how many groups the Puranas have been classified?
Answer:
The Puranas have been classified in three groups.

Question 6.
Name the three groups of the Puranas.
Answer:

  • Shiva Puranas,
  • Vaishnava Puranas,
  • Brahman Puranas.

Question 7.
Name any two famous Puranas.
Answer:
Shiva Puranas and Vaishnava Purana.

Question 8.
Mention any one Purana included in Shiva Puranas.
Answer:
Linga Purana.

Question 9.
Mention any one Purana included in Vaishnava Puranas.
Answer:
Vishnu Purana.

Question 10.
Mention any one Purana included in Brahama Puranas.
Answer:
Brahmanda Purana.

Question 11.
In how many parts each Purana has been divided?
Answer:
Five parts.

Question 12.
In what part of the Purana the origin of the world has been described?
Answer:
Sarga part.

Question 13.
Which part of the Purana is considered historically important?
Answer:
Fifth part.

Question 14.
Which is the oldest of the Puranas?
Answer:
Brahman Purana.

Question 15.
By what other name the Brahman Purana is known?
Answer:
Adi Purana.

Question 16.
How many shlokas are there in the Brahman Purana?
Answer:
14,000 shlokas.

Question 17.
Which is the largest Purana?
Answer:
Padama Purana.

Question 18.
How many shlokas Padama Purana has?
Answer:
55,000 shlokas.

Question 19.
Of how many shlokas Vishnu Purana contains?
Answer:
23,000 shlokas.

Question 20.
By what other name Vayu Purana is known?
Answer:
Shiva Purana.

Question 21.
Bhagvata Purana is related with which god?
Answer:
Bhagvata Purana is related with Vishnu.

Question 22.
How many shlokas Narada Purana contains?
Answer:
25,000 shlokas.

Question 23.
With which god Narada Purana is associated?
Answer:
Lord Vishnu.

Question 24.
Which Purana has the least number of shlokas’?
Answer:
Markandeya Purana.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

Question 25.
How many shlokas Markandeya Purana contains?
Answer:
900 shlokas.

Question 26.
Name any two gods mentioned in the Markandya Purana?
Answer:

  • Indra,
  • Agni.

Question 27.
With which god Bhavishya Purana is associated?
Answer:

  • Brahman,
  • Vishnu,
  • Shiva,
  • Surya.

Question 28.
How many shlokas does Skanda Purana contain?
Answer:
51,000 shlokas.

Question 29.
With which god Skanda Purana is associated?
Answer:
Lord Shiva.

Question 30.
Between whom the dialogue goes on in Matsaya Purana?
Answer:
There is a dialogue between the Matsaya (Fish) and Manu.

Question 31.
With which god Garura Purana is associated?
Answer:
Lord Vishnu.

Question 32.
Mention any one subject of the Puranas.
Answer:
The origin of the world.

Question 33.
What is meant by Upanishad?
Answer:
To sit close with absolute reverence.

Question 34.
Why are the Upanishads called Vedanta?
Answer:
They are the finale of the Vedas.

Question 35.
In which language the Upanishads are composed?
Answer:
Sanskrit.

Question 36.
When were the Upanishads composed?
Answer:
During 550 to 100 B.C.

Question 37.
What is the total number of Upanishads?
Answer:
108.

Question 38.
Give the nunfber of main Upanishads.
Answer:
The main Upanishads are eleven.

Question 39.
Write the name of famous five Upanishads.
Or
Name any two Upanishads.
Answer:

  • Isha,
  • Kena,
  • Katha,
  • Prasma,
  • Taittiriya.

Question 40.
Mention first two Upanishads.
Answer:

  • Brihadaranyka,
  • Chhandogya.

Question 41.
When were Brihadaranyka and Chhandogya Upanishads composed?
Answer:
During 550 to 450 BC.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

Question 42.
Mention any two subjects of the Upanishads.
Answer:

  • The nature of soul,
  • The principle of Karma.

Question 43.
Is soul impermanent according to the Upanishads?
Answer:
No.

Question 44.
Mention two Upanishadic moral principles.
Answer:

  • Always speak the truth,
  • Love living beings.

Question 45.
What according to the Upanishads is the ultimate aim of life?
Answer:
To attain Moksha.

Question 46.
The Bhagvadgita forms a part of which epic?
Answer:
The Bhagvadgita is a part of Mahabharata.

Question 47.
In which language was the Bhagvadgita composed?
Answer:
It was composed in Sanskrit.

Question 48.
How many shlokas the Bhagvadgita contain?.
Answer:
700 shlokas.

Question 49.
What does Bhagvadgita mean?
Answer:
It means Divine Song.

Question 50.
Who gave the sermon to whom in the Bhagvadgita?
Answer:
Lord Krishna gave sermon to Aijuna.

Question 51.
How many Yogas are mentioned in the Bhagvadgita?
Answer:
Three Yogas have been mentioned in the Bhagvadgita.

Question 52.
What are the three Yogas mentioned in the Gita?
Answer:
They are Karamayoga, Bhaktiyoga and Jnanayoga.

Question 53.
Mention any one of Gita’s sermon.
Answer:
Man has to reap the fruit of his Karma.

Question 54.
How many type of Bhaktis are mentioned in the Bhagvadgita?
Answer:
The Gita mentions seven types of Bhaktis.

Question 55.
Mention any one types of Bhaktis expostulated in the Gita.
Answer:
Jnana Bhakti.

Question 56.
Who translated the Gita into English first of all?
Answer:
Edwin Arnold.

Question 57.
Who wrote commentary on the Gita?
Answer:
Ramanuja wrote commentary on the Gita.

Question 58.
What is meant by Dharma Shastras?
Or
What are the Dharma Shastras?
Answer:
They are the ancient law books of the Hindus.

Question 59.
Mention any one Dharma Shastras.
Answer:
Manu Smriti.

Question 60.
In which language Dharma Shastras were written?
Answer:
Sanskrit.

Question 61.
Which is the oldest Dharma Shastra?
Answer:
Manu Shastra.

Question 62.
Who is said to be the progenitor of mankind?
Answer:
Manu is believed to be the progenitor of mankind.

Question 63.
Who was the author of Manu Smriti?
Answer:
Manu.

Question 64.
By what other name Manu Smriti is known?
Answer:
Manava Dharma Shastra.

Question 65.
Which Dharma Shastra prescribes the duties of four varanas?
Answer:
Manu Smriti.

Question 66.
In how many Ashramas human life has been divided?
Answer:
Four Ashramas.

Question 67.
Mention any one Ashrama.
Answer:
Grihastha Ashrama.

Question 68.
Does Manu,Smriti allow the Shudras to read the Vedas?
Answer:
No.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

Question 69.
How many sources of Dharma Manu Smriti mention?
Answer:
Four.

Question 70.
Mention any one source of Dharma as mentioned by Manu.
Answer:
The Vedas.

Question 71.
Which Dharma Shastra was against gambling?
Answer:
Vishnu Smriti.

Question 72.
Which Dharma Shastra favoured widow marriage.
Answer:
Narda Smriti.

Question 73.
What subjects have been discussed in Dharma Shastras?
Answer:
Rules of conduct and customs.

Fill in the Blanks:

1. The puranas means ……………
Answer:
ancient/the oldest.

2. The Puranas were written in ……………
Answer:
Sanskrit.

3. The Puranas are …………. in number.
Answer:
18.

4. Each Purana has been divided into …………… parts.
Answer:
five.

5. In …………… the origin of the the world has been’ described.
Answer:
Sarga.

6. The …………… gives a description of the lineage of the famous Kings and Rishis.
Answer:
Vanshanucharita.

7. The Brahman Purana is also known as …………….
Answer:
Adi Purana.

8. The biggest Purana was the …………… Purana.
Answer:
Padma.

9. The Vayu Purana is also called the …………… Purana.
Answer:
Shiva.

10. The Narada Purana contains …………….. Shlokas.
Answer:
25000.

11. The Garur Purana consists …………….. Shlokas.
Answer:
18000.

12. The ……………… Purana is the shortest of all the Puranas.
Answer:
Markandeya.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

13. The Upanishads are also called …………..
Answer:
The Vedanta.

14. The Upanishads preached the principle of ……………. layers.
Answer:
five.

15. The Bhagvadgita is a part of the …………….
Answer:
Mahabharata.

16. The Bhagvadgita contains ……………. Shlokas.
Answer:
700.

17. Gita’s sermon was given by ……………..
Answer:
Lord Krishana.

18. ………….. Yogas have been mentioned in the Bhagvadgita.
Answer:
Three.

19. The Dharam Shastras were written in ……………..
Answer:
Sanskrit.

20. …………… is believed to be the progenitor of mankind.
Answer:
Manu.

21. Manu Smriti is also known as …………….. Dharam Shastra.
Answer:
Manava.

22. Manu Smriti does ……………… allow giving property rights and reading Vedas facility to women.
Answer:
not.

True Or False:

1. The Puranas were written in Sanskrit language.
Answer:
True

2. The Puranas were called the Fifth Veda.
Answer:
True

3. The Puranas are 10 in number.
Answer:
False

4. The Brahman Purana is the biggest Purana.
Answer:
False

5. The Padma Purana has 55000 shlokas in it.
Answer:
True

6. The Vayu Purana is also known as the Shiva Purana.
Answer:
True

7. The Bhagvata Purana is associated with the glory of Shiva.
Answer:
False

8. The Narada Purana is related to the worship of Vishnu.
Answer:
True

9. The Agni Purana was the shortest among the Puranas.
Answer:
False

10. The Bhavishya Purana has 14,000 shlokas in it.
Answer:
True

11. There are 51,000 shlokas in the Skanda Purana.
Answer:
True

12. The Matsya Purana is conversation between a fish and Manu.
Answer:
True

13. The total number of Upanishads is 108.
Answer:
True

14. The Upanishads were written in Pali language.
Answer:
False

15. The Upanishads give the Doctrine of Five layers.
Answer:
True

16. Bhagvadagita is a part of the Ramayana.
Answer:
False

17. The Bhagvadgita has 18 chapters.
Answer:
True

18. The Sermon of Gita was given by Lord Krishna to Aijuna.
Answer:
True

19. The Bhagvadgita has a belief in four Yogas.
Answer:
False

20. The ancient law texts of Hindus are called the Dharma Shastras.
Answer:
True

21. Manu Smriti was composed by Yajnavalkya.
Answer:
False

22. Manu is considered as the progenitor of mankind.
Answer:
True

23. The Narda Smriti was in favour of the widow’s marriage.
Answer:
True

Multiple Choice Questions:

1. What is the total number of Puranas?
(a) 6
(b) 10
(c) 15
(d) 18
Answer:
(d) 18

2. In which language were the Puranas written?
(a) Hindi
(b) Punjabi
(c) Sanskrit
(d) English
Answer:
(c) Sanskrit

3. In how many groups the Puranas have been classified?
(a) 3
(b) 4
(c) 5
(d) 6.
Answer:
(a) 3

4. Which of the following is not a Shiva Purana?
(a) The Vayu
(b) The Vishnu
(c) The Skanda
(d) The Linga
Answer:
(b) The Vishnu

5. Which part of the Puranas contains description of the lineage of the famous kings and rishis?
(a) Vansh
(b) Vaushanu Charita
(c) Sarga
(d) Manvantar
Answer:
(a) Vansh

6. Which of the following is the oldest Purana?
(a) The Brahman Purana
(b) The Padma Purana
(c) The Vishnu Purana
(d) The Agni Purana
Answer:
(a) The Brahman Purana

7. Which of the following is the largest Purana?
(a) The Vishnu Purana
(b) The Skanda Purana
(c) The Vamana Purana
(d) The Padma Purana
Answer:
(d) The Padma Purana

8. What is the total number of shlokas in the Padma Purana?
(a) 15,000
(b) 23,000
(c) 51,000
(d) 55,000
Answer:
(d) 55,000

9. Which of the following is the smallest Purana?
(a) The Varana Purana
(b) The Vamana Purana
(c) The Padma Purana
(d) The Markandeya Purana
Answer:
(d) The Markandeya Purana

10. Which of the following Puranas contain the details of last rites?
(a) The Narada Purana
(b) The Vayu Purana
(c) The Garur Purana
(d) The Bhavishya Purana
Answer:
(c) The Garur Purana

11. What is the total number of Upanishads?
(a) 6
(b) 11
(c) 18
(d) 108
Answer:
(d) 108

12. Which of the following is not a Upanishad?
(a) Isha
(b) Kena
(c) Chhandogaya
(d) Skanda
Answer:
(d) Skanda

13. Who gave the sermon in the Bhagvadgita?
(a) Lord Krishna Ji
(b) Aijuna
(c) Lord Rama Ji
(d) Shiva
Answer:
(a) Lord Krishna Ji

14. The Bhagvad Gita is a part of which of the following texts?
(a) rrhe Ramayana
(b) The Mahabharata
(c) The Buddha Charita
(d) The Katha vathu
Answer:
(b) The Mahabharata

15. How many sMokas are there in Bhagvadgita?
(a) 500
(b) 700
(c) 800
(d) 900
Answer:
(b) 700

16. What are the ancient law texts called?
(a) Vedas
(b) Mahabharata
(c) Ramayana
(d) Dharam Shastras
Answer:
(d) Dharam Shastras

17. Which of the following is also known as Manava Dharma Shastra?
(a) Yajnavalkya Smriti
(b) Manu Smriti
(c) Vishnu Smriti
(d) Narada Smriti
Answer:
(b) Manu Smriti

18. Who is called Progenitor of mankind?
(a) Narada
(b) Vishnu
(c) Manu
(d) Yajnavalkya
Answer:
(c) Manu

19. Which of the following Puranas was against the freedom of women?
(a) Manu Smriti
(b) Narda Smriti
(c) Vishnu Smriti
(d) Yajnavalkya Smriti
Answer:
(a) Manu Smriti

PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Chapter 6 Three Great Indians

Punjab State Board PSEB 9th Class English Book Solutions English Main Course Book Chapter 6 Three Great Indians Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 9 English Main Course Book Chapter 6 Three Great Indians

Question 1.
What is the name given to the national uprising of 1857 ?
(1857 के राष्ट्रीय विद्रोह को क्या नाम दिया गया है ?)
Answer:
It is called the First War of Independence.
इसे स्वतन्त्रता की पहली लड़ाई कहा जाता है।

Question 2.
When and where was Laxmi Bai born ?
(लक्ष्मीबाई का जन्म कब और कहां हुआ ?)
Answer:
She was born on 16 November, 1834 in Varanasi.
उसका जन्म 16 नवम्बर, 1834 को वाराणसी में हुआ था।

PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Chapter 6 Three Great Indians

Question 3.
What was her childhood name ?
(उसका बचपन का नाम क्या था ?)
Answer:
Manikarnika or Manu. (मणिकर्णिका या मनु।)

Question 4.
Who was she married to ?
(उसका विवाह किस से हुआ ?)
Answer:
She was married to Raja Gangadhar Rao.
उसका विवाह राजा गंगाधर राव से हुआ।

Question 5.
What happened to her son and husband ?
(उसके पुत्र तथा पति को क्या हुआ ?)
Answer:
Both of them had died by 1853.
सन् 1853 तक उन दोनों की मृत्यु हो गई थी।

Question 6.
Where did she join her forces with Tantya Tope ?
(तात्या टोपे के साथ उसकी सेनाएँ कहां शामिल हुईं ?)
Answer:
At Kalpi.
(कल्पी में।)

Question 7.
How is Udham Singh’s name linked with Jallianwala Bagh?
(उधम सिंह का नाम जलियांवाला बाग़ से कैसे जुड़ा है ?)
Answer:
He was the man who took revenge for the killings of Jallianwala Bagh. He killed General O’Dwyer who had ordered the firing and killed thousands of innocent men, women and children.

वह वही आदमी था जिसने जलियांवाला बाग़ की हत्याओं का बदला लिया। उसने जनरल ओ’डायर को मार दिया जिसने गोली चलाने का आदेश दिया था और हज़ारों मासूम पुरुषों, स्त्रियों और बच्चों को मार दिया था।

PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Chapter 6 Three Great Indians

Question 8.
What was his pledge?
(उसकी शपथ क्या थी ?)
Answer:
His pledge was to avenge the massacre of Jallianwala Bagh.
उसकी शपथ थी – जलियांवाला बाग़ के नरसंहार का बदला लेना।

Question 9.
How did he take his revenge ?
(उसने अपना बदला कैसे लिया ?)
Answer:
He waited for 21 years. Then he went to England. There he shot General O’Dwyer dead in full view of a large gathering.
उसने 21 वर्ष तक प्रतीक्षा की। फिर वह इंग्लैंड गया। वहां उसने लोगों की एक भारी भीड़ के बिल्कुल सामने जनरल ओ’डायर को गोली मार कर मार दिया।

Write a short note on the each of the following:

Question 1.
Write a short note on the death of Rani Jhansi.
(रानी झांसी की मृत्यु पर एक संक्षिप्त नोट लिखिए।)
Answer:
The British forces had laid a siege on Jhansi. The Rani of Jhansi continued to fight from inside the fort. But, at last; she was forced to leave Jhansi. The British forces pursued her. She was defeated and surrounded from all sides. She was badly wounded. She died on the battlefield. It was 18 June 1858 when she died.

अंग्रेजी सेनाओं ने झांसी पर घेरा डाल रखा था। झांसी की रानी किले के अन्दर से लड़ती रही। किन्तु अन्त में वह झांसी छोड़ने को मजबूर हो गई। अंग्रेजी सेनाओं ने उसका पीछा किया। वह हार चुकी थी और चारों तरफ से घिरी हुई थी। वह बुरी तरह से घायल हो गई। वह युद्ध-क्षेत्र में मारी गई। यह 18 जून 1858 था जब उसकी मृत्यु हुई।

PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Chapter 6 Three Great Indians

Question 2.
Write a short note on the Jallianwala Bagh massacre.
(जलियांवाला बाग़ के नरसंहार पर एक संक्षिप्त नोट लिखिए।)
Answer:
It was the day of Baisakhi in 1919. A large number of people had gathered in Jallianwala Bagh. They were holding a peaceful meeting. The British General O’Dwyer ordered firing on them. Thousands of men, women and children were killed. Many jumped into a well to escape. They were suffocated to death. 1919

में बैसाखी का दिन था। भारी संख्या में लोग जलियांवाला बाग में एकत्रित हो रखे थे। वे एक शान्तिपूर्ण सभा कर रहे थे। अंग्रेज़ी जनरल ओ’डायर ने उन पर गोली चलाने का आदेश दे दिया। हज़ारों पुरुष, स्त्रियां तथा बच्चे मारे गए। बच पाने के लिए अनेकों ने एक कुएं में छलांग लगा दी। उनकी दम घुटने से मृत्यु हो गई।

Question 3.
Write a short note on the First War of Independence.
(स्वतन्त्रता के प्रथम संग्राम पर एक संक्षिप्त नोट लिखिए।)
Answer:
The First War of Independence was fought in 1857. The rulers of many Indian states rose up against the British. Tantya Tope and Laxmi Bai were the two most famous of them. Laxmi Bai was the Rani of Jhansi. The British forces had laid a siege on Jhansi. She was forced to leave Jhansi. The British forces surrounded her from all sides. She died on the battlefield. The other rulers were also defeated one by one. Thus, the First War of Independence was lost.

स्वतन्त्रता की पहली लड़ाई 1857 में लड़ी गई। अनेक भारतीय राज्यों के शासक अंग्रेजों के विरुद्ध खड़े हो गए। उनमें दो सबसे अधिक प्रसिद्ध थे – तात्या टोपे और लक्ष्मी बाई। लक्ष्मी बाई झांसी की रानी थी। अंग्रेजी सेनाओं ने झांसी को घेर रखा था। उसे झांसी छोड़ने पर मजबूर होना पड़ा। अंग्रेजी सेनाओं ने उसे सभी तरफ से घेर लिया। उसकी युद्ध-क्षेत्र में मृत्यु हो गई। अन्य शासक भी एक-एक करके हार गए। इस प्रकार स्वतन्त्रता का पहला संग्राम हारा गया।

Question 4.
Write a short note on the teachings of Sri Satguru Ram Singh Ji.
(श्री सतगुरू रामसिंह जी के उपदेशों पर एक संक्षिप्त नोट लिखिए।)
Answer:
Satguru Sri Ram Singh Ji preached his followers.
1. to believe in one God.
2. to lead a simple and honest life.
3. to be free from any kind of evil.
4. to help the poor and the needy.
5. to work for the freedom of the country.
6. to live like brothers.
7. to fight against such evils as child marriage, the dowry system, cow slaughter, non-vegetarianism, casteism and religious fanaticism.

श्री सतगुरू राम सिंह जी ने अपने अनुयायियों को उपदेश दिया कि वे
1. एक ईश्वर में विश्वास रखें।
2. सादा और ईमानदारी का जीवन बिताएं।
3. सभी तरह की बुराइयों से मुक्त रहें।
4. ग़रीबों और जरूरतमंदों की मदद करें।
5. देश की स्वतन्त्रता के लिए काम करें।
6. भाइयों की भान्ति रहें।
7. बाल-विवाह, दहेज प्रथा, गाय-वध, मांसाहारी होने, फिरकापरस्ती और धार्मिक कट्टरता के विरुद्ध लड़ें।

Textual Vocabulary & Grammar

Question 1.
Match the words in box A with their opposites given in box B :
Answer:
1. fresh → stale
2. entrance → exit
3. loyal → disloyal
4. bravery cowardice
5. barbarous → civilized
6. punish → reward
7. benevolence → malevolence
8. virtue → vice
9. refined → crude
10. optimist → pessimist
11. mortal → immortal.

Rewrite the following sentences by using one word for the underlined part of the sentence :

1. Your television set cannot be repaired.
2. The speaker addressed the assembly of listeners.
3. Holika had a device that could not be seen.
4. ‘My Experiments with Truth’ by Mahatma Gandhi is his life-story written by himself.
5. Satan said that he had a will that could not be conquered.
6. These windowpanes are such that will not allow the passage of light.
7. Usha is quite fond of entertaining guests.
Answer:
1. Your television set is irreparable.
2. The speaker addressed the audience.
3. Holika had an invisible device.
4. “My Experiments with Truth’ by Mahatma Gandhi is his autobiography.
5. Satan said that he had an inconquerable will.
6. These windowpanes are opaque.
7. Usha is quite hospitable.

PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Chapter 6 Three Great Indians

Fill in the blanks with suitable prepositions in the following sentences :

1. She was distressed at the break ……………… of her marriage.
2. The war broke …………….. at Kalpi.
3. The two countries broke …………….. their diplomatic relations.
4. We have been working since long; let us break ……………….. lunch.
5. The population growth has fallen ………………. five per cent.
6. Anju fell flat ……………….. her face …..
7. Romeo fell ………………. love with Juliet at first sight.
8. Write an essay on ‘The Rise and Fall …………….. the Mughal Empire’
9. Jhansi fell ……………….. the British.
10. He fell ……………… and wounded his leg.
Answer:
1. off 2. out 3. up 4. for 5. by 6. on 7. in 8. of 9. to 10. down.

Fill in the blanks with the articles a, an, the :

Rabindranath Tagore is the most famous man of letters. His literary production is vast and varied. He is a novelist as well as a playwright. He is an educationist as well as a freedom fighter. But above all, he is a poet. He is a great religious poet, one of the greatest that the world has ever produced. In 1913, he was awarded the Nobel Prize in Literature for his collection of poems entitled ‘Gitanjali.

Fill in the blanks with the appropriate comparaties or superlatives of the adjectives given in the brackets :

1. Prevention is ……………. than cure. (good) :
2. Pen is …………… than the sword. (mighty).
3. Honour is …………….. to all than life. (dear).
4. Wordsworth was the …………… nature poet. (great)
5. Bill Gates is the …………….. man of the world today. (rich)
6. It is …………….. to preach than to practise. (easy)
7. Gold is …………. than any other metal. (costly)
8. The condition of some of the roads is much …………….. than it was five years ago. (good)
Answer:
1. better
2. mightier
3. dearer
4. greatest
5. richest
6. easier
7. costlier
8. better.

Objective Type Questions

Answer the following in one word / phrase / sentence :

Question 1.
Who wrote the chapter, ‘Three Great Indians ?
Answer:
The author iş anonymous.

Question 2.
Give the names of the three great Indians who have been described in this chapter.
Answer:
They are :
(i) Sri Satguru Ram Singh Ji
(ii) Rani Laxmi Bai and
(iii) Sardar Udham Singh.

Question 3.
Who was Sri Satguru Ram Singh Ji ?
Answer:
A great patriot and a social reformer.

Question 4.
What did he ask his followers to do?
Answer:
He asked his followers to fight for the freedom of the country.

Question 5.
Who was Laxmi Bai ?
Answer:
The brave Rani of Jhansi.

Question 6.
What did Laxmi Bai sacrifice for the country?
Answer:
She died fighting against the British forces and thus sacrificed her life for the country.

Question 7.
Who was Udham Singh ?
Answer:
One of the greatest martyrs of Mother India.

Question 8.
Who had ordered firing on the people gathered in Jallianwala Bagh on the day of Baisakhi ?
Answer:
It was the British General O’Dwyer.

Question 9.
Why did Udham Singh go to England ?
Answer:
To kill the British General O’Dwyer, the villain of the Jallianwala Bagh Massacre.

Question 10.
When was Udham Singh hanged ?
Answer:
On 30 July 1940.

PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Chapter 6 Three Great Indians

Complete the following:

1. …………… declared Ram Singh a ‘guru’, a religious guide, in his childhood.
2. Satguru Ram Singh Ji’s first sermon was delivered ……..
3. ……………… became the most popular leader of the First War of Freedom (1857).
4. The Rani of Jhansi adopted ……………….. under the ‘Policy of Lapse’.
5. Rani joined her forces with …………………. at Kalpi.
6. Udham Singh was born at ………………… in
Answer:
1. Guru Balak Singh Ji
2. on the Baisakhi day in 1857
3. The Rani of Jhansi.
4. a son
5. Tantya Tope
6. Sunam, Sangrur district.

Write True or False against each statement :

1. Rani Lakshmi Bai was born in Varanasi.
2. Udham Singh killed General O’Dwyer in America.
3. The British forces under the leadership of O’Dwyer besieged Jhansi.
4. Rani Lakshmi Bai’s heroic battle against the British has become the subject of many folk songs and ballads.
5. The Punjabi word ‘Kuka’ stands for a “roar.
6. It was Udham Singh who introduced the concept of ‘Be Indian, buy Indian’.
Answer:
1. True
2. False
3. False
4. True
5. True
6. False.

Choose the correct option for each of the following:

Question 1.
Sri Bhaini Sahib is situated in ……….
(a) Ropar
(b) Chandigarh
(c) Amritsar
(d) Ludhiana.
Answer:
(d) Ludhiana.

Question 2.
Against the British policy of ‘Divide and Rule’, …………………. gave the slogan ‘Unite and Fighť.
(a) Sardar Udham Singh
(b) Satguru Ram Singh Ji
(c) Rani Laxmi Bai
(d) none of these three.
Answer:
(b) Satguru Ram Singh Ji

Question 3.
Rani Lakshmi Bai’s childhood name was ……
(a) Manikarnika
(b) Manikumari
(c) Maniratnam
(d) Maniratnika.
Answer:
(a) Manikarnika

Question 4.
Udham Singh waited for …………… to average the national insult of Jallianwala Bagh massacre.
(a) 21 years
(b) 27 years
(c) 29 years
(d) 23 years.
Answer:
(a) 21 years

Pronunciation Practice

Note the silent letters in the words listed below. Say these words aloud.
PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Chapter 6 Three Great Indians 1

Creative Writing and Extended Reading

Read the stories of any two of the following great Indians and write 10-12 lines on each.

  • Bal Gangadhar Tilak
  • Netaji Subhash Chandra Bose
  • Lala Lajpat Rai
  • Manga! Pandey
  • Veer Savarkar

2. Would you like to become a great man ? How can you achieve that aim? Discuss the subject in your class with the help of your teacher.

Use Of Textual Words / Phrases

1. Witnessed – I witnessed the whole incident from a distance.
2. Valiant – The valiant fighter fought to the last breath.
3. Shot in prominence – A young actor, who has recently risen, shot in prominence.
4. Exhort – He exhorted his followers to speak the truth.
5. Foeticide – The government has banned female foeticide.
6. Send to the gallows – Many freedom-fighters were sent to the gallows by the British rulers.
7. To be cowed down -Our freedom-fighters were not cowed down by the cruelties of the British.
8. Warrior – India has given birth to many valiant warriors.
9. Impact – Her speech made a great impact on everyone.
10. Ballad – He wrote several ballads in his lifetime.
11. Indomitable – He showed an indomitable courage in the battle field.
12. Appreciate – They appreciated my views.
13. Martial art – He is an expert in martial arts.
14. Annex – Kalinga was formally annexed to Ashoka’s territory after his victory.
15. Regiment – The Gorkha regiment took control of the town.
16. Rebel – He finally rebelled against his cruel father.
17. Representative – He is the sole representative of the company.
18. Pursue – The robbers were hotly pursued by the police.
19. Inflicted – The hunter inflicted many injuries on the tiger.
20. Inseparably – He is inseparably joined with this institute.
21. Revenge – His opponent was thirsting for revenge.
22. Massacre – The bloody massacre of innocent people was condemned by one and all.
23. Suffocate – Many passengers were suffocated inside the burning train.
24. Villain – The police have caught the villains.
25. Sentenced – The thief was sentenced to six months imprisonment.
26. Revolutionary – The revolutionary leaders were arrested by the forces.
27. Associated – Tea is traditionally associated with Darjeeling.
28. Pledged – He pledged to seek a revenge on the enemy.
29. Avenge – He avenged his father’s murder.
30. Point-blank range – He fired at him from a point-blank range.
31. Solidarity – The international solidarity should not be undermined at any cost.

PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Chapter 6 Three Great Indians

Three Great Indians Summary in English

Three Great Indians Introduction:

This chapter gives brief sketches of three great Indians. They are :

  • Sri Satguru Ram Singh Ji,
  • Rani Laxmi Bai and
  • Udham Singh.

Sri Satguru Ram Singh Ji was a great patriot and a social reformer. He fought against many social evils. He asked his followers to fight for the freedom of the country. Laxmi Bai was the brave Rani of Jhansi. She opposed the British rule. She died fighting against the British forces. Udham Singh was one of the greatest martyrs of Mother India. He went to England and killed the villain of the Jallianwala Bagh massacre. He was arrested and sentenced to death. But his name will live for ever.

Three Great Indians Summary in English:

Mother India gave birth to many great men and women in the 19th and 20th centuries. They fought not only against the prevailing social evils but also against the British rule. They included such great souls as Bal Gangadhar Tilak, Tantya Tope, Rani Laxmi Bai, Dadabhai Naoroji, Khudi Ram Bose, Sri Aurobindo, Lala Lajpat Rai, Pandit Jawahar Lal Nehru, Mahatma Gandhi and Bhagat Singh.

Sri Satguru Ram Singh Ji of Punjab was also a great social reformer and supporter of complete independence. He was born on 3 February, 1816 in a village in Ludhiana district. He was a guru of the Namdhari Sikhs. He gave his first sermon on the day of Baisakhi in 1857. He asked his followers to lead a simple and honest life. He wanted them to help the poor and to be free from all evils. He also wanted them to work for the country’s freedom: He was strongly opposed to such social evils as child marriage, drinking, casteism, nonvegetarianism, cow-slaughter and religious fanaticism.

He was against the British policy of ‘Divide and Rule’. He gave his followers the slogan of ‘Unite and Fight’. He started a movement of non-cooperation against the British rulers. It was he who introduced the concept of ‘Be Indian, buy Indian’. The followers of Satguru Ram Singh Ji raised a loud voice against the British. That was why they came to be known as ‘Kukas? They vowed to follow the teachings of their guru. So they were named Namdharis.

The Namdharis became a great force. The British rulers could not tolerate this. They let loose a reign of terror against the Kukas. A large number of them were put to death. Sri Satguru Ram Singh Ji was arrested. He was sent to jail in an unknown foreign land. But his spirit continues to guide his followers even today.

Rani Laxmi Bai was another great Indian. She was the Rani of Jhansi. She fought bravely against the British rule. She became the most popular leader in the First War of Independence (1857). Even her enemies appreciated her courage and her love of freedom.

Laxmi Bai was born on 16th December 1834 in Varanasi. Her childhood name was Manikarnika or Manu. She was married to Raja Gangadhar Rao of Jhansi. In 1851, she gave birth to a son.

Unfortunately both her son and her husband died by 1853. She adopted a son to be the king’s heir. But the British refused to accept him as the king of Jhansi, and took over the control of Jhansi. On 4 June, 1857, the soldiers stationed in Jhansi revolted against the British control. The Rani took the command in her own hands. The British forces laid a siege on Jhansi. The Rani continued to command her forces from inside the fort. But, at last, she had to leave Jhansi. She joined the forces of Tantya Tope at Kalpi. The British forces surrounded her from all sides. The Rani tried to escape but she was badly wounded. She breathed her last on the battlefield, on 18 June, 1858.

Udham Singh was one of the greatest martyrs of Mother India. He was the man who took revenge on General O’Dwyer who was the villain of the Jallianwala Bagh massacre.

PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Chapter 6 Three Great Indians

On the day of Baisakhi in 1919, a large number of people had gathered in Jallianwala Bagh. They were holding a peaceful meeting. The British General O’Dwyer ordered firing on them. Thousands of men, women and children were killed. Many jumped into a well in order to save themselves. They were suffocated to death.

Udham Singh waited for 21 years to avenge this national insult. He went to England in 1940. There he shot O’Dwyer dead in full view of large gathering. Udham Singh was arrested and sentenced to death. He was hanged to death on 30 July the same year.

Three Great Indians Summary in Hindi

Three Great Indians Introduction:

परिचय यह पाठ तीन महान् भारतीयों के संक्षिप्त चित्र प्रस्तुत करता है, वे हैं-

  • श्री सतगुरू राम सिंह जी;
  • रानी लक्ष्मी बाई तथा
  • उधम सिंह।

श्री सतगुरू राम सिंह जी एक महान समाज सुधारक और देशभक्त थे। वे अनेकों सामाजिक बुराइयों के विरुद्ध लड़े। उन्होंने अपने अनुयायियों से कहा कि वे देश की आजादी के लिए लड़ें। लक्ष्मी बाई झांसी की वीर रानी थी। उसने अंग्रेज़ी राज्य का विरोध किया। वह अंग्रेज़ी सेनाओं के विरुद्ध लड़ती हुई मारी गई। उधम सिंह भारत माता के सब से महान् शहीदों में से एक था। उसने इंग्लैण्ड जा कर जलियांवाले बाग़ के खलनायक को मौत के घाट उतार दिया। उसे बन्दी बना लिया गया और मृत्यु-दण्ड दे दिया गया। किन्तु उसका नाम अमर रहेगा।

Three Great Indians Summary in Hindi:

भारत माता ने उन्नीसवीं एवं बीसवीं शताब्दी में अनेक महान् पुरुषों और स्त्रियों को जन्म दिया। उन्होंने न केवल समाज में व्याप्त बुराइयों के विरुद्ध लड़ाई लड़ी बल्कि उन्होंने अंग्रेज़ी शासन के विरुद्ध भी संघर्ष किया। इन लोगों में बाल गंगाधर तिलक, तात्या टोपे, रानी लक्ष्मी बाई, दादाभाई नॉरोजी, खुदीराम बोस, श्री अरविन्द घोष, लाला लाजपत राय, पंडित जवाहर लाल नेहरू, महात्मा गांधी और भगत सिंह जैसे महान् लोग शामिल थे।

पंजाब के श्री सतगुरू राम सिंह जी भी एक महान समाज सुधारक और पूर्ण स्वतन्त्रता के समर्थक थे। उनका जन्म 3 फरवरी, सन् 1816 में लुधियाना जिले के एक गांव में हुआ। वह नामधारी सिखों के गुरू थे। उन्होंने अपना पहला प्रवचन सन् 1857 में बैसाखी वाले दिन दिया। उन्होंने अपने अनुयायियों से एक सादा और ईमानदार जीवन जीने के लिए कहा। वह चाहते थे कि उनके अनुयायी निर्धनों की सहायता करें और स्वयं को सब बुराइयों से मुक्त कर लें। वह चाहते थे कि उनके अनुयायी देश की स्वतन्त्रता के लिए भी संघर्ष करें। वह बाल विवाह, मदिरापान, जातिवाद, मांसाहार, गौ-हत्या और धार्मिक अन्धविश्वास जैसी सामाजिक बुराईयों के सख्त विरुद्ध थे।

वह अंग्रेजों की नीति-‘फूट डालो और राज करो’ के सख्त विरुद्ध थे। उन्होंने अपने अनुयायियों को ‘एक बनो और युद्ध करो’ का नारा दिया। उन्होंने अंग्रेज शासकों के विरुद्ध असहयोग आन्दोलन छेड़ दिया। यह श्री सतगुरू राम सिंह जी ही थे जिन्होंने ‘भारतीय बनो और भारत का माल खरीदो’ जैसे विचार का परिचय कराया। उनके अनुयायियों ने अंग्रेजों के विरुद्ध ऊंची आवाज़ उठाई। यही कारण था कि उन्हें ‘कूकों’ के नाम से जाना जाने लगा। उन्होंने अपने गुरू की शिक्षाओं का अनुसरण करने की शपथ ली। इसलिए उनका नाम नामधारी पड़ गया।

नामधारियों की एक बहुत विशाल सेना बन गई। अंग्रेज़ी शासक इसे बर्दाश्त नहीं कर पाए। उन्होंने कूकों के विरुद्ध एक आतंक पैदा करने वाला शासन शुरू कर दिया। उनमें से कई नामधारियों को मौत के घाट उतार दिया गया। श्री सतगुरू राम सिंह जी को गिरफ्तार कर लिया गया। उन्हें किसी अज्ञात विदेशी जगह पर जेल भेज दिया गया। परन्तु उनकी आत्मा आज भी उनके अनुयायियों का मार्गदर्शन करती है।

रानी लक्ष्मी बाई एक अन्य महान् भारतीय थी। वह झांसी की रानी थी। उसने अंग्रेज़ी शासन के विरुद्ध बहुत वीरतापूर्वक लड़ाई लड़ी। वह स्वतन्त्रता के प्रथम युद्ध (1857) में सबसे अधिक लोकप्रिय नेता बनी। यहां तक कि उसके शत्रुओं ने भी उसके साहस और स्वतन्त्रता के लिए उसके प्रेम की प्रशंसा की। लक्ष्मी बाई का जन्म 16 दिसम्बर 1834 को वाराणसी में हुआ था। उसका बचपन का नाम मणिकर्णिका अथवा मनु था। उसका विवाह झांसी के राजा गंगाधर राव के साथ हुआ। सन् 1851 में उसने एक पुत्र को जन्म दिया। परन्तु दुर्भाग्यवश सन् 1853 तक उसके पुत्र तथा उसके पति दोनों की मृत्यु हो गई। उसने राजा के उत्तराधिकारी के रूप में एक पुत्र को गोद ले लिया।

PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Chapter 6 Three Great Indians

परन्तु अंग्रेजों ने उसे झांसी का राजा मानने से इन्कार कर दिया, तथा झांसी को अपने अधिकार में ले लिया। 4 जून सन् 1857 को झांसी में नियुक्त सैनिकों ने अंग्रेज़ी शासन के विरुद्ध विद्रोह कर दिया। रानी ने प्रशासन की बागडोर अपने हाथ में ले ली। अंग्रेजी सेनाओं ने झांसी पर कब्जा कर लिया। रानी ने किले के अन्दर से अपनी सेनाओं को निर्देश देना जारी रखा। परन्तु अन्त में उसे झांसी छोड़कर जाना पड़ा। कल्पी में वह तांत्या टोपे की सेना में शामिल हो गई। अंग्रेज़ी सेनाओं ने उसे चारों ओर से घेर लिया। रानी ने बच निकलने का यत्न किया। परन्तु वह बहुत बुरी तरह से घायल थी। 18 जून सन् 1858 में उसने युद्ध के मैदान में अपनी आखिरी सांस ली। उधम सिंह भारत माता के महान् शहीदों में से एक था। यही वह आदमी था जिसने उस जनरल ओ’ डायर से बदला लिया जो जलियांवाला बाग़ के नरसंहार का खलनायक था।

सन् 1919 में बैसाखी वाले दिन जलियांवाला बाग़ अमृतसर में बहुत बड़ी संख्या में लोग एकत्रित हुए। वे एक शान्तिपूर्ण सम्मेलन का आयोजन कर रहे थे। अंग्रेजी जनरल ओ’ डायर ने उन पर गोली चलाने का आदेश दे दिया। हजारों स्त्री, पुरुष, बच्चे और बूढ़े मारे गए। कई लोग स्वयं को बचाने के लिए कुएं में कूद पड़े। परन्तु वहां भी दम घुटने से उनकी मौत हो गई।

उधम सिंह ने इस राष्ट्रीय अपमान का बदला लेने के लिए 21 वर्ष तक प्रतीक्षा की। सन् 1940 में वह इंग्लैंड गया। वहां उसने विशाल जनसमूह के सामने ओ’ डायर को गोली मार दी। उधम सिंह को गिरफ्तार कर लिया गया और उसे मौत की सजा सुना दी गई। उसी वर्ष 30 जुलाई को उसे फांसी पर लटका दिया गया।

Three Great Indians Translation in Hindi

Sri Satguru Ram Singh Ji

(Page 125-126) The historic period of …. …….. the British rule

कठिन शब्दार्थ-1. witnessed—देखा; 2. campaign-युद्ध; 3. prevailing-फैली हुई; 4. bannerझंडा; 5. revolt-विद्रोह; 6. valiant-बहादुर; 7. eradication—उन्मूलन, जड़ से उखाड़ फेंकना; 8. shot into prominence-एकदम से प्रसिद्ध होना; 9. sermon-धर्मोपदेश; 10. exhorted—बल दिया, 11. flocked—झुण्ड बना कर आना, एकत्रित हो कर आना; 12. foeticide-भ्रूण हत्या; 13. fanaticismउन्माद, 14. slaughter-हत्या। .

Text

The historic period of, 19th and 20th centuries witnessed the rise of many a great man in India who not only started a campaign against the social evils prevailing in the country but also raised a banner of revolt against the British Empire. “Freedom is our birthright,” declared Bal Gangadhar Tilak. Valiant fighters from all over the country—Tantya Tope, Rani Laxmi Bai, Dadabhai Naoroji, Khudi Ram Bose, Sri Aurobindo, Lala Lajpat Rai, Pandit Jawahar Lai Nehru, Mahatma Gandhi, Bhagat Singh to name just a few came to join the national struggle for freedom and the eradication of social ills.

An important name amongst them was that of Satguru Ram Singh of Punjab who gave birth to the great Kuka Movement that stood for social reforms and complete independence. Born on February 3, 1816 in the village Raiyan in district Ludhiana, this child shot into prominence when Guru Balak Singh Ji declared him a ‘gum’, a religious guide. From

his headquarters at Shri Bhaini Sahib in Ludhiana, the guru started preaching his divine message. His first sermon was delivered on the Baisakhi day in 1857. In his teachings, he exhorted the people to believe in one God, lead a simple, honest life free from any kind of evil, to help the poor and the needy and to work for the freedom of the country. Thousands became his followers and flocked to his discourses every day.

He strongly opposed child marriage, female foeticide, (The proper word should have been ‘infanticide‘ here.) taking of alcoholic drinks and non-vegetarian foods, dowry system, religious fanaticism, cow slaughter and casteism. He encouraged people to live like brothers and fight for the freedom of their country from the British rule.

PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Chapter 6 Three Great Indians

अनुवाद

उन्नीसवीं और बीसवीं शताब्दी के ऐतिहासिक युग ने भारत में ऐसे कई महान व्यक्तियों का उदय देखा है जिन्होंने न केवल देश में व्याप्त सामाजिक बुराइयों के विरुद्ध युद्ध छेड़ा बल्कि अंग्रेजी साम्राज्य के विरुद्ध भी विद्रोह का झण्डा उठा लिया। “स्वतन्त्रता हमारा जन्मसिद्ध अधिकार है,” बाल गंगाधर तिलक ने घोषणा कर दी। समूचे देश भर से बहादुर योद्धा – कुछ एक का नाम लिया जाए तो – तांत्या टोपे, रानी लक्ष्मी बाई, दादाभाई नॉरोजी, खुदीराम बोस, श्री अरविन्द, लाला लाजपत राय, पण्डित जवाहर लाल नेहरू, महात्मा गांधी, भगत सिंह स्वतन्त्रता के लिए राष्ट्रीय संघर्ष में शामिल होने तथा सामाजिक बुराइयों को जड़ से उखाड़ फेंकने के लिए आगे आए।

उनमें से एक महत्त्वपूर्ण नाम था पंजाब के सतगुरू राम सिंह जी का, जिन्होंने महान् कूका आन्दोलन को शुरू किया जिसने सामाजिक सुधारों और पूर्ण स्वतन्त्रता के लिए अनेक कार्य किए। 1816 3 फरवरी, 1816 को लुधियाना जिले के गांव राईयां में जन्मा यह बालक एकदम से प्रसिद्ध हो गया जब गुरू बालक सिंह जी ने इसे ‘गुरू’, (अर्थात्) एक धार्मिक मार्गदर्शक, घोषित कर दिया। लुधियाना में अपने मुख्य

स्थल श्री भैणी साहिब में गुरू जी ने अपने अलौकिक संदेश का प्रचार करना शुरू किया। उनका पहला धर्मोपदेश (व्याख्यान) सन् 1857 में बैसाखी वाले दिन दिया गया। अपने उपदेश में उन्होंने लोगों पर एक ही ईश्वर पर विश्वास करने, सभी प्रकार की बुराइयों से मुक्त एक सादा और ईमानदार जीवन व्यतीत करने, निर्धनों और जरूरतमंदों की सहायता करने और देश की आज़ादी के लिए काम करने पर बल दिया। हजारों लोग उनके अनुयायी बन गए और उनके उपदेश सुनने के लिए प्रतिदिन झुण्ड के झुण्ड उमड़ पड़ते।

उन्होंने बाल विवाह, कन्या भ्रूण हत्या, (यहां उचित शब्द ‘शिशु हत्या’ होना चाहिए था।) नशीले पेयपदार्थों और मांसाहारी भोजन का सेवन, दहेज प्रथा, धार्मिक उन्माद, गौ हत्या और जातिवाद का विरोध किया। उन्होंने लोगों को भाइयों की तरह रहने और अंग्रेजी शासन से अपने देश की स्वतन्त्रता के लिए लड़ने को प्रेरित किया।

(Page 126-127) Against the British …………. and high thinking.

कठिन शब्दार्थ-1. slogan-नारा; 2. called upon-आह्वान किया; 3. came down-दबा दिया; 4. reckoned – पहचान स्थापित होना; 5. inspired-प्रेरित; 6. patriotic-देशभक्ति से भरपूर; 7. let loose a reign of terror-आतंक का राज्य शुरू करना; 8. sent to the gallows-जेल भेज दिया गया; 9. allegiance-भक्ति ; 10. severed-काट कर अलग कर दिए; 11. liberty:-स्वतन्त्रता; 12. repressionदबाव; 13. enthusiasm —जोश, उत्साह; 14. flourish -फ्लना-फूलना; 15. stewardship—नेतृत्व।।

Text

The British rulers could not tolerate the rise of such an inspired patriotic force against them. They let loose a reign of terror against the Kukas. Nine Namdhari sikhs were sent to the gallows in 1871 while another 65 were blown up by cannon fire in an open field in 1872 at Malerkotla (Punjab). Amongst these martyrs was a twelve year old boy named Bishan Singh.

He was offered pardon on the condition that he should deny his allegiance to the Kuka cause. He angrily pounced upon the British officer (Mr. C6wen) and pulled out his beard. The enraged officer got both his hands severed and then beheaded him. The lovers of liberty refused to be cowed down by this repression but continued to fight with greater enthusiasm. Sri Satguru Ram Singh Ji was arrested and sent to jail in an unknown foreign land. His spirit continues to guide his followers even today.

The followers of Sri Satguru Ram Singh Ji continue to flourish today under the able stewardship of their holy gurus (presently Satguru Sri Jagjit Singh Ji Maharaj) and spread the message of universal brotherhood, national unity, secularism, simple living and high thinking.

अनुवाद

उन्होंने अग्रेज़ी नीति ‘फूट डालो और राज करो’ के विरुद्ध भारत के लोगों को ‘एक बनो, और संघर्ष करो’ का नारा दिया। उन्होंने अंग्रेज़ी शासकों के विरुद्ध एक असहयोग आन्दोलन चलाया और लोगों का आह्वान किया कि वे अग्रेजों का बॉयकाट कर दें। यह वो ही थे जिन्होंने देश में भारतीय बनो और भारतीय माल खरीदो’ के विचार का प्रचार किया। अंग्रेज़ी शासकों ने उनके गर्जते अनुयायियों को बुरी तरह से कुचल दिया। पंजाबी शब्द ‘कूका’ का अर्थ है एक ‘गर्जना’। श्री सतगुरू राम सिंह जी के अनुयायी जिन्होंने अंग्रेजों के विरुद्ध जोरदार आवाज़ उठाई, वे ‘कूका’ के नाम से प्रसिद्ध हो गए। इस आन्दोलन

के अनुयायियों को नामधारी नाम दिया गया। नामधारी सिखों की शीघ्र ही एक वीर सेना के रूप में पहचान स्थापित हो गई। अंग्रेज़ी शासक अपने विरुद्ध ऐसी एक प्रेरित देशभक्त सेना के उदय को सहन नहीं कर सके। उन्होंने ककों के विरुद्ध आंतक का राज्य शुरू कर दिया। सन् 1871 में 9 नामधारी सिखों को फांसी पर लटका दिया गया जबकि 65 अन्यों को सन् 1872 में मलेरकोटला (पंजाब) में एक खुले खेत में तोपों से उड़ा दिया गया। इन शहीदों में बिशन 1872 सिंह नामक एक बारह वर्षीय बालक भी था। उसे एक शर्त पर माफ़ी की पेशकश की गई कि वह कूका लहर के प्रति अपनी भक्ति से इन्कार करे। उसने क्रोधपूर्वकअंग्रेज़ी अफसर (मिस्टर कोवन) पर आक्रमण कर दिया और उसकी दाढ़ी खींच ली।

PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Chapter 6 Three Great Indians

गुस्से से उबलते अफसर ने उसके दोनों हाथों को कटवा दिया और फिर उसका सिर धड़ से अलग कर दिया। आजादी के प्रेमियों ने इस दबाव के आगे झुकने से मना कर दिया बल्कि उन्होंने और अधिक उत्साह के साथ संघर्ष करना जारी रखा। श्री | सतगुरू राम सिंह जी को गिरफ्तार कर लिया गया और उन्हें किसी अज्ञात विदेशी जगह पर जेल भेज दिया गया। उनकी आत्मा आज भी अपने अनुयायियों का मार्गदर्शन करती है। श्री सतगुरू रामसिंह जी के अनुयायी आज भी अपने सतगुरुओं (जो आज कल सतगुरू श्री जगजीत सिंह जी महाराज) के योग्य नेतृत्व में फल-फूल रहे हैं और सम्पूर्ण भाईचारे, राष्ट्रीय एकता, धर्मनिरपेक्षता, सादा जीवन और उच्च विचार का संदेश फैला रहे हैं।

Rani Laxmi Bai

(Page 127-128) No other woman ……….. on the battlefield.

कठिन शब्दार्थ-1. warrior-योद्धा; 2. impact-प्रभाव; 3. indomitable-अजेय, दृढ़; 4. adopted-गोद लिया; 5. recognize—प्रमाणित करना; 6. annexed-अपने में मिला लेना; 7. sepoy regiment-सैन्य दल; 8. representative-प्रतिनिधि; 9. besieged-घेर लिया; 10. inflicted defeat-हरा दिया; 11. retreat-जगह छोड़ कर कहीं और जाना।

Text

No other woman warrior in the history of India has made such a powerful impact on the minds of the Indian people as the Rani of Jhansi, Laxmi Bai. Her heroic battle against the British has become the subject of many folk songs and ballads all over the country. Her indomitable spirit as a fighter for the independence of her country was appreciated even by her enemies. Rani Laxmi Bai died fighting bravely for the sake of her country. The Rani of Jhansi became the most popular leader of the First War of Independence (1857).

Laxmi Bai was born on 16th November 1834, in Varanasi (U.P.). Her childhood name was Manikarnika or Manu. After the death of her mother she came to Bithur with her father. In Bithur, she learnt horse-riding and martial arts. When she was eight, she was married to Raja Gangadhar Rao of Jhansi and so she was called the ‘Rani of Jhansi’. In 1851, she gave birth to a son but by 1853, both her son and husband had died. The Rani of Jhansi adopted a son under the ‘Policy of Lapse’, but the British Government did not recognize the adopted son and annexed Jhansi in 1853. On 4th June 1857, the sepoy regiment stationed at Jhansi rebelled. The British control broke down in Jhansi, and the British representative himself asked the people to obey the Rani.

The British forces under the leadership of Sir Hugh Rose later besieged Jhansi. The Rani continued to command her forces from inside the fort but ultimately she was forced to leave Jhansi. She then managed to reach Kalpi where she merged her forces with those of the Nawab of Banda, Tantya Tope. The British forces pursued her at Kalpi also and inflicted defeat on Kalpi. The Rani was surrounded from all sides, and so, she now tried to organize a retreat. While doing so, she was fatally wounded on 18th June 1858. She breathed her last on the battlefield.

अनुवाद

भारत के इतिहास में किसी अन्य वीरांगना ने भारतीय लोगों के दिलों पर ऐसा शक्तिशाली प्रभाव नहीं छोड़ा है जितना कि झांसी की रानी लक्ष्मी बाई ने। अंग्रेजों के विरुद्ध उसका वीरतापूर्ण युद्ध देश भर में अनेकों लोकगीतों और लोक गाथाओं का विषय बन गया है। अपने देश की स्वतन्त्रता के लिए एक योद्धा के रूप में उसकी अजेय आत्मशक्ति की प्रशंसा यहां तक कि उसके शत्रुओं ने भी की। रानी लक्ष्मीबाई अपने देश की खातिर वीरतापूर्वक युद्ध करते हुए मृत्यु को प्राप्त हुई। स्वतन्त्रता के लिए हुए प्रथम युद्ध (1857) में झांसी की रानी सबसे अधिक लोकप्रिय नेता बनी।

लक्ष्मी बाई का जन्म 16 नवम्बर, सन् 1834 में 1834, वाराणसी (उत्तर प्रदेश) में हुआ। उसका बचपन का नाम था-मणिकर्णिका अथवा मनु। अपनी माता की मृत्यु के पश्चात् वह अपने पिता के साथ बिठुर आ गई। बिठुर में उसने घुड़सवारी और युद्ध कलाएं सीखीं। जब वह आठ वर्ष की थी तो उसका विवाह झांसी के राजा गंगाधर राव से कर दिया गया और इसीलिए उसे झांसी की रानी कहा जाता था। सन् 1851 में उसने एक पुत्र को जन्म दिया। परन्तु सन् 1853 तक उसके पति और पुत्र दोनों की मृत्यु हो चुकी थी।

झांसी की रानी ने ‘अवधि समाप्त होने की नीति’ के अन्तर्गत एक पुत्र को गोद लिया, परन्तु अंग्रेजी सरकार ने गोद लिए पुत्र को मान्यता नहीं दी और सन्1853 में झांसी को अपने साथ मिला लिया। 4 जून सन् 1857 को झांसी में स्थापित एक सैन्य दल ने विद्रोह कर दिया। झांसी में अंग्रेज़ों का नियन्त्रण टूट गया और अग्रेजों के प्रतिनिधि ने स्वयं लोगों से कहा कि वे रानी की आज्ञा का पालन करें। बाद में सर हग रोज़ के नेतृत्व में अंग्रेजी सेना ने झांसी को घेर लिया। रानी किले के भीतर से अपनी सेना का नेतृत्व करती रही परन्तु अन्त में उसे झांसी छोड़ने पर विवश कर दिया गया।

फिर वह किसी तरह कल्पी पहुंच गई और वहां उसने बन्द के नवाब, तात्या टोपे की सेनाओं के साथ अपनी सेनाएं मिला लीं। अंग्रेजी सेनाओं ने कल्पी तक उसका पीछा किया और कल्पी के मैदान में उसे हरा दिया। रानी चारों ओर से घिर चुकी थी और इसलिए उसने अब उस जगह से बच निकलने की कोशिश की। परन्तु ऐसा करते हुए 18 जून, 1858 को वह बुरी तरह घायल हो गई। उसने युद्ध क्षेत्र में अपनी आखिरी सांस ली।

Udham Singh

(Page 128-129) Udham Singh’s name …………….. of religion

कठिन शब्दार्थ-1. inseparably-अटूट रूप से; 2. revenge-बदला; 3. gathering-सम्मेलन, सभा; 4. massacre-नरसंहार; 5. suffocated-दम घुटना; 6. fiery-उग्र; 7. associated-जुड़ा होना; 8. outrage-अपमान, कलंक; 9. at a point blank range-अति निकट से; 10. solidarity–अखण्डता; 11. propagating-बढ़ावा देना, प्रचार करना; 12. divisive-विघटनकारी।।

Text

Udham Singhs name is linked inseparably with Jallianwala Bagh. Tiewas the man who took his revenge on General O’Dwyer, the British officer who had ordered firing on a peaceful gathering at Amritsar on the Baisakhi Day in the year 1919. Thousands of men, women, children and old men died in the massacre. Many tried to escape by jumping into a nearby well but were suffocated to death. Udham Singh waited for 21 years to avenge this national insult. He killed the villain of the show in England on 13 March 1940. Udham Singh was arrested and sentenced to death on 30 July the same year.

This fiery revolutionary was born on 18 December 1899 at Sunam in Sangrur district of the Punjab. He was already associated with the struggle for freedom. Before sailing for England, he had been sentenced to jail as many as five times during the freedom struggle for various anti-government activities.

For Udham Singh, the Jallianwala Bagh massacre was a national outrage and ought to have been avenged; so he pledged to take his revenge. In 1937, he reached England after travelling through Europe. In London, he shot General O’Dwyer at a point-blank range in full view of a large gathering. Udham Singh was all for the unity and solidarity of the country. His life bears a lesson for all those who are propagating divisive ideas in the name of religion.

अनुवाद

उधम सिंह का नाम जलियांवाला बाग से अट्रट रूप से जुड़ा हुआ है। यह वही व्यक्ति था जिसने जनरल ओ’ डायर से अपना बदल लिया था, वो अंग्रेज़ अफसर जिसने सन् 1919 में अमृतसर में बैसाखी वाले दिन हो रहे एक शान्तिपूर्वक सम्मेलन पर गोली चलाने का आदेश दिया था। इस ननसंहार में हजारों की संख्या में पुरुष स्त्रियां, बच्चे और बूढ़े मारे गए। कई लोगों ने निकट के एक कुएं में कूद कर जान बचाने की कोशिश की परन्तु वे दम घुटने से मर गए। उधम सिंह ने इस राष्ट्रीय अपमान का बदला लेने के लिए 21 वर्ष तक प्रतीक्षा की। उसने इस कहानी के खलनायक को 13 मार्च, 1940 में इंग्लैंड में मार गिराया। उधम सिंह को गिरफ्तार कर लिया गया और उसी वर्ष 30 जुलाई को उसे फांसी पर लटका दिया गया।

PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Chapter 6 Three Great Indians

इस उग्र आन्दोलनकारी का जन्म 18 दिसम्बर, सन् 1899 में पंजाब के संगरूर जिले में सुनाम में हुआ। वह स्वतन्त्रता संघर्ष के साथ पहले से ही जुड़ा हुआ था। इंग्लैंड जाने से पहले, उसे स्वतन्त्रता संघर्ष के लिए विभिन्न सरकार-विरोधी गतिविधियों के कारण पांच बार तक जेल जाना पड़ा। उधम सिंह के अनुसार जलियांवाला बाग़ में हुआ नरसंहार राष्ट्रीय अपमान की बात थी और जिसका बदला अवश्य लिया जाना चाहिए था; इसलिए उसने अपना बदला लेने की दृढ़ प्रतिज्ञा की। सन् 1937 में वह यूरोप से होता हुआ इंग्लैंड जा पहुंचा। लंदन में, उसने एक विशाल जनसमूह के बिल्कुल सामने बहुत निकट से जनरल ओ’ डायर पर गोली चला दी। उधम सिंह पूर्ण रूप से देश की एकता और अखण्डता के पक्ष में था। उसका जीवन उन सब के लिए एक सबक है जो धर्म के नाम पर विघटनकारी विचारों को बढ़ावा दे रहे हैं।

PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Chapter 5 The Discovery of Moon

Punjab State Board PSEB 9th Class English Book Solutions English Main Course Book Chapter 5 The Discovery of Moon Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 9 English Main Course Book Chapter 5 The Discovery of Moon

Answer the following questions in your own words:

Question 1.
Name the two astronauts who landed on the moon.
(उन दो अंतरिक्ष यात्रियों के नाम बताओ जो चांद पर उतरे थे।)
Answer:
Armstrong and Edwin.
(आर्मस्ट्रांग तथा एडविन।)

Question 2.
What was the name of their spacecraft?
(उनके अन्तरिक्षयान का क्या नाम था?)
Answer:
Apollo-11. (अपोलो-11)

PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Chapter 5 The Discovery of Moon

Question 3.
Which two countries had worked out programmes for the exploration of the moon ?
(चांद की खोज के लिए किन-किन देशों ने योजनाएँ तैयार की थी ?)
Answer:
The USA and the USSR.
(संयुक्त राज्य अमेरिका और सोवियत संघ ने।)

Question 4.
How did the Soviet Union feel about carrying on this exploration ?
(सोवियत संघ इस अभियान को जारी रखने के सम्बन्ध में क्या महसूस करता था ?)
Answer:
The Soviet Union did not feel it necessary to land man on the moon. It believed that scientific instruments were enough to carry on the exploration.
सोवियत संघ मनुष्य को चांद पर भेजना ज़रूरी नहीं मानता था। इसका विश्वास था कि खोज को जारी रखने के लिए वैज्ञानिक यन्त्र पर्याप्त थे।

Question 5.
Why have the scientists declared moon unfit for human habitation ?
(वैज्ञानिकों ने ऐसी घोषणा क्यों कर दी है कि चांद मानव के निवास के लिए उपयुक्त नहीं है ?)
Answer:
There is no air or water on the moon. There is no atmosphere. Cosmic dust keeps falling on it all the time. That is why scientists think it unfit for man’s living.

चांद पर कोई हवा या पानी नहीं है। वहां कोई वातावरण नहीं है। वहां पर हर समय अन्तरिक्षी धूल गिरती रहती है। इसी कारण वैज्ञानिक लोग समझते हैं कि यह मनुष्य के रहने के लिए उपयुक्त नहीं

Question 6.
According to the scientists, how can moon be made habitable for men ?
(वैज्ञानिकों के अनुसार चांद को मनुष्यों के लिए रहने योग्य कैसे बनाया जा सकता है?)
Answer:
The moon has some elements that contain oxygen. Scientists think that this oxygen should be separated from the elements. Then the moon can be made fit for man’s living.

चांद पर कुछ ऐसे तत्त्व हैं जिनमें ऑक्सीजन है। वैज्ञानिक समझते हैं कि इस ऑक्सीजन को तत्त्वों से अलग कर दिया जाना चाहिए। फिर चांद को मनुष्य के रहने के लिए उपयुक्त बनाया जा सकता है।

PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Chapter 5 The Discovery of Moon

Question 7.
Name the metals found on the moon.
(चांद पर मिलने वाली धातुओं के नाम लिखिए।)
Answer:
Aluminium, titanium and iron.
ऐल्युमिनियम, टायटेनियम तथा लोहा।

Question 8.
Have the traditional beliefs about moon proved true ?
(क्या चांद के बारे में पारम्परिक विचार सच्चे साबित हुए हैं?).
Answer:
The traditional beliefs have proved to be untrue. The information gathered about the moon has proved them wrong.
पारम्परिक विचार ग़लत साबित हुए हैं। चांद के बारे में इकट्ठी की गई जानकारी ने उन्हें ग़लत साबित कर दिया है।

Textual Vocabulary & Grammar

Match the words in column A with their meanings in column B.

1. Astronaut-a person who travels and works in spacecraft.
2. Spacecraft-a vehicle that travels in space.
3. Misconception—a belief not based on correct information.
4. Shatter—to destroy completely.
5. Desolate—a place that is empty or without people.
6. Traditional-older methods and ideas.
7. Element-chemical substance made of atoms.
8. Tempted—to get attracted.
9. Resources-something that can be used to help in achieving an aim.

Fill in the blanks with words given in the box.

planet; satellite; orbit; man-made; constant; face; rotate; phenomenon; heavenly

Answer:
The word ‘satellite’ comes from the Latin word ‘satellitis’ meaning attendant. The moon is Earth’s satellite. It is our planet’s constant companion in space. The moon takes exactly the same time to rotate round its axis once as the earth takes to rotate on its axis once. That is why we see the same face of the moon on earth. Scientists took an idea from this phenomenon and developed artificial satellites. Satellites are heavenly bodies that revolve round a planet. They are also called the moons of the planet. Artificial satellites are man-made objects which are put into orbit with the help of rockets.

Rewrite the following paragraph in the past tense.

There is a function at our school. The whole school is decorated with balloons, strips of coloured paper, flowers and blinking lights. All the students are excited. They do their best. The performers wait for their turn at the backstage.
Answer:
There was a function at our school. The whole school was decorated with balloons, strips of coloured paper, flowers and blinking lights. All the students were excited. They did their best. The performers waited for their turn at the backstage.

Fill in the blanks with the correct tense form of the verbs given in brackets :

1. Two U.S. astronauts …………. (land) on the moon on July 20, 1969.
2. The astronauts ………….. (bring) back samples of lunar rocks to earth.
3. These samples ………… (analyse) by the scientists. (passive)
4. The astronauts ………… (find) no evidence of life on the moon.
5. Some useful metals like aluminium and iron ………….. (find) on the moon. (passive)
Answer:
1. landed
2. brought
3. were analysed
4. found
5. were found.

PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Chapter 5 The Discovery of Moon

Pronunciation Practice

Say the following words aloud. Take care that you pronounce the cluster of consonants correctly.

PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Chapter 5 The Discovery of Moon 1

Creative Writing and Extended Reading

1. Read the chapter on Solar System in your General Science book. Write a brief note on it.
2. What do you know about India’s progress in the field of space travel ? Name the satellites put into the orbit by India.
3. Read the story of Kalpana Chawla, the space heroine who lost her life during a space exploration mission in the USA. Write 10-12 lines on her achievements.

Use Of Textual Words / Phrases

1. Astronaut – An astronaut has to go through tough training.
2. Avenues – Several avenues are open to us.
3. Exploration – We need to carry out a full exploration of all the alternatives.
4. Expedition – The Indian expedition to Mount Everest is leaving next month.
5. Misconception – Let me first deal with some common misconceptions.
6. Heavenly – The heavenly bodies are worshipped in certain countries.
7. Appropriate – Your dress is not appropriate for this function.
8. Robot – In some factories robots are used to assemble machinery.
9. Endangered – The giant panda is an endangered species.
10. Decade – I have been in this job for the last two decades.
11. Shattered – The vase hit the floor and shattered.
12. Desolate – He felt desolate when his only brother died in an accident.
13. Inhabitable – These islands are not inhabitable.

Objective Type Questions

Answer the following in one word / phrase / sentence :

Question 1.
Who wrote the chapter, ‘The Discovery of Moon’ ?
Answer:
The author is anonymous.

Question 2.
What does this chapter tell us ?
Answer:
It tells us about the various attempts that have been made to reach the moon and gain knowledge about it.

Question 3.
Name the first two men who landed on the moon ?
Answer:
Armstrong and Edwin.

Question 4.
What did Armstrong and Edwin do on the moon ?
Answer:
They collected samples of the lunar soil.

Question 5.
Which countries had made programmes for the exploration of the moon ?
Answer:
The USA and the USSR.

PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Chapter 5 The Discovery of Moon

Question 6.
Who was sitting in Eagle–2 waiting for the return of Armstrong and Edwin ?
Answer:
It was Michael Collins.

Question 7.
How, according to some scientists, can moon be made suitable for man’s living?
Answer:
By separating oxygen from the elements which contain oxygen.

Question 8.
Which is the only natural satellite of the earth ?
Answer:
Moon.

Question 9.
What is the age of the moon ?
Answer:
About 4600 million years.

Question 10.
What keeps falling on the moon all the time ?
Answer:
Solar dust.

Complete the following :

1. Two ……………… astronauts landed on the moon on July 20, 1969.
2. The ……………….. sent its astronauts and the ………………… sent its spaceships for the exploration of the moon.
3. The ……………… felt it unnecessary to land a man on the moon.
4. There is no ………………. on the moon.
5. The information gathered about the moon has proved the traditional beliefs
6. In the glare of the sun, lunar rocks reach a temperature of ………….
Answer:
1. American
2. USA, USSR
3. Soviet Union
4. air or water
5. wrong
6. 110 °C.

Write True or False against each statement :

1. The atmosphere at the moon is fit for man’s living.
2. The Soviet scientists sent a spacecraft called Apollo–11.
3. Moon is not a self-luminous body.
4. A robot was found to be as good as a man to carry out experiments on moon’s surface.
5. Mars is the Earth’s only natural satellite.
6. Poets and lovers compare the faces of their beloveds to the moon.
Answer:
1. False
2. False
3. True
4. True
5. False
6. True.

Choose the correct option for each of the following:

Question 1.
As Apoll-11 remained on the surface of the moon, ………………. revolved round the moon.
(a) Lunar Orbit
(b) Pioneer-1
(c) Luna-16
(d) Eagle-2.
Answer:
(d) Eagle-2.

Question 2.
The moon is ………… by the sun only.
(a) revolved
(b) lighted
(c) rotated
(d) glared.
Answer:
(b) lighted

Question 3.
The surface of the moon is pitted with craters caused by …
(a) planets
(b) satellites
(c) meteorites
(d) orbits.
Answer:
(c) meteorites

Question 4.
The metals found on the moon are
(a) aluminium
(b) iron
(c) titanium
(d) all of these three.
Answer:
(d) all of these three.

The Discovery of Moon Summary in English

The Discovery of Moon Introduction:

This chapter tells about the various attempts that have been made to reach the moon and gain knowledge about it. The USA and the USSR were the two countries that made these attempts. The first men to land on the moon were two Americans Armstrong and Edwin. They landed there on July 20, 1969. The Russians didn’t send any man. They sent a robot in September 1970. A lot of information has been gathered about the moon. This information has shattered many traditional beliefs about the moon. It is now known that the moon is a dead world. It has no air, water or atmosphere. Yet poets and lovers continue to compare the faces of their beloveds with the beauty of the moon.

The Discovery of Moon Summary in English:

Two American astronauts, Armstrong and Edwin, landed on the moon on July 20, 1969. They were the first men to set foot on the moon. They collected samples of the lunar soil. Then they came back with their spacecraft Apollo-11. They left on the moon some machines and instruments. These machines and instruments kept sending their observations about the moon. This great event opened new avenues in the field of space exploration.

After the successful expedition of Apollo-11, a number of other space flights were made to the moon. Thus very useful and wonderful information about the moon was collected. This new information removed all kinds of wrong beliefs about the moon. The USA and the USSR were two countries that made programmes for the exploration of the moon. The USA sent its astronauts. The USSR sent its spaceships. The Soviet Union thought it more appropriate to carry on exploration with the help of scientific instruments only. In September 1970, the Soviet scientists sent a spacecraft called Luna-16. It carried a robot that was placed on the surface of the moon. It was found that a robot was as good as a man to carry out experiments on the moon’s surface.

PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Chapter 5 The Discovery of Moon

Moreover, it was less expensive. Above all, human life was not endangered. Researches on the moon have shown that the moon is an absolutely desolate place. There is no atmosphere. There is no air or water. So it is not fit for man’s living. Of course, it has some useful metals like aluminium, titanium and iron. But men has not been tempted to use them so far. Some scientists feel that moon can be made suitable for man’s living by separating oxygen from the elements which contain oxygen.

Space flights have been made to other planets also. But moon is the only heavenly body where man has landed. Since the moon has been found to be a dead world, no programmes have been made for its further exploration. Today we know all the important facts about the moon. It is the only natural satellite of the earth. It is about one-fourth of the earth in its diameter. Its distance from the earth is 384,405 km. It orbits the earth once a month. It always keeps the same face turned towards the earth. The moon is the same age as the earth about 4600 million years. It is not a self-luminous body. It is lighted by the sun only. In the glare of the sun, it becomes as hot as 110°C. In the shadows it is as cold as -100°C.

Thus there are no attractive facts about the moon. It is a dead, dry and desolate world. Yet poets and lovers continue to compare the faces of their beloveds with the beauty of the moon.

The Discovery of Moon Summary in Hindi

The Discovery of Moon Introduction:

यह लेख उन विभिन्न यत्नों के बारे में बताता है जो चांद पर पहुंचने के लिए और इसके सम्बन्ध में ज्ञान प्राप्त करने के लिए किए गए हैं। अमरीका तथा रूस दो देश थे जिन्होंने ये यत्न किए। चांद पर पांव रखने वाले पहले दो आदमी थे-अमरीका के आर्मस्ट्रांग और एडविन। वे वहां 20 जुलाई 1969 को पहुंचे। रूसियों ने कोई आदमी न भेजा। उन्होंने सितम्बर 1970 में एक रोबोट भेजा। चांद के बारे में बहुत जानकारी प्राप्त कर ली गई है। इस जानकारी ने चांद के बारे में अनेकों पारम्परिक धारणाओं को छिन्न-भिन्न कर दिया है। अब पता चल गया है कि चांद एक मृत संसार है। वहां कोई पानी, हवा या वातावरण नहीं है। फिर भी कवि और प्रेमी लोग अपनी प्रेमिकाओं के चेहरों की तुलना चांद की सुन्दरता से करते रहते हैं।

The Discovery of Moon Summary in Hindi:

दो अमरीकी अन्तरिक्ष यात्री 20 जुलाई 1969 को चांद पर उतरे। चांद पर पांव रखने वाले वे पहले व्यक्ति थे। उन्होंने चांद की मिट्टी के नमूने एकत्रित किए। फिर वे अपने अन्तरिक्षयान अपोलो-11 के साथ वापस आ गए। वे चांद के ऊपर कुछ मशीनें और यन्त्र छोड़ आए। ये यन्त्र और मशीनें चांद के बारे में अपने अवलोकन भेजते रहे।

इस महान घटना ने अन्तरिक्ष खोज के क्षेत्र में नए मार्ग खोल दिए। अपोलो-11 के सफल अभियान के बाद अनेकों अन्य अन्तरिक्ष उड़ानें चांद तक की गईं। इस प्रकार चांद के बारे में बहुत लाभदायक और अद्भुत जानकारी इकट्ठी कर ली गई। इस नई जानकारी ने चांद के बारे में सभी ग़लत धारणाएं समाप्त कर दी। अमरीका और रूस दो देश थे जिन्होंने चांद की खोज-सम्बन्धी कार्यक्रम बनाए।

PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Chapter 5 The Discovery of Moon

अमरीका ने अपने अन्तरिक्ष यात्री भेजे। रूस ने अपने अन्तरिक्षयान भेजे। सोवियत संघ ने इस बात को अधिक उपयुक्त माना कि खोज का काम वैज्ञानिक यन्त्र के द्वारा जारी रखा जाए। सितम्बर 1970 में सोवियत वैज्ञानिकों ने लूना-16 नामक एक अन्तरिक्षयान भेजा। इसमें एक रोबेट था जिसे चांद के तल पर छोड़ दिया गया। ऐसा देखा गया कि चांद के तल पर प्रयोग करने के लिए एक रोबोट उतना ही ठीक था जितना कि कोई आदमी। इसके अतिरिक्त इसका खर्च कम पड़ता था। सब से बड़ी बात, मानव जीवन ख़तरे में नहीं पड़ता था।

चांद के ऊपर होने वाली खोजों ने यह बता दिया है कि चांद एक बिल्कुल वीरान जगह है। वहां कोई वातावरण नहीं है। वहां कोई पानी या हवा नहीं है। इसलिए यह मनुष्य के रहने के लिए उपयुक्त नहीं है। निस्सन्देह इस पर ऐल्युमिनियम, टायटेनियम और लोहे जैसी कुछ लाभदायक धातुएं हैं। किन्तु अभी तक मनुष्य उन्हें इस्तेमाल करने को आकर्षित नहीं हुआ है।

कुछ वैज्ञानिक ऐसा महसूस करते हैं कि चांद को आदमी के रहने के लिए उपयुक्त बनाया जा सकता है, यदि ऑक्सीजन को वहां पाए जाने वाले ऐसे तत्त्वों से अलग कर दिया जाए जिनमें ऑक्सीजन विद्यमान है। अन्य ग्रहों को भी अन्तरिक्ष उड़ानें की गई हैं। किन्तु केवल चांद ही ऐसा आकाशीय पिण्ड है जहां आदमी उतरा है। क्योंकि चांद एक मृत संसार पाया गया है, इसकी और अधिक खोज करने के लिए कोई आगे की योजनाएं नहीं बनाई गई हैं।

आज हम चांद के विषय में सभी महत्त्वपूर्ण तथ्यों को जानते हैं। यह धरती का एकमात्र प्राकृतिक उपग्रह है। अपने व्यास में यह धरती का लगभग एक-चौथाई है। इसकी धरती से दूरी 384,405 किलोमीटर है। यह महीने में एक बार धरती का चक्कर काटता है। यह सदा अपना वही पक्ष धरती की तरफ़ झुकाए रखता है। चांद की आयु उतनी ही है जितनी कि धरती की-लगभग 4,600 मिलीयन वर्ष।

यह आत्म-दीप्त पिण्ड नहीं है। इसे केवल सूर्य का प्रकाश ही मिलता है। सूर्य की तेज़ चमक में यह 110°C तक गर्म हो जाता है। छाया वाली जगहों में यह –100°C तक ठण्डा हो जाता है। इस प्रकार चांद के सम्बन्ध में कोई आकर्षक विशेषताएँ नहीं है। यह एक मृत, सूखा और वीरान संसार है। फिर भी कवि और प्रेमी लोग अपनी प्रेमिकाओं के चेहरों की तुलना चांद की सुन्दरता के साथ करते हैं।

The Discovery of Moon Translation in Hindi

(Page 115-116) On July 20, 1969 ……… his two companions.

कठिन शब्दार्थ-1. astronauts – अन्तरिक्ष यात्री ; 2. emerging – बाहर निकलते हुए ; 3. spacecraft – अन्तरिक्षयान ; 4. avenues – मार्ग 5. exploration. – खोज ; 6. lunar – चांद सम्बन्धी ; 7. observations – अवलोकन ; 8. observatories – वेधशालाएँ।

Text

On July 20, 1969, two American astronauts, Armstrong and Edwin, emerging from the spacecraft Apollo-11, became the first men to set foot on the moon. This great event opened new avenues in the field of space and moon exploration. After collecting samples of the lunar soil, these two astronauts returned to their spacecraft Apollo-11. However, they left such 11 instruments and machines on the moon which continued to send their observations about the moon to the observatories on the earth. Apollo 11 was locked with another space craft Eagle. As Apollo-ll remained on the surface of the moon, Eagle-2 revolved round the moon. Aboard the Eagle-2 was a third astronaut Michael Collins, who waited for the return of his two companions.

अनुवाद

20 जुलाई 1969 को दो अमरीकी अन्तरिक्षयात्री, आर्मस्ट्रांग और एडविन, अपोलो-11 नामक अन्तरिक्षयान में से बाहर निकलने पर ऐसे पहले व्यक्ति बन गए जिन्होंने चांद पर पांव रखा। इस महत्त्वपूर्ण घटना ने अन्तरिक्ष और चांद सम्बन्धी खोज के क्षेत्र में नए मार्ग खोल दिए। चांद की मिट्टी के नमूने एकत्रित करने के बाद, ये दोनों अन्तरिक्ष यात्री अपने अन्तरिक्षयान अपोलो को लौट आए। किन्तु वे चांद पर ऐसे यन्त्र और मशीनें छोड़ आए जो चांद के बारे में अपने अवलोकन धरती पर की वेधशालाओं को भेजते रहे। अपोलो-11 ईगल-2 नाम के एक अन्य अन्तरिक्षयान से जुड़ा हुआ था। जिस दौरान अपोलो-11 चांद की धरती पर रहा, ईगल-2 चांद के चक्कर काटता रहा। ईगल-2 में एक तीसरा अन्तरिक्ष यात्री माइकल कॉलिन्ज सवार था, जो अपने दो साथियों के लौटने की प्रतीक्षा करता रहा।

PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Chapter 5 The Discovery of Moon

(Page 116)

After this successful ………… which contain oxygen.

कठिन शब्दार्थ-1. expedition – अभियान ; 2. series – श्रृंखला ; 3. manned – मानव-संचालित ; 4. misconceptions – ग़लत धारणाएं ; 5. glimpse – नज़ारा ; 6. spaceship — अन्तरिक्षयान ; 7. planets – ग्रह ; 8. robot – यन्त्रमानव ; 9. decades – दशक ; 10. shattered – छिन्न-भिन्न कर दिए ; 11. absolutely – पूरी तरह से ; 12. desolate – निर्जन ; 13. inhabitation – निवास ; 14. tempted – आकर्षित ; 15. exploit – लाभ उठाना, काम में लाना ; 16. elements – तत्त्व।

Text

After this successful expedition, a series of Apollo spacecraft for making more manned space flights to moon was started. These flights made available extremely useful and wonderful information about the moon. This new information removed all kinds of mis-conceptions about the moon from the minds of the people the world over.

The discovery of moon formed an important part of the space programme. Besides earth, it was the only heavenly mass where man landed and had a glimpse of it. Spacecraft have been landed on other planets too, but man has yet to set his foot on any of these heavenly bodies. The USSR and the USA had worked out programmes for the exploration of moon. The USSR sent there its spaceships, whereas the USA sent its astronauts. The exploration of planets is still going on but there is no more any programme for further exploration of moon.

The Soviet Union did not feel it necessary to land man on the moon. It thought it more appropriate to send spaceships and to carry on exploration with the help of scientific instruments only. The Soviet scientists sent a spacecraft called Luna-16 on the moon in September, 1970. It carried a robot that was placed on the surface of the moon. A robot was found to be as good as a man to carry out experiments on moon’s surface. Moreover, it was also less expensive and above all, human life was not endangered.

PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Chapter 5 The Discovery of Moon

Researches on moon for over three decades have shattered many traditional beliefs about it. The moon is an absolutely desolate place where there is no water and air. The Soviet scientists have declared it unfit for human inhabitation. Of course some useful metals like aluminium, titanium and iron have been found on moon but man has not been tempted to exploit these metal resources of moon. However, some scientists still feel that moon can be made inhabitable for men by separating oxygen from elements which contain oxygen.

अनुवाद

इस सफल अभियान के बाद मानव-चालित अन्तरिक्ष उड़ानें करने के लिए अपोलो अन्तरिक्षयानों की एक श्रृंखला शुरू कर दी गई। इन उड़ानों ने चांद के बारे में अत्यन्त लाभदायक तथा अद्भुत जानकारी उपलब्ध करा दी। इस नई जानकारी ने पूरे संसार भर में लोगों के मनों से चांद के बारे में सभी तरह की ग़लत धारणाओं को दूर कर दिया।

चांद-सम्बन्धी खोज अन्तरिक्ष कार्यक्रम का एक महत्त्वपूर्ण हिस्सा थी। धरती के अतिरिक्त केवल यही एक आकाशीय पुंज था जहां मानव ने पांव रखा. हो और इसका नज़ारा लिया हो। अन्य ग्रहों पर भी अन्तरिक्षयान उतारे गए हैं।किन्तु इन आकाशीय पुंजों में से किसी के भी ऊपर मनुष्य ने अभी अपना कदम रखना है। सोवियत संघ तथा संयुक्त राज्य अमरीका ने चांद सम्बन्धी खोज करने के लिए योजनाएँ बनाई थीं।

सोवियत संघ ने अपने अन्तरक्षि यान भेजे, जबकि संयुक्त राज्य अमेरिका ने अपने अन्तरिक्ष यात्री भेजे। ग्रहों की खोज अब भी जारी है किन्तु चांद सम्बन्धी और अधिक खोज करने के लिए अब और कोई कार्यक्रम नहीं है।

सोवियत संघ ने मनुष्य को चांद पर भेजना ज़रूरी न समझा। इसने इस बात को अधिक उपयुक्त माना कि अन्तरिक्षयान भेजे जाएँ तथा केवल वैज्ञानिक यन्त्रों की सहायता से ही खोज का काम चलाया जाए। सोवियत वैज्ञानिकों ने लूना-16 नामक एक अन्तरिक्षयान सितम्बर 1970 को चांद पर भेजा। इसमें एक रोबोट था जिसे चांद के तल पर रख दिया गया।

चांद के तल पर प्रयोग करने के लिए एक रोबोट को उतना ही ठीक पाया गया जितना कि एक आदमी को। इसके अतिरिक्त यह कम खर्चीला भी था, और सब से बड़ी बात यह है कि मानव जीवन को ख़तरे में न डाला गया।तीन दशक से अधिक समय की खोजों ने इसके सम्बन्ध में अनेकों पारम्परिक विश्वासों को छिन्न-भिन्न कर दिया है। चांद एक पूरी तरह से बंजर जगह है जहां कोई पानी तथा हवा नहीं है। सोवियत वैज्ञानिकों ने इसे मानव के निवास के लिए अनुपयुक्त घोषित कर दिया है।

निस्सन्देह ऐल्युमिनियम, टायटेनियम, और लोहेजैसी कुछ लाभदायक धातुएं चांद पर पाई गई हैं किन्तु चांद के इन साधनों को इस्तेमाल में लाने के लिए मनुष्य लालायित नहीं हुआ है। तो भी कुछ वैज्ञानिक अब भी ऐसा महसूस करते हैं कि चांद को मनुष्यों के लिए रहने योग्य बनाया जा सकता है, ऐसे तत्त्वों से ऑक्सीजन को अलग करके जिनमें ऑक्सीजन विद्यमान है।

(Page 117) Today we know ………………….. this lovely satellite.

कठिन शब्दार्थ-1. satellite – उपग्रह ; 2. parent – मूल ; 3. orbits – के गिर्द घूमता है ; 4. pitted – गड्ढे बने होना ; 5. meteorites – उल्का -पिण्ड ; 6. self-luminous – आत्म-दीप्त ; 7. phases – कलाएँ ; 8. delay – देरी ; 9. cosmic – अन्तरिक्ष ; 10. glare – तेज़ चमक ; 11. dull – नीरस।

Text

Today we know all the important facts about the moon. It ¡s the Earth’s only natural satellite. Compared to satellites of other planets, it is very large in relation to its parent planet. It is a quarter of the earth’s diameter measuring 3476 km. Its distance from the earth is 384,405 km. It orbits the earth once a month, keeping the same face turned towards earth as it does so. Its surface is pitted with craters caused by meteorites.

The moon is the same age as the earth, about 4,600 million years. The moon is not a self-luminous body. The earth and the moon travel around a common centre of gravity in space. As the moon orbits the earth, different amounts of its sunlit surface are visible from the earth. This produces the cycle known as Phases of the moon. We can see the full-moon and no-moon once in a month, and for rest of the days it appears in its phases. The average daily delay in moon-rise and moon-set is about 50 minutes. The moon is lacking water and it

has no atmosphere. A very light ‘rain’ of cosmic dust continually falls here. In the glare of the sun, lunar rocks reach a temperature of 110°C more than the boiling point of water. But in shadows the temperature goes down to less than —100°C. In spite of the knowledge of these ‘dull’ facts about the moon, poets and lovers continue to sing of the beauties of this heavenly body and compare the faces of their beloveds to this lovely satellite.

अनुवाद

आज हम चांद के बारे में सभी महत्त्वपूर्ण बातों को जानते हैं। यह धरती का एक-मात्र प्राकृतिक उपग्रह है। अन्य ग्रहों के उपग्रहों की तुलना में, यह अपने मुख्य ग्रह के हिसाब से बहुत बड़ा है। यह धरती के व्यास का एक चौथाई है जो 3476 किलोमीटर है। इसकी 3476 km. धरती से दूरी 384,405 किलोमीटर है। यह महीने में एक बार धरती का चक्कर काटता है, तथा ऐसा करते समय यह धरती की तरफ़ अपना वही तल घुमाए रखता है। इसका तल बड़े-बड़े गड्ढों से भरा हुआ है जो उल्का-पिण्डों के द्वारा बने हैं।

चांद की आयु धरती की आयु जितनी ही है, लगभग 460 करोड़ वर्ष चांद एक आत्म-दीप्त पुंज नहीं है। धरती तथा चांद अन्तरिक्ष में एक सांझे गुरुत्व आकर्षण केन्द्र के गिर्द घूमते हैं। जब चांद धरती का चक्कर लगाता है, तो सूर्य के प्रकाश से रोशन हुए इसके तल की विभिन्न मात्राएं धरतीपर से दिखाई देती हैं। इससे एक चक्र पैदा हो जाता है जिसे चांद की कलाएँ कहा जाता है।

हम पूर्ण चांद तथा शून्य (अमावस का) चांद महीने में एक बार देख सकते हैं, तथा अन्य दिनों में यह अपने विभिन्न आकारों में दिखाई देता है। चांद के उदय और अस्त होने में 50 minutes. प्रतिदिन की औसतन देरी लगभग 50 मिनट की होती है। चांद पर कोई पानी नहीं है तथा वहां कोई वातावरण नहीं है। यहां अन्तरिक्षी धूल की बहुत हल्की वर्षा निरन्तर होती रहती है। सूर्य की तेज़ चमक में चांद पर की चट्टानें 110°C के तापमान पर पहुंच जाती हैं, जो पानी के उबाल बिन्दु से ज्यादा है।

PSEB 9th Class English Main Course Book Solutions Chapter 5 The Discovery of Moon

किन्तु छाया वाली जगहों में तापमान -100°C से कम हो जाता है। चांद के सम्बन्ध में इन रुचिहीन तथ्यों की जानकारी के बावजूद कवि और प्रेमी इस आकाशीय पुंज की सुन्दरता के बारे में गाते रहते हैं तथा अपनी प्रेमिकाओं के चेहरों की तुलना इस सुन्दर उपग्रह से करते रहते हैं।

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 4 Introduction to Vedic Literature

Punjab State Board PSEB 12th Class Religion Book Solutions Chapter 4 Introduction to Vedic Literature Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 12 Religion Chapter 4 Introduction to Vedic Literature

Long Answer Type Questions:

Question 1.
Describe the salient features of Vedic literature in brief but meaningful.
Or
Discuss the salient features of Vedic literature.
Or
Describe the salient features and importance of Vedic literature.
Or
What is meant by Vedic literature? Explain briefly the early and later Vedic literature.
Or
Give a brief introduction of Vedic literature. Write short notes on four Vedas as well.
Or
Explain the main features and importance of the Vedic literature.
Or
Give a brief introduction about, the Vedic literature.
Or
Describe the salient features of vedic literature.
Answer:
Vedic literature implies that literature which was composed by the Aryans and this literature is considered to be a storehouse of valuable knowledge. It describes the solutions to the spiritual and other problems of life. Undoubtedly the main objective behind the composition of Vedic literacture was religious but it also gives a clear indication of the social, economic and political life of the people of the early Vedic period.

For this reason, this literature is considered to be a trustworthy source of the ancient Indian history. It is completely written in Sanskrit. On the basis of the time of composition, the Vedic literature can be divided into two parts : the early Vedic understand their meanings.

There are different Brahmanas in each Veda. Most famous among the Brahmanas are Aitareya Brahmana, Taittiriya Brahmana, Gopatha Brahmana and Shatpatha Brahmana etc. They have been written in prose. They give us knowledge about the methods of performing yajnas and sacrifices. These also give a complete description of the brave deeds of the popular kings. The Brahmanas . have great historic value.

3. The Aranyakas : These texts are a part of the Brahmanas. These texts have been written about the ascetics who lived in the forests. They emphasie more on the spiritual subjects and moral duties. They also explain about the customs associated with yajnas and sacrifices. Aitareya Aranyaka, Kaushitaki Aranyaka, Taittiriya Aranyaka and Brihada Aranyaka are the names of a few very popular texts.

4. The Upanishads : The Upanishads are those texts which describe knowledge. Since they are the last part of the Vedas, they are also called the Vedanta. They are 108 in number and they were composed by different hermits between 1000-500 B.C. Famous among these are Isha, Kena, Katha, Prashna, Mundaka, Aitareya, Chhandogya, Brihad Aranyaka, Kaushitaki and Shveta Shvatara. These throw light. on the indepth spiritual subjects.

These try to tell what soul is and what is its relation to the Supreme Soul. They have tried to solve several mysteries pertaining to life and death. They throw ample light on subjects like Karma, Moksha, Maya and Transmigration. Dr. S.R. Goyal has rightly said, “The Upanishadic philosophy is rightly regarded as the source of all Indian Philosophy.”

(B) Later Vedic Literature:

The Vedangas, Sutras, Upavedas, Puranas, Dharama shastras and Epics are . included in the later Vedic period. The literature composed during this period is also, called Smriti because this was composed by the hermits based on their knowledge.

1. The Vedangas: The Vedangas imply a part of the Vedas. They are 6 in number, and they are related to different subjects. They are Shiksha, Chhanda, Kalpa, Viyakarana, Nirukta and Jyotisha. Most important is the Kalpa Vedanga which describes the customs and traditions of the Aryans Vedangas are important to comprehend the Vedas properly and to recite them properly.

2. The Sutras: A new style of writing emerged in literature in the later Vedic, period. This was called the Sutra. These tried to indicate more meaning in fewer words. Their main objective was that the people may easily memorize the Vedic literature. These can be divided into three categories.

Srauta Sutra: It describes the yajnas, sacrifices, and other religious customs and traditions.

Griha Sutra: This Sutra is the most important Sutra among all the Sutras. It describes all the duties to be performed by human beings from birth to death.

Dharma Sutra: It gives a description of the laws and traditions prevalent then. The Upavedas :

3. The Upavedas are an aid to the Vedas. These are four in number.

  • Ayurveda: It describes medicinal herbs.
  • Dhanurveda: It describes the art of fighting battles.
  • Gandharvaveda: It throws light on the subjects pertaining to music.
  • Shilpa Veda: It gives information related to art and architecture.

4. The Dharmashastras: The Dharmashastras are the law texts of the Hindus. These are also called the Smriti Grants. Of these, Manu Smriti is the oldest and the most important Dharmashastra. Besides this, the other important Shastras are Yajnavalkya Smriti, Vishnu Smriti and Narad Smriti. These throw ample light on the four castes, ashramas, daily rites to be performed, duties of the rulers and the judicial system. Hence the Dharmashastras are very important from the historical point of view.

5. The Puranas : The Puranas mean ancient. It is one of our important sources to know about ancient history. There are 18 Puranas in all. Popular among them are Vishnu, Bhagvata, Matsya and Vayu Purana. Each Purana has been divided into five parts. The first part deals with the origin of the world, the second discusses the second origin of the world, the third discusses the lineage of gods, the fourth discusses the Mahayugas and the fifth discusses the famous dynasties. Historically, the fifth part of Puranas is the most beneficial.

6. Six Schools of Indian Philosophy: There are six well-known schools of Hindu philosophy, popularly known as Darshanas or Shastras. In these testaments, many wise Rishis had tried to explain intricate philosophical thoughts connecting God, soul, death and birth. The higher philosophy indicates how superior was the deep wisdom of the Aryans How were the Aryans ahead of others and how could they check the temptations of materialism.

  • Sankhya Shastra of Kapila: Rishi Kapila is the author of this Shastra. He denies the existence of God and asserts that matter (prakrit) and soul are the only two realities. It is through the formation and reformation of matter and soul, the creation takes place.
  • Yoga Shastra of Patanjali: It is directly related to the Yoga and suggests the practice of Yoga’ with the object of achieving God.
  • Nyaya Shastra of Gautama: Rishi Gautama has expounded a philosophy that God can be realised through right thinking and right knowledge.
  • Vaisheshik Shastra of Kanad: Rishi Kanad holds the view that the whole world is an assimilation of atoms, which are indestructible.
  • Purva Mimansa of Jamini: Jamini’s philosophy throws light on the sacrifices and religous rites of the Aryans which is a key to the attainment of Mukti.
  • Uttar Mimansa of Vyasa: Rishi Vyasa advocates worshipping of God. God is supreme, omnipotent and omnipresent. Therefore, He alone should be worshipped with utmost sincerity and devotion.

7. The Epics : The Ramayana and the Mahabharata are two famous epics of the later Vedic period. The Ramayana was written by Maharishi Valmiki. It has 24,000 shalokas in it. The main subject of the Ramayana is the battle between Sri Ramchandra and Ravana. The Mahabharata is the biggest epic of India. It was written by Rishi Veda Vyasa. It has more than 1,00,000 shalokas in it. The Bhagvadgita is a part of the Mahabharata. The main subject of the Mahabharata is the battle between the Pandvas and the Kauravas.

These two epics throw ample light on the religious, social, political and economic conditions of the people at that time. Professor H.V. Sreenivasa Murthy has rightly said, “The two great epics, the Ramayana and the Mahabharata throw a flood of light on various aspects of human culture. They have to a large extent, moulded the character and life of our people. Thus they form the strongest link between India, old and new.”

Importance of the Vedic Literature:

The Vedic literature occupies a special place in Indian history. It is called the heart and soul of Hinduism; The reason for this is that this literature describes in great detail the basic principles of Hindu philosophy. How was this earth created? What is Atman (Soul)? What is its connection with the Parmatman? What is Moksha and how is it attained? What is Karma? What is knowledge? Why does man keep wandering in the vicious circle of vices?

These are a few mysterious questions the answers to which are clearly given in the later Vedic literature. Hence the Vedic literature acts as a pillar of Hinduism. Besides this, the literature is a valuable source of information about the social, political and economic life of people.

In brief, the Vedic literature acted as a mirror for the Indian culture? It has been a source of inspiration for the authors and scholars of not only India but abroad as well. Undoubtedly, it is a matter of great pride for us. In the words of the famous historians B.P. Saha and K.S. Behera, “The Vedic literature is a magnificient contribution of the Aryans to the Indian culture and civilisation. No doubt, the Vedas are predominantly religious literature but the Vedas directly indicate about religious, social, economic and political conditions of the time.”

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 4 Introduction to Vedic Literature

Question 2.
Explain the following :

  1. Puranas
  2. Upanishads
  3. Rigveda
  4. Shastras.

Answer:

(1) Puranas : The Puranas mean ancient. It is one of our important sources to know about ancient history. There are 18 Puranas in all. Popular among them are Vishnu, Bhagvata, Matsya and Vayu Purana. Each Purana has been divided into five parts. The first part deals with the origin of the world, the second discusses the second origin of the world, the third discusses the lineage of gods, the fourth discusses the Mahayugas and the fifth discusses the famous dynasties. Historically, the fifth part of Puranas is the most beneficial.

(2) Upanishads : The Upanishads are those texts which describe knowledge. Since they are the last part of the Vedas, they are also called the Vedanta. They are 108 in number and they were composed by different hermits between 1000-500 B.C. Famous among these are Isha, Kena, Katha, Prashna, Mundaka, Aitareya, Chhandogya, Brihad Aranyaka, Kaushitaki and Shveta Shvatara. These throw light. on the indepth spiritual subjects.

These try to tell what soul is and what is its relation to the Supreme Soul. They have tried to solve several mysteries pertaining to life and death. They throw ample light on subjects like Karma, Moksha, Maya and Transmigration. Dr. S.R. Goyal has rightly said, “The Upanishadic philosophy is rightly regarded as the source of all Indian Philosophy.”

3. Rigveda : Vedic literature implies that literature which was composed by the Aryans and this literature is considered to be a storehouse of valuable knowledge. It describes the solutions to the spiritual and other problems of life. Undoubtedly the main objective behind the composition of Vedic literacture was religious but it also gives a clear indication of the social, economic and political life of the people of the early Vedic period.

For this reason, this literature is considered to be a trustworthy source of the ancient Indian history. It is completely written in Sanskrit. On the basis of the time of composition, the Vedic literature can be divided into two parts : the early Vedic understand their meanings.

4. Shastras : There are six well-known schools of Hindu philosophy, popularly known as Darshanas or Shastras. In these testaments, many wise Rishis had tried to explain intricate philosophical thoughts connecting God, soul, death and birth. The higher philosophy indicates how superior was the deep wisdom of the Aryans How were the Aryans ahead of others and how could they check the temptations of materialism.

  • Sankhya Shastra of Kapila: Rishi Kapila is the author of this Shastra. He denies the existence of God and asserts that matter (prakrit) and soul are the only two realities. It is through the formation and reformation of matter and soul, the creation takes place.
  • Yoga Shastra of Patanjali: It is directly related to the Yoga and suggests the practice of Yoga’ with the object of achieving God.
  • Nyaya Shastra of Gautama: Rishi Gautama has expounded a philosophy that God can be realised through right thinking and right knowledge.
  • Vaisheshik Shastra of Kanad: Rishi Kanad holds the view that the whole world is an assimilation of atoms, which are indestructible.
  • Purva Mimansa of Jamini: Jamini’s philosophy throws light on the sacrifices and religous rites of the Aryans which is a key to the attainment of Mukti.
  • Uttar Mimansa of Vyasa: Rishi Vyasa advocates worshipping of God. God is supreme, omnipotent and omnipresent. Therefore, He alone should be worshipped with utmost sincerity and devotion.

Question 3.
Describe the salient features of four Vedas in brief but meaningful.
Or
Discuss in brief four Vedas and their importance in, the field of Religion.
Or
How many Vedas are there? Explain with their names in brief but meaningful.
Or
How Vedas were written? Discuss any two in brief.
Or
Discuss in brief but iqeaningful the importance of four Vedas.
Or
Describe the main features of Vedas.
Or
Write the names of the four Vedas. Explain in brief any two Vedas.
Or
Write about the main characteristics of the Vedas. Name any two of the Vedas.
Or
Write in brief about the four Vedas.
Or
What do you know about the Vedas?
Or
Name the four Vedas. Explain Rigveda in detail.
Or
Discuss the subject-matter of the Rigveda. Name the four Vedas.
Or
Throw light on the subject-matter of the Rigveda.
Or
What are the total number of Vedas? Explain any two Vedas.
Or
Describe the main contents of Rigveda and Samaveda.
Answer:
The Vedas have the highest position in Vedic literature. There are four Vedas. Their names are Rigveda, Samaveda, Yajurveda and Aharvaveda. The Atharvaveda was added to the count of Vedas in the end. For this reason, the first three Vedas are also known by the name of ‘Terai’. These Vedas have been written in Sanskrit. These are considered to be the most sacred texts of Hinduism. The word Veda has been derived from the element ‘Vid’ which means knowledge or to know.

In other words, the Vedas can be called the storehouse of knowledge of the a This knowledge had been acquired by Rishis. For this reason, the Vedas have also been called ‘Smriti’ The Vedas were composed between 1500 B.C. and 600 B.C. Undoubtedly, the Vedas are a valuable source to know about the religious, social, political and economic history of the Aryans A brief description of the features of the Vedas is as follows :

1. The Rigveda : The Rigveda is the ancient and the most important of all the Vedas of the Aryans Rig has been derived from the word ‘Rik’ which means the mantras chanted while worshipping. For this reason, the Rigveda is also called a collection of mantras composed in devotion of the gods. The Rigveda was composed between 1500-1000 B.C. It was a time when the Aryans lived in Punjab. The Rigveda is an exhaustive text. It has 1028 suktas (hymns). Each sukta has several mantras. The total number of mantras in the Rigveda are 10,562.

These have been divided into ten chapters. Some chapters are big while some are small. The first and tenth chapter (mandal) are the lengthiest. Both the mandals have 191 stanzas each. The second to seventh mandals are considered to be the heart of the Rigveda. They are considered to be older than the rest of the mandals. The ninth chapter has in it the mantras devoted to Lord Soma only.

The Rigveda has the maximum number of mantras (250) in devotion of Lord Indra. 200 mantras are in devotion of Agni. The rest are devoted to Varan, Suryar Rudra, ‘ Soma, Usha, Ratri and Saraswati. All these gods and goddesses were considered to be a symbol of natural forces. These gods were very powerful and great. They used to acquire human form and when appeased by the devotion of their devotees, blessed them with several boons. They were worshipped to obtain victory in battles, obtain wealth, a comfortable and long life and children. Several Rishis have written mantras in the Rigveda. Popular among them were Vishwamitra, Bhardwaj, Vashishtha, Vamadeva, Atri, Kanva and Gritsmada.

The Rigveda has mantras by women like y Apala Ghosha, Vishwavara, Mudgalini and Lopamudra etc. The famous Gayatri Mantra is also given in the Rigveda which is read by the Hindus even today. Though the Rigveda was composed from religious point of view yet it has great historical importance as well.

2. The Samaveda : The word Sama means melodious songs. For this reason, it is also called a collection of melodious songs. It has a total of 1875 mantras. Of these, only 75 mantras are new and the rest have been extracted from the Rigveda. These mantras have been divided into two parts which are called Poorvarachika and Uttarrachika. There are 650 mantras in the Poorvarachika whereas there are 1225 mantras in the Uttarrachika.

The mantras were sung melodiously during the performance of yajnas. The priests who used to sing these mantras were called the Udagatris. These mantras were sung in the seven swaras. Three types of musical instruments were used while singing the mantras i.e. Venu, Dudubhi and Veena. Undoubtedly, the Samaveda can be called the first and the most valuable source of Indian music.

3. The Yajurveda : Yajur implies yajna and Yajurveda is a text that consists of the mantras recited at the time of performance of yajnas. It has 2086 mantras in it. These mantras have been divided into 40 chapters. A part of the Yajurveda is in prose and a part of it is in poetic form. It is believed that this Veda was composed in Kurukshetra. The objective of this Veda was to tell about the procedure to be followed during the performance of yajnas.

The priests who helped while performing the yajnas were called ‘Adhavaryu’. The yajnas were performed in order to appease the gods so that they could fulfil the desires of their devotees. Hence, this Veda was centred around ‘Karmakanda’. It also tells about the measures to acquire divine powers. This Veda is divided into two parts i.e. Shukla Yajurveda and Krishna Yajurveda. The Shukla Yajurveda describes only the mantras whereas the Krishna Yajurveda also gives their meanings. This Veda gives us valuable information about the social and religious lives of the Aryans

4. The Atharvaveda : The Atharvaveda was composed in the end. Its name came from the name of Atharvana Rishi. He was the master of magical powers and was famous for destroying ghosts and spirits. Infact, the Atharvaveda is actually a collection of mantras related to black magic. It gives methods to control the powers of ghosts and witches. This proves that there was a drastic change in the religious life of the Aryans by then. Besides this, this Veda also describes the cure of the several diseases. This Veda is also called the Brahmaveda because this Veda was written by Brahman priests.

They took the aid of Agni to protect human beings from ghosts and spirits. There are a total 731 hymns and approximately 6000 mantras. Of these, approximately 1200 mantras have been taken from the Rigveda. This Veda has been divided into 20 chapters. Its 20th chapter is the longest which comprises of 928 mantras.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 4 Introduction to Vedic Literature

Question 4.
Describe Yajurveda among four vedas.
Answer:

The Yajurveda : Yajur implies yajna and Yajurveda is a text that consists of the mantras recited at the time of performance of yajnas. It has 2086 mantras in it. These mantras have been divided into 40 chapters. A part of the Yajurveda is in prose and a part of it is in poetic form. It is believed that this Veda was composed in Kurukshetra. The objective of this Veda was to tell about the procedure to be followed during the performance of yajnas.

The priests who helped while performing the yajnas were called ‘Adhavaryu’. The yajnas were performed in order to appease the gods so that they could fulfil the desires of their devotees. Hence, this Veda was centred around ‘Karmakanda’. It also tells about the measures to acquire divine powers. This Veda is divided into two parts i.e. Shukla Yajurveda and Krishna Yajurveda. The Shukla Yajurveda describes only the mantras whereas the Krishna Yajurveda also gives their meanings. This Veda gives us valuable information about the social and religious lives of the Aryans.

Question 5.
What is meant by Vedic literature? What are the main subjects of the Vedic literature?
Or
Examine the important aspects of the Vedas.
Or
Which main subjects are touched in Rigveda? Mention the total number of hymns given in Rigveda.
Or
Write about the subject-matter of Rigveda. Write a brief note on the Purush-Sukta hymn.
Or
Write about the main features of Hinduism.
Or
Give an account of the religious thoughts of Vedas.
Or
Explain the spiritual importance of Vedas.
Answer:
The Vedic literature primarily describes the principles of Hinduism. It gives a description of polytheism, monotheism and henotheism. It even describes the means of pleasing the gods through yajnas and sacrifices. It also describes how the world was created? What is Atman and what is Brahman? What is the relationship between the Atman and Brahman? What is the principle of Karma and Transmigration? What is Moksha and how can it be obtained? What is heaven and hell? A brief description of these thoughts is given below :

1. Polytheism : It is clear from the description in the Rigveda that in the beginning the Aryans worshipped the forces of nature as god. Each shining, thundering and bright looking beautiful object or power was considered as a god or a goddess. According to the Rigveda, the Aryans worshipped 33 gods. These .were divided into three parts. These were : gods of the heaven, gods of earth and the gods between the heaven and the earth. All these gods were considered powerful and great. At one time, a particular god was worshipped and at another instance another deity was worshipped. This popularised the principle of polytheism.

2. Monotheism : During the Vedic Age, there was always the principle of polytheism behind the principle of monotheism. In many places in the Rigveda, Indra is spoken of as the sole Lord of the universe, and Brahman, the sole spirit of all gods, “All gods are one, only the saints have described them differently”. The Ish Upanishad says, “He is fire, He is sun, He is the wind, He is the moon, He is Shukra, He is Brahman, He is water and He is the sole Lord. He is the sole source of light.” It is clear from these examples that the Aryans believed in one omnipotent god.

3. Henotheism : Although the Aryans believed in several gods yet none of them was considered superior or inferior. Each was considered great in his own right and each of them was praised with the same devotion. The deity related to a region was considered supreme in that region. A verse in Rigveda cites, ‘O deities ! None of you is inferior, none of you is a small child. You all are great.” In this manner, the Aryans considered all their gods equal.

4. Yajnas and Sacrifices: To appease the gods and goddesses, the Aryans indulged in several yajnas during the Vedic period. These were conducted methodically with all the rituals so that the deity may not get displeased due to any mistake. First a vedi was built for the yajnas. Then the pious fire was ignited. In this fire ghee, milk, rice and somras were poured. Several animals like goat, sheep and horses were sacrificed during the yajnas.

The small yajnas were conducted at the family level whereas the bigger yajnas were conducted by the elite class. During the post Vedic period, these yajnas had become a complex process. There was a hope or desire for victory in battles, acquisition of wealth, obtaining a child and happy family life behind performing these yajnas. According to Dr. S.R. Goyal, “Vedic religion was essentially a religion of yajnas or sacrifices. The worshipper offered some oblations to god with the chanting of prayers and expected that God would grant him desired boon in return.”

5. How was the world created? : How was the world created? The Nasdia Sukta of Rigveda gives us important information with regard to this. It tells us that before the creation of the world, there was the presence of God alone. There was darkness all around without Him. It was then that God decided to create the world. Not only did he create men, animals, birds, etc. but also created the sun, the moon, the stars, mountains, seas, rivers and flowers etc. The Upanishads have also repeatedly described that the Brahman had created the whole universe.

6. What is Self? : The Aryans believed in Self. The .word Self has been often used in the Upanishads. It is omnipresent. The living element in all creatures is the Self. For this reason, this is called the source of all light. It is Brahman or God. It assumes a living role and resides in the hearts of all beings. The Self is immortal. It continues to enter from one body to the other till it attains freedom from all Karmas. After this, it sublimes with Brahman. In this manner, there is no distinction between Self and Brahman.

7. What is Absolute? : The Upanishads vividly describe the Absolute (the Brahman). It is the Brahman who is the creator of this world. He is the master of unlimited powers. He is capable of doing everything. He is the source of all fights. He is the true heart and an epitome of happiness. He is the store-house of complete knowledge. His description is beyond words. He is immortal. Brahman is the Atman, the Self. For this reason, there is no basic distinction between Brahman and the Self.

8. Worship of Forefathers : The Rigveda gives a description of the worship of forefathers. The forefathers resided in heaven. They were the ancestors of the Aryans Their worship was considered equivalent to the worship of gods. There are several verses in the Rigveda in their devotion. It was expected that the worship of the forefathers would help protection of their descendants, would eradicate their problems, would bless them with wealth, power, long fife and children. With time, the devotion of the Aryans towards the worship of their forefathers increased manifold.

9. Rita and Dharman : The Rigveda and the other Vedic texts have described the words Rita and Dharman several times. Rita implies the process that runs the functioning of this world. It is according to the Rita that the sun rises in the morning. The sun, moon and stars appear bright. The earth revolves around the sun. It eradicates all darkness to spread light. Rita is therefore a universal truth.

Anrita (myth) is the opposite of Rita. Dining the time of the Upanishads, the word Dharma replaced the word Rita. The word ‘Dharman’ means law. These were constructed by the gods. These were applicable to the materialistic world, men and sacrifices. The good men led their lives according to Dharman.

10. Karma and Transmigration : The Vedic literature has time and again mentioned that man is the maker of his own luck. What he sows, so shall he reap. If he performs good deeds, he would be free from the vicious circle of transmigration and attain Moksha (salvation). If he indulges in ill-deeds, he would always be sad and troubled and he would under no circumstances receive freedom from transmigration, A man’s deeds follow him just like his own shadow.

11. Moksha : The attainment of Moksha is the prime objective of the life of a man’s life. Due to his ignorance and lack of knowledge, man spends his entire life running after the attainment of materialistic ends. He indulges in materialistic pleasures and thinks that he has achieved everything by acquiring wealth. He forgets that everything in this world is momentary. He is forever trapped in these cobwebs and is never able to get freedom.

When man is able to overcome his ignorance, all his doubts get eradicated. He knows all and attains freedom from all bonds of the world. This is the condition of Moksha. The Atman sublimes with the Parmatman and he attains happiness forever.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 4 Introduction to Vedic Literature

12. Faith in Heaven andi Hell: The Vedic literature describes that the Aryans believed in heaven and hell. According to them, those who lead their lives according to the moral principles, give charity and do not give any trouble to anyone reside in heaven after their death. This is a place where all the gods .reside. It is a place of full happiness. On the other hand, the sinners and wicked men go to hell after death. The Pin-anas etc. give a detailed description of the grave miseries in hell.

13. Purusha-Sukta: The Purusha-Sukta is described in the tenth chapter of the Rigveda. According to this, Brahman had created the Brahmanas from his mouth, the Kshatriyas from his arms, the Vaishyas from his thighs and Shudras from his feet. This led several historians to believe that the caste system had gained popularity during the Rigvedic period. But nowhere else is it mentioned in the Rigveda in this context.

It is said that the Purusha-Sukta was. created several hundred years after the Rigveda. Its language is different from the Rigveda. It is clear from the Purusha- Sukta that at that time the four Varnas i.e. Brahmanas, Kshatriyas, Vaishyas and Shudras had come into existence. The Brahmanas served as purohits (priests), the Kshatriyas fought battles, the Vaishyas undertook farming and trade and the Shudras worked to serve the rest three Varnas.

Short Answer Type Questions (Type-1):

Question 1.
Describe in brief but meaningful the salient features of Rigveda.
Or
Discuss the importance of Rigveda’ in Vedic literature.
Or
Write a short note on Rigveda.
Answer:
The Rigveda is the .oldest and the most important of all the Vedas of the Aryans It was composed between 1500-1000 B.C. It has 1028 suktas in it which have been divided into 10 chapters.Each hymn has several mantras. The total number of mantras given in the Rigveda is 10,552. The maximum number of mantras are in praise of Indra. They are 250 in number. The Rigveda is considered to be the most valuable source of knowing about the lives of the Aryans

Question 2.
What do you know about the Samaveda?
Answer:
The word Sama means melodious songs. For this reason Samaveda is also called a collection of melodious songs. It has a total of 1875 mantras. Of these, only 75 mantras are new and the rest have been extracted from the Rigveda. The mantras were sung melodiously during the performance of yajnas. The priests who used to sing these mantras were called the Udagatris. Undoubtedly, the Samaveda can be called the first and the most valuable source of Indian music.

Question 3.
Give a brief account of the Yajurveda.
Answer:
Yajur implies yajna and Yajurveda is a text that consists of the mantras recited at the time of performance of yajnas. It has 2086 mantras in it. A part of the Yajurveda is in prose and a part of it is in poetic form. The objective of this Veda was to tell about the procedure to be followed during the performance of yajnas. The priests who helped while performing the yajnas were called ‘Adhavaryu’. The yajnas were performed in order to appease the gods so that they could fulfil the desires of their devotees. Hence, this Veda was centred around ‘Karmakanda’.

Question 4.
Write a short note on the Atharvaveda.
Or
What do you know about Atharvaveda? Explain.
Answer:
The Atharvaveda was composed in the end. In fact, the Atharvaveda is actually a collection of mantras related to black magic. It gives methods to control over the powers of ghosts and witches. This provps that there was a drastic change in the religious life of the Aryans by then. Besides this, this Veda also describes the cure of the several diseases. This Veda is also called the Brahmaveda because this Veda was written by Brahman priests.

Question 5.
What is the importance of the six Shastras of Philosophy?
Or
Describe the importance of Khat Darshan.
Answer:
There are six well-known schools of. Hindu philosophy, popularly known as Darshanas or Shastras. These are

  • Sankhya Shastra of Kapila
  • Yoga Shastra of Patanjali
  • Nyaya Shastra of Gautama
  • Vaisheshik Shastra of Kanad
  • Purva Mimansa of Jamini
  • Uttar Mimansa of Vyasa. In these testaments, many wise ishis tried to explain intricate philosophical thoughts connecting God, soul, death ad birth.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 4 Introduction to Vedic Literature

Question 6.
What do you mean by Epics and their importance?
Answer:
The Ramayana and the Mahabharata are two famous epics of the later Vedic period. The Ramayana was written by Maharishi Valmiki. It has 24,000 shlokas in it. The main subject of the Ramayana is the battle between Ramchandra and Ravana. Mahabharata is the biggest epic of India. It was written by Rishi Veda Vyasa. It has more than 1,00,000 shlokas in it. The Bhagvadgita is a part of the Mahabharata. The main subject of the Mahabharata is the battle between the Pandvas and the Kauravas. These two epics throw ample light on the religious, social, political and economic conditions of the people at that time.

Question 7.
Describe the importance of Vedic Literature.
Or
What is the importance of the Vedic Literature?
Or
Describe the prominent features of the vedic literature.
Answer:
The Vedic literature occupies a special place in Indian history. It is called the heart and soul of Hinduism. The reason for this is that this literature describes in great detail the basic principles of Hindu philosophy. How was this earth created? What is Atman? What is its connection with the Parmatman? What is Moksha and how is it attained? What is Karma? What is knowledge? Why does man keep wandering in the vicious circle of vices? These are a few mysterious questions the answers to which are clearly given in the later Vedic literature.

Question 8.
Give a brief account of the main two subjects of the Vedic Literature.
Answer:

  • Henotheism : Although the Aryans believed in several gods yet none of them was considered superior or inferior. Each was considered great in his own right and each of them was praised with the same devotion. The deity related to a region was considered supreme in that region.
  • Yajnas and Sacrifices : To appease the gods and goddesses, the Aryans indulged in several yajnas during the Vedic period. These were conducted methodically with all the rituals. The small yajnas were conducted at the family level whereas the bigger yajnas were conducted by the elite class. During the post Vedic period, these yajnas had become a complex process. There was a hope or desire for victory in battles, acquisition of wealth, obtaining a child and happy family life behind performing these yajnas.

Question 9.
What is meant by Self and Absolute according to Vedic Literature?
Answer:

  • What is Self? : The Aryans believed in Self. The word Self has been often used in the Upanishads. It is omnipresent. The living element in all creatures is the Self. For this reason, this is called the source of all light. It is Brahman or God.
  • What is Absolute? : The Upanishads vividly describe the Absolute (the Brahman). It is the Brahman who is the creator of this world. He is the master of unlimitei powers. He is capable of doing everything. He is the source of all lights. He is immorta

Question 10.
What do you mean, by Rita and Dharman?
Answer:
The Rigveda and the other Vedic texts have described the words Rita and Dharman several times, Rita implies the process that runs the functioning of this world. It is according to the Rita that the sun rises in the morning. The sun, moon and stars appear bright. The earth revolves around the sun. It eradicates all darkness to spread light. Rita is therefore a universal truth. Anrita (myth) is the opposite of Rita. During the time of the Upanishads, the word Dharman replaced the word Rita. The word ‘Dharman’ means law. These were constructed by the gods.

Question 11.
What is meant by Moksha according to Vedic Literature?
Answer:
According to the Vedic Literature, the attainment of Moksha is the prime objective of a man’s life. Due to his ignorance and lack of knowledge, man spends his entire life running after the attainment of materialistic ends. When man is able to overcome his ignorance, all his doubts get eradicated. He knows all and attains freedom from all bonds of the world. This is the condition of Moksha. The Soul sublimes with the Supreme Soul and attains happiness forever.

Question 12.
What do you know about Purusha Sukta?
Answer:
The Purusha Sukta is described in the tenth chapter of the Rigveda. According to this, Brahman had created the Brahmanas from his mouth, the Kshatriyas from his arms, the Vaishyas from his thighs and Shudras from his feet. It is clear from the Purusha Sukta that at that time the four Vamas i.e. Brahmanas, Kshatriyas, Vaishyas and Shudras had come into existence. The Brahmanas served as purohits (priests), the Kshatriyas fought battles, the Vaishyas undertook farming and trade and the Shudras worked to serve the above mentioned three Varnas.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 4 Introduction to Vedic Literature

Short Answer Type Questions (Type-2):

Question 1.
Discuss the importance of Rigveda in Vedic liturature.
Or
Write a short note on Rigveda.
Answer:
The Rigveda is the oldest and the most important of all the Vedas of the Aryans It is perhaps the oldest book. It was composed between 1506-1000 B.C. It ‘S 1028 suktas in it which have been divided into 10 chapters. These hymns were iposed by Rishis who were men of great insight and wisdom. Each hymn has mantras. The total number of mantras given in the Rigveda is 10,552. Mantras idressed to various gods and goddesses.

The maximum number of mantras are lise of Indra. They are 250 in number. The gods and goddesses described in the Rigveda symbolised natural forces. They were worshipped for victory in battle, obtaining wealth, children and a comfortable life. The Rigveda is considered to be the most valuable source of knowing about the lives of the Aryans

Question 2.
What do you know about the Samaveda?
Answer:
The word Sama means melodious songs. For this reason Samaveda is also called a collection of melodious songs. It has a total of 1875 mantras. Of these, only 75 mantras are new and the rest have been extracted from the Rigveda. These mantras have been divided into two parts which are called Poorvarachika and Uttarrachika. There are 650 mantras in the Poorvarachika whereas there are 1225 mantras in the Uttarrachika. The mantras were sung melodiously during the performance of yajnas. The priests who used to sing these mantras were called the Udagatris.

These mantras were sung in the seven swaras. Three types of musical instruments were used while singing the mantras i.e. Venu, Dudubhi and Veena. Undoubtedly, the Samaveda can be called the first and the most valuable source of Indian music.

Question 3.
Give a brief account of the Yajurveda.
Answer:
Yajur implies yajna and Yajurveda is a text that consists of the mantras recited at the time of performance of yajnas. It has 2086 mantras in it. These mantras have been divided into 40 chapters. A part of the Yajurveda is in prose and a part of it is in poetic form. It is believed that this Veda was composed in Kurukshetra. The objective of this Veda was to tell about the procedure to be followed during the performance of yajnas. The priests who helped while performing the yajnas were called ‘Adhavaryu’. The yajnas were performed in order to appease the gods so that they could fulfil the desires of their devotees.

Hence, this Veda was centred around ‘Karmakanda’. It also tells about the measures to acquire divine powers. This Veda is divided into two parts i.e. Shukla Yajurveda and Krishna Yajurveda. The Shukla Yajurveda describes only the mantras whereas the Krishna Yajurveda also gives their meanings. This Veda gives us valuable information about the social and religious lives of the Aryans

Question 4.
Write a short note on the Atharvaveda.
Or
What do you know about Atharvaveda? Explain.
Answer:
The Atharvaveda was composed in the end. Its name came from the name of Atharvana Rishi. He was the master of magical powers and was famous for destroying ghosts and spirits. In fact, the Atharvaveda is actually a collection of mantras related to black magic. It gives methods to control over the powers of ghosts and witches. This proves that there was a drastic change in the religious life of the Aryans by ther Besides this, this Veda also describes the cure of the several diseases.

This Veda also called the Brahmaveda because this Veda was written by Brahman prie They took the aid of Agni to protect human beings from ghosts and spirits. Ther a total 731 stanzas and approximately 6000 mantras. Of these, approximately mantras have been extracted from the Rigveda. This Veda has been divided which comprises of 928 mantras.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 4 Introduction to Vedic Literature

Question 5.
What is the importance of the six schools of Indian Philosophy?
Answer:
There are six well-known schools of Hindu philosophy, popularly known as Darshanas or Shastras. In these testaments, many wise Rishis tried to explain intricate philosophical thoughts connecting God, soul, death and birth. The higher philosophy indicates how the deep wisdom of the Aryans was superior, how they were ahead of others and how they could check the temptations of materialism.

  1. Sankhya Shastra of Kapila : Rishi Kapila is the author of this Shastra. He denies the existence of God and asserts that matter (prakrit) and soul are the only two realities. It is through the formation and reformation of matter and soul, the creation takes place.
  2. Yoga Shastra of Patanjali : It is directly related to the Yoga and suggests the practice of Yoga for achieving God.
  3. Nyaya Shastra of Gautama : Rishi Gautama has expounded a philosophy that God can be realised through right thinking and right knowledge.
  4. Vaisheshik Shastra of Kanad : Rishi Kanad holds the view that the whole world is an assimilation of atoms, which are indestructible.
  5. Purva Mimansa of Jamini : Jamini’s philosophy throws light on the sacrifices and religious rites of the Aryans which is a key to the attainment of Mukti.
  6. Uttar Mimansa of Vyasa : Here Rishi Vyasa advocates worshipping of God. God is supreme, omnipotent and Maker of everything. Therefore, He should be worshipped with utmost sincerity and devotion.

Question 6.
What do you mean by Epics and their .importance?
Answer:
The Ramayana and the Mahabharata are two famous epics of the later Vedic period. The Ramayana was written by Maharishi Valmiki. It has 24,000 shlokas in it. The main subject of the Ramayana is the battle between Ramchandra and Ravana. Mahabharata is the biggest epic of India. It was written by Rishi Veda Vyasa. It has more than 1,00,000 shlokas in it. The Bhagvadgita is a part of the Mahabharata. The main subject of the Mahabharata is the battle between the Pandvas and the Kauravas. These two epics throw ample light on the religious, social, political and economic conditions of the people at that time.

Question 7.
Describe the vedic literature.
Or
Describe the importance of Vedic Literature.
Or
What is the importance of the Vedic Literature?
Or
Describe the prominent features of the vedic literature.
Answer:
The Vedic literature occupies a special place in Indian history. It is called the heart and soul of Hinduism. The reason for this is that this literature describes in great detail the basic principles of Hindu philosophy. How was this earth created? What is Atman? What is its connection with the Parmatman? What is Moksha and how is it attained? What is Karma? What is knowledge? Why does man keep wandering in the vicious circle of vices? These are a few mysterious questions the answers to which are clearly given in the later Vedic literature.

Hence the Vedic literature acts as a pillar of Hinduism. Besides this, the literature is a valuable source of information about the social, political and economic life of people. In brief, the Vedic literature acted as a mirror for the Indian culture. It has been a source of inspiration for the authors and scholars of not only India but abroad as well. Undoubtedly, it is a matter of great pride for us.

Question 8.
Describe the number of Vedas and their contents in brief but meaningful.
Or
Give a brief account of the main subjects of the Vedic Literature.
Or
Describe the prominent features of Vedic literature.
Answer:
The number of Vedas are four. The main subjects of the vedic literature are as follows :

(1) Henotheism : Although the Aryans believed in several gods yet none of them Was considered superior or inferior. Each was considered great in his own right and each of them was praised with the same devotion. The deity related to a region was considered supreme in that region.

(2) Yajnas and Sacrifices : To appease the gods and goddesses, the Aryans indulged in several yajnas during the Vedic period. These were conducted methodically with all the rituals. The small yajnas were conducted at the family level whereas the bigger yajnas were conducted by the elite class. During the post Vedic period, these yajnas had become a complex process. There was a hope or desire for victory in battles, acquisition of wealth, obtaining a child and happy family life behind performing these yajnas.

(3) How was the world created? : How was the world created? The Nasdia Sukta of Rigveda gives us important information with regard to this. It tells us that before the creation of the world, there was the presence of God alone. There was darkness all around without Him. It was then that God decided to create the world.

(4) What is Self? : The Aryans believed in Self. The word Self has been often used in the Upanishads. It is omnipresent. The living element in all creatures is the Self. For this reason, this is called the source of all light. It is Brahman or God.

(5) What is Absolute? : The Upanishads vividly describe the Absolute (the Brahman). It is the Brahman who is the creator of this world. He is the master of unlimited powers. He is capable of doing everything. He is the source of all lights. He is immortal.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 4 Introduction to Vedic Literature

Question 9.
What do you mean by Rita and Dharman?
Answer:
The Rigveda and the other Vedic texts have described the words Rita and Dharman several times. Rita implies the process that runs the functioning of this world. It is according to the Rita that the sun rises in the morning. The sun, moon and stars appear bright. The earth revolves around the sun. It eradicates all darkness to spread light. Rita is therefore a universal truth. Anrita (myth) is the opposite of. Rita.

During the time of the Upariishads, the word Dharman replaced the word Rita. The word ‘Dharman’ means law: These were constructed by the gods. These were applicable to the materialistic world, men and sacrifices. The good men led their lives, according to Dharman.

Question 10.
What is meant by Moksha according to Vedic Literature?
Answer:
According to the Vedic Literature, the attainment of Moksha is the prime objective of a man’s life. Due to his ignorance and lack of knowledge, man spends his.: entire life running after the attainment of materialistic ends. He indulges in materialistic pleasures and thinks that he has achieved everything by acquiring wealth. He forgets that everything in this world is momentary. He is forever trapped in these cobwebs and is never able to get freedom.

When man is able to overcome his ignorance, all his doubts get eradicated. He knows all and attains freedom from all bonds of the world. This is the condition of Moksha. The Soul sublimes with the Supreme Soul and attains happiness forever.

Question 11.
What do you know about Purusha Sukta?
Answer:
The Purusha Sukta is described in the tenth chapter of the Rigveda. According to this, Brahman had created the Brahmanas from his mouth, the Kshatriyas from his arms, the Vaishyas from his thighs and Shudras from his feet. This led several historians to believe that the caste system had gained popularity during the Rigvedic period. But nowhere else is it mentioned in the Rigveda in this context. It is said that the Purusha Sukta was created several hundred years after the Rigveda.

Its language is different from the Rigveda. It is clear from the Purusha Sukta that at that time the four Varnas i.e. Brahmanas, Kshatriyas, Vaishyas and Shudras had come into existence. The Brahmanas served as purohits (priests), the Kshatriyas fought battles, the Vaishyas undertook farming and trade and the Shudras worked to serve the- above mentioned three Varnas.

Answer in One Word to One Sentence:

Question 1.
What do you mean by the Vedic literature?
Answer:
The Vedic literature means the literature written by the Aryans.

Question 2.
In which language the Vedic literature was written?
Answer:
Sanskrit.

Question 3.
How many parts does the Vedic literature has?
Answer:
Two parts.

Question 4.
At what of time the Vedas were written?
Answer:
1500-600 BC.

Question 5.
Who composed the Vedas?
Answer:
The Vedas were composed by the Rishis as divine ordinance.

Question 6.
What does ‘Shruti’ mean?
Answer:
‘Shruti’ implies that part of Vedic literature which the Rishis composed at the instance of divine revelation.

Question 7.
What is meant by ‘Smriti’?
Answer:
Smriti form that part of Vedic literature which the Rishis created out of their personal understanding of the world.

Question 8.
What is meant by the Veda?
Answer:
Reservoir of knowledge.

Question 9.
Give the number of the Vedas.
Answer:
Four.

Question 10.
Who classified the four Vedas?
Answer:
‘Rishi’ Ved Vyasa Ji.

Question 11.
Mention the name of the Vedas.
Or
Write the names of four Vedas.
Answer:
The Rigveda, the Samaveda, the Yajurveda and the Atharvaveda.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 4 Introduction to Vedic Literature

Question 12.
Which is the most ancient and important Veda?
Answer:
Rigveda.

Question 13.
When was the Rigveda composed?
Answer:
1500 to 1000 BC.

Question 14.
How many Suktas does the Rigveda contain?
Answer:
1028 Suktas.

Question 15.
How many Mandals does the Rigveda contain?
Answer:
Ten Mandals.

Question 16.
Write the total number of hymns given in the Rigveda.
Or
How many Mantras does the Rigveda contains?
Answer:
10,552 Mantras.

Question 17.
To which deity the largest number of Mantras have been dedicated in the Rigveda?
Answer:
Lord Indra.

Question 18.
How many Mantras in the Rigveda have been dedicated to Lord Indra?
Answer:
250 Mantras.

Question 19.
Mention the names of Rishis whose Mantras are given in the Rigveda.
Or
Mention any two Rishis whose Mantras the Rigveda contains.
Answer:

  • Vamadeva,
  • Vishvamitra.

Question 20.
Mention the name of women whose Mantras find space in the Rigveda.
Or
Tell the name of any two women who have contributed Mantras to Rigveda.
Answer:

  • Apala,
  • Ghosha.

Question 21.
The Gayatri Mantra finds mention in which Veda?
Answer:
Rigveda.

Question 22.
Which Veda is considered the source of Indian music?
Answer:
Samaveda.

Question 23.
How many Mantras does the Samaveda contain?
Answer:
1875 Mantras.

Question 24.
By what name was the purohit (priest) addressed who recited Mantras?
Answer:
Udagatri.

Question 25.
Which Veda contains the Mantras recited at Yajna?
Answer:
Yajurveda.

Question 26.
How was the priest offering sacrifice at the time of Yajna addressed?
Answer:
Hotri.

Question 27.
In what two parts Yajurveda is divided?
Answer:

  • Shukla Yajurveda,
  • Krishna Yajurveda.

Question 28.
Which was the last Veda to be composed?
Answer:
Atharvaveda.

Question 29.
How many Suktas does the Atharvaveda has?
Answer:
731 Suktas.

Question 30.
Which Veda contains Mantras related to black magic?
Answer:
Atharvaveda.

Question 31.
Mention two Vedas which formed part of tri-vidya.
Answer:

  • The Rigveda,
  • The Samaveda.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 4 Introduction to Vedic Literature

Question 32.
Why were the Brahmanas composed?
Answer:
To simplify the understanding of the Vedas.

Question 33.
Mention any two Brahmanas compositions.
Answer:

  • Aitreya Brahmana,
  • Taittiriya Brahmana.

Question 34.
Name the hooks enunciating the code of conduct for those ascetics who lived in the forests.
Answer:
Aranayakas.

Question 35.
What is meant by Vedangas?
Answer:
Constituent of the Veda.

Question 36.
Mention any two Vedangas.
Answer:

  • Shiksha,
  • Kalpa.

Question 37.
Which Vedanga reflects socio-religio customs of the Aryans?
Answer:
Kalpa Vedanga.

Question 38.
Name any two Sutras.
Answer:

  • Srauta Sutra,
  • Griha Sutra.

Question 39.
How many are the Upvedas?
Answer:
Four.

Question 40.
Mention any two of the Upvedas.
Answer:

  • Ayurveda,
  • Dhanurveda.

Question 41.
Which Veda describes about medicines and herbs?
Answer:
Atharavaveda.

Question 42.
Mention the name of Upveda that describes the art of war.
Answer:
Dhanurveda.

Question 43.
On whcih subject the Gandharvaveda throws light?
Answer:
Art of music.

Question 44.
Who composed the Yoga Shastra?
Answer:
Patanjali.

Question 45.
Mention any two Shastras.
Answer:
Yoga Shastra and Nyaya Shastra.

Question 46.
Mention two great epics of India.
Answer:

  • The Ramayana,
  • The Mahabharata.

Question 47.
Which is the greatest epic of India?
Answer:
Mahabharata.

Question 48.
Who composed Mahabharata?
Answer:
Maharishi Ved Vyasa Ji.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 4 Introduction to Vedic Literature

Question 49.
The Mahabharata consists of how many shlokas?
Answer:
The Mahabharata contains one lakh shlokas.

Question 50.
Who composed the Ramayana?
Answer:
Maharishi Valmiki Ji.

Question 51.
Give the number of shlokas in the Ramayana.
Answer:
24,000 shlokas.

Question 52.
Mention any two main subjects of the Vedic literature.
Answer:

  • What is self?
  • Rita and Dharman.

Question 53.
How many gods are mentioned in the Rigveda?
Answer:
33.

Question 54.
Which Sukta of the Rigveda mentions about the origin of the world?
Answer:
Nasdia Sukta of the Rigveda describes about the origin of the world.

Question 55.
What according to the Vedic literature is the ultimate aim of human life?
Answer:
The attainment of Moksha.

Question 56.
Which Sukta of the Rigveda mentions about four castes?
Answer:
Purusha Sukta.

Fill in the Blanks:

1. Vedas are …………… in number.
Answer:
four

2. The ………….. is the oldest and the most important veda.
Answer:
Rigveda

3. The Rigveda contains a total of …………… Suktas.
Answer:
1028

4. The Samaveda is also called ………….. Granth.
Answer:
Gaayan

5. The …………… contains the mantras recited at Yegna.
Answer:
Yajurveda

6. The …………… contains the dscription of herbal medicine used to cure diseases.
Answer:
Atharvaveda

7. The Upanishads are ………….. in number.
Answer:
108

8. The Vedangas imply a part of …………
Answer:
Vedas

9. The Vedangas are …………… in number.
Answer:
six

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 4 Introduction to Vedic Literature

10. The ………….. describes the art of fighting battles.
Answer:
Dhanurveda

11. The ………….. throws light on the subjects pertaining to music.
Answer:
Gandharvaveda

12. The writer of the Yoga Shastra was …………..
Answer:
Patanjali.

13. The name of the author of the Nyaya Shastra was ………….
Answer:
Gautama

14. The Ramayana was written by ……………..
Answer:
Maharishi Valmiki Ji

15. The Mahabharata was composed by ……………
Answer:
Maharishi Ved Vyasa Ji

16. The priest who offered the sacrifice at the time of Yajna was adressed as ……………..
Answer:
Hotri

True Or False:

1. The Rigvedic literature is also called Saruti.
Answer:
True

2. The Vedas are eight in number.
Answer:
False

3. The Rigveda is oldest and important Veda of the Aryans.
Answer:
True

4. The Vedas were written in Pali language.
Answer:
False

5. Maharishi Ved Vyasa Ji classified the Vedas.
Answer:
True

6. The Rigveda has been divided into 10 mandals.
Answer:
True

7. Maximum number of mantras are in praise of Agni in the Rigveda.
Answer:
False

8. Udagatri were those priests who recited mantras.
Answer:
True

9. The Yajurveda is the Veda which contains the mantras recited at the time of Yajnas.
Answer:
True

10. The Atharvaveda is also known as the Brahamaveda.
Answer:
True

11. The Brahmanas are part of the Upanishads.
Answer:
False

12. The Upanishads are total 108 in number.
Answer:
True

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 4 Introduction to Vedic Literature

13. The Kalpa Vedanga is the most important Vedanga.
Answer:
True

14. The Dharma Sutra gives a description of prevalent laws and traditions of the Maurayan period.
Answer:
False

15. There are four Upvedas.
Answer:
True

16. The Ayurveda describes the art of war.
Answer:
False

17. Rishi Kapila is the author of Sankhya Shastra.
Answer:
True

18. The Ramayana was composed by Maharishi Valmiki Ji.
Answer:
True

19. The Mahabharata consists of 24000 shlokas.
Answer:
False

20. The attainment of Moksha is the ultimate aim of human life according to Vedic literature.
Answer:
True

Multiple Choice Questions:

1. In which language the Vedic literature was written?
(a) Pah
(b) Prakrit
(c) Hindi
(d) Sanskrit
Answer:
(d) Sanskrit

2. What is the total number of Vedas?
(a) 4
(b) 5
(c) 6
(d) 18
Answer:
(a) 4

3. By which Rishi Vedas were divided?
(a) Ved Vyasa
(b) Vissh
(c) Vishwamitra
(d) Gautam
Answer:
(a) Ved Vyasa

4. Which of the following is the oldest and Important Veda?
(a) The Rigveda
(b) The Samaveda
(c) The Yajurveda
(d) The Atharvaveda
Answer:
(a) The Rigveda

5. Which of the following is not a Veda?
(a) The Gandharva Veda
(b) The Samaveda
(c) The Yajurveda
(d) The Atharvaveda
Answer:
(a) The Gandharva Veda

6. How many suktas are there in the Rigveda?
(a) 1028
(b) 1875
(c) 731
(d) 10,552
Answer:
(a) 1028

7. Which of the following Veda is not in the Tri-vedya?
(a) The Atharvaveda
(b) The Yajurveda
(c) The Samaveda
(d) The Rigveda.
Answer:
(a) The Atharvaveda

8. Which Veda contains the Mantras recited at Yajna?
(a) The Rigveda
(b) The Samaveda
(c) The Yajurveda
(d) The Atharvaveda
Answer:
(c) The Yajurveda

9. The Aranyakas are part of which literature?
(a) The Upanishads
(b) The Brahmanas
(c) The Dharmashastras
(d) The Mahabharta
Answer:
(b) The Brahmanas

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 4 Introduction to Vedic Literature

10. What is the total number of the Upanishads?
(a) 18
(b) 108
(c) 48
(d) 128
Answer:
(b) 108

11. Which of the following Upavedas describes medicinal herbs?
(a) Ayurveda
(b) Dhanurveda
(c) Gandharvaveda
(d) Shilpaveda
Answer:
(a) Ayurveda

12. Which of the following composes Yoga Shastra?
(a) Kapila
(b) Patanjali
(c) Gautama
(d) Vyasa
Answer:
(b) Patanjali

13. Who composed The Ramayana?
(a) Maharishi Ved Vyasa Ji
(b) MaharishiValmiki Ji
(c) Maharishi Vishwamitra Ji
(d) Maharishi Gautama Ji
Answer:
(b) MaharishiValmiki Ji

14. How many shlokas are there in the Ramayana?
(a) 14,000
(b) 20,000
(c) 24,000
(d) 26,000
Answer:
(c) 24,000

15. Who wrote the Mahabharta?
(a) Maharishi Ved Vyasa Ji
(b) Maharishi Balmiki Ji
(c) Maharishi Gautma Ji
(d) Maharishi Vashishtha Ji
Answer:
(a) Maharishi Ved Vyasa Ji